I E C 62 0 40 -1
®
Edition 2.0 201 7-09
E XTE N D E D VE RS I ON
colour
i n sid e
This Extended version of IEC 62040-1 :201 7 includes the provisions of the general rules
of IEC 62477-1 :201 2
U n i n te rru pti bl e
power s ys tem s (U P S ) –
IEC 62040-1 :201 7-09 EXV(en)
P art 1 : Safety req u i rem en ts
T H I S P U B L I C AT I O N
I S C O P YRI G H T
C o p yri g h t © 2 0 1 7 I E C , G e n e v a ,
P RO T E C T E D
S wi tz e rl a n d
All rights reserved. Unless otherwise specified, no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from
either IEC or IEC's member National Committee in the country of the requester. If you have any questions about I EC
copyright or have an enquiry about obtaining additional rights to this publication, please contact the address below or
your local I EC member National Committee for further information.
IEC Central Office
3, rue de Varembé
CH-1 21 1 Geneva 20
Switzerland
Tel.: +41 22 91 9 02 1 1
Fax: +41 22 91 9 03 00
info@iec.ch
www. iec.ch
Ab ou t th e I E C
The I nternational Electrotechnical Commission (I EC) is the leading global organization that prepares and publishes
I nternational Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies.
Ab o u t I E C p u b l i ca ti o n s
The technical content of IEC publications is kept under constant review by the IEC. Please make sure that you have the
latest edition, a corrigenda or an amendment might have been published.
I E C Catal og u e - webs tore. i ec. ch /catal og u e
The stand-alone application for consulting the entire
bibliographical information on IEC International Standards,
Technical Specifications, Technical Reports and other
documents. Available for PC, Mac OS, Android Tablets and
iPad.
I E C pu bl i cati on s s earch - www. i ec. ch /s earch pu b
The advanced search enables to find IEC publications by a
variety of criteria (reference number, text, technical
committee,…). It also gives information on projects, replaced
and withdrawn publications.
E l ectroped i a - www. el ectroped i a. org
The world's leading online dictionary of electronic and
electrical terms containing 20 000 terms and definitions in
English and French, with equivalent terms in 1 6 additional
languages. Also known as the International Electrotechnical
Vocabulary (IEV) online.
I E C G l os s ary - s td . i ec. ch /g l os s ary
65 000 electrotechnical terminology entries in English and
French extracted from the Terms and Definitions clause of
IEC publications issued since 2002. Some entries have been
collected from earlier publications of IEC TC 37, 77, 86 and
CISPR.
I E C J u s t Pu bl i s h ed - webs tore. i ec. ch /j u s tpu bl i s h ed
more
standards
from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Stay up to dateGet
on all
new FREE
IEC publications.
Just Published
details all new publications released. Available online and
If you wish to give us your feedback on this publication or
also once a month by email.
need further assistance, please contact the Customer Service
Centre: csc@iec.ch.
I E C C u s tom er S ervi ce C en tre - webs tore. i ec. ch /cs c
I E C 62 0 40 -1
®
Edition 2.0 201 7-09
RE D LI N E VE RS I ON
colour
i n sid e
This Extended version of IEC 62040-1 :201 7 includes the provisions of the general rules
of IEC 62477-1 :201 2
U n i n terru pti bl e
power s ys te m s (U P S ) –
P art 1 : Safety req u i rem en ts
INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSION
ICS 29.200
Warn i n g !
ISBN 978-2-8322-4886-7
M ake s u re th a t you ob tai n ed th i s p u b l i cati on
® Registered trademark of the International Electrotechnical Commission
from an au th ori zed
d i s tri b u tor.
–2–
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
CONTENTS
FOREWORD . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 7
I NTRODUCTI ON .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 9
1
Scope .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. 1 0
2 N orm ative references . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 0
3 Terms and definitions . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 4
4 Protection against hazards . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 27
5 Test requ irements .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... . 95
6 I nform ation and marking req uirements .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 1 38
Annex A (normative) Additional inform ation for protection against electric shock .. ... ... ... ... ... 1 51
Annex B (informative) Consid erations for the reduction of the pollution degree ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 72
Annex C (inform ative) Symbols referred to in this docum ent ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. 1 73
Annex D (norm ative) Evalu ation of clearance and creepage distances . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 1 74
Annex E (informative) Altitud e correction for clearances . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 81
Annex F (norm ative) Clearance and creepage d istance d etermination for frequ encies
greater than 30 kH z ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. 1 82
Annex G (inform ative) Cross-sections of round conductors .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 88
Annex H (inform ative) Guidelines for RCD compatibility .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... . 1 89
Annex I (inform ative) Examples of overvoltage category reduction .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 93
Annex J (inform ative) Burn thresholds for touchable surfaces . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 201
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Annex K (informative) Table of electrochemical potentials . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 2 04
Annex L (informative) Measuring instrument for touch current m easurem ents .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 205
Annex M (informative) Test probes for d etermining access .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. 20 6
Annex AA (inform ative) Minimum and maximum cross-section of copper conductors
suitable for connection to term inals for external conductor .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... . 21 0
Annex BB (normative) Reference loads . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 21 1
Annex CC (norm ative) Ventilation of lead-acid battery compartments .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 21 5
Annex DD (inform ative) Guidance for disconnection of batteries during shipment .. ... ... ... .. . 21 8
Annex EE (informative) Short-time withstand current test procedure – Gu idance and
typical values ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 220
Annex FF (inform ative) Maxim um heating effect in transform er tests. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 224
Annex GG (normative) Requirem ents for the mou nting m eans of rack-mou nted
equipment .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 226
Bibliograph y .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 228
Figure 1 – Touch time - d. c. peak voltage zones of ventricular fibrillation in dry skin
cond ition .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 37
Figure 2 – Touch time - d. c. peak voltage zones of ventricular fibrillation in water-wet
skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 37
Figure 3 – Touch time - d. c. peak voltage zones of ventricular fibrillation in saltwaterwet skin condition . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... . 38
Figure 4 – Exam ple of a UPS assem bl y and its associated protective equ ipotential
bond ing.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 42
Figure 5 – Exam ple of a UPS assem bl y and its associated protective equ ipotential
bond ing.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 43
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
–3–
Figu re 6 – Fire enclosure bottom openings below an unenclosed or partially enclosed
fire-hazardous component.. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 71
Figure 7 – Fire enclosure baffle construction .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . 72
Figure 8 – Supported and unsupported enclosure parts . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... 89
Figure 9 – I mpact test using a steel ball .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 01
Figure 1 0 – Voltage test procedures . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 09
Figure 1 1 – Protective eq uipotential bonding im pedance test for separate unit with
power fed from the U PS with protection for the power cable . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. 1 1 5
Figure 1 2 – Protective eq uipotential bonding im pedance test for sub-assem bl y with
accessible parts and with power fed from the U PS . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .. ... 1 1 6
Figure 1 3 – Circu it for high-current arcing test . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 31
Figure 1 4 – Test fixture for hot-wire ignition test ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... 1 32
Figure 1 01 – Exam ples of design of openings preventing vertical access .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 40
Figure 1 02 – Test circu it for load-ind uced change of reference potential – Singlephase output . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 1 9
Figure 1 03 – Test circu it for load-ind uced change of reference potential – Three-phase
output ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 1 9
Figure 1 04 – Voltage backfeed warning label . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 46
Figure A. 1 – Protection by DVC As with protective separation .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. 1 51
Figure A. 2 – Protection by m eans of protective impedance . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 52
Figure A. 3 – Protection by using limited voltages ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... 1 53
Figure A. 4 – Touch tim e- d. c. voltage zones for dry skin condition ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 56
Figure A. 5 – Touch tim e- d. c. voltage zones for water-wet skin cond ition ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 56
Figure A. 6 – Touch tim e- d. c. voltage for saltwater-wet skin condition ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 1 57
Figure A. 7 – Touch tim e- d. c. voltage zones of dry skin condition .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 58
Figure A. 8 – Touch tim e- d. c. voltage zones of water-wet skin condition .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 1 58
Figure A. 9 – Touch tim e- d. c. voltage zones of saltwater-wet skin cond ition .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 59
Figure A. 1 0 – Touch time- d .c. voltage zones of dry skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 60
Figure A. 1 1 – Touch time- d .c. voltage zones of water-wet skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 60
Figure A. 1 2 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones for dry skin condition ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 61
Figure A. 1 3 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones of water-wet skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 62
Figure A. 1 4 – Touch time- a.c. voltage of saltwater-wet skin condition .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 1 62
Figure A. 1 5 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones of dry skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 63
Figure A. 1 6 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones of water-wet skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 64
Figure A. 1 7 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones of saltwater-wet skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 64
Figure A. 1 8 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones of dry skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 65
Figure A. 1 9 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones of water-wet skin condition .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 66
Figure A. 20 – Typical waveform for a. c. working voltage .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... . 1 67
Figure A. 21 – Typical waveform for d. c. working voltage .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... . 1 67
Figure A. 22 – Typical waveform for pu lsating working voltage .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 68
Figure F. 1 – Diagram for dimensioning of clearances .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 1 83
Figure F. 2 – Diagram for dimensioning of creepage distances ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 85
Figure F. 3 – Permissible field strength for dimensioning of solid insulation according
to Equation (1 ) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... .. 1 87
Figure H .1 – Flow chart leading to selection of the RCD type upstream of a UPS . ... ... ... ... ... 1 89
–4–
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Figu re H . 2 – Fau lt current waveform s in connections with power electronic converter
devices . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 91
Figure I . 1 – Basic insulation evaluation for circuits connected to the origin of the
installation m ains su ppl y . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 93
Figure I . 2 – Basic insulation evaluation for circuits connected to the mains suppl y .. ... ... ... ... 1 94
Figure I . 3 – Basic insulation evaluation for single and three phase equ ipment not
permanentl y connected to the m ains suppl y . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 94
Figure I . 4 – Basic insulation evaluation for circuits connected to the origin of the
installation m ains su ppl y where internal SPD s are used . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . ... ... . 1 94
Figure I . 5 – Basic insulation evaluation for circuits connected to the mains suppl y
where internal SPDs are used . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 95
Figure I . 6 – Exam ple of protective separation evaluation for circuits connected to the
mains supply where internal SPDs are used .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 95
Figure I . 7 – Exam ple of protective separation evaluation for circuits connected to the
mains supply where internal SPDs are used . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 96
Figure I . 8 –Exam ple of protective separation evalu ation for circu its connected to the
mains supply where internal SPDs are used .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 96
Figure I . 9 – Basic insulation evaluation for circuits not connected directl y to the m ains
suppl y ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 97
Figure I . 1 0 – Basic insu lation evalu ation for circu its not connected directl y to the
suppl y m ains . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 97
Figure I . 1 1 – Functional insu lation evaluation within circuits affected by external
transients ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 98
Figure I . 1 2 – Basic insu lation evalu ation for circu its both connected and not connected
Getmmore
FREE
directl y to the
ains su
ppl y ..standards
... ... ... ... .. ...from
... ... ...Standard
... ... ... ... ...Sharing
. .. ... ... ...Group
... ... .. ...and
... ...our
... ... chats
... ... ... ... ... .. . . 1 98
Figure I . 1 3 – Insulation evalu ation for accessible circuit of DVC A .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 99
Figure I . 1 4 – U PS with mains and non-m ains supply withou t galvanic separation .. ... ... ... ... .. 1 99
Figure I . 1 5 – Transformer (basic) isolated U PS inverter with SPD and transformer to
reduce im pulse voltage for functional and basic insu lation. . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 2 00
Figure J. 1 – Burn threshold spread when the skin is in contact with a hot smooth
surface mad e of bare (u ncoated) metal .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 201
Figure J . 2 – Rise in the burn threshold spread from Figure J . 1 for metals which are
coated by shellac varnish of a thickness of 50 µ m, 1 00 µ m and 1 50 µ m . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 202
Figure J . 3 – Rise in the burn threshold spread from Figure J . 1 for metals coated with
the specific m aterials ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... 202
Figure J . 4 – Burn threshold spread when the skin is in contact with a hot smooth
surface m ade of ceramics, glass and stone materials ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... . 203
Figure J . 5 – Burn threshold spread when the skin is in contact with a hot smooth
surface made of plastics ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 203
Figure K. 1 – Electrochemical potentials (V) .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 204
Figure L. 1 – Measuring instrument . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 205
Figure M. 2 – J ointed test finger (I PXXB) ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . 207
Figure M. 3 – Test rod 2, 5 mm (I P3X) ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 208
Figure M. 1 01 – J ointed test finger (I P2X) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 209
Figure BB. 1 – Reference resistive load .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 21 1
Figure BB. 2 – Reference inductive-resistive load (series) ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 21 2
Figure BB. 3 – Reference inductive-resistive load (parallel) . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 2 1 2
Figure BB. 4 – Reference capacitive-resistive load (series) .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... . 21 2
Figure BB. 5 – Reference capacitive-resistive load (parallel) ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... . 21 2
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Figu re
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
–5–
BB. 6 – Reference non-linear load ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 21 3
DD. 1 – Precautionary label for prod ucts shipped with the battery disconnected . ... .. 21 8
DD. 2 – Precautionary label for prod ucts shipped with the battery connected .. ... ... .. . 21 9
EE. 1 – 3-wire test circuit for U PS short-time withstand current .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 220
EE. 2 – 4-wire test circuit for U PS short-time withstand current .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 221
EE. 3 – 2-wire test circuit for single phase UPS short-tim e withstand current .. ... ... .. . 222
Table 1 – Alphabetical list of term s ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 4
Table 2 – Selection of DVC for touch voltage to protect against ventricular fibrillation ... ... .. ... 35
Table 3 – Selection of bod y contact area .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 35
Table 4 – Selection of hum idity condition of the skin ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... 35
Table 5 – Stead y state voltage limits for the decisive voltage classes ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 36
Table 6 – Protection requ irements for circuit under consid eration . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 39
Table 7 – PE conductor cross-section a ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 44
Table 8 – Definitions of pollu tion degrees . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 50
Table 9 – I mpulse withstand voltage and temporary overvoltage versus system voltage ... ... . 52
Table 1 0 – Clearance distances for fu nctional, basic or su pplementary i nsu lation . ... ... ... ... ... . 58
Table 1 1 – Creepage distances (in m illim etres) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 60
Table 1 2 – Generic materials for the direct su pport of uninsulated live parts . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 62
Table 1 3 – Permitted openings in fire enclosure bottoms . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 72
Table 1 4 – Maxim um measured total tem peratures for internal materials and
com ponents .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 74
Table 1 5 – Maxim um measured tem peratures for accessible parts of the U PS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 76
Table 1 6 – Limits for sou rces withou t an overcurrent protective device . ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 77
Table 1 7 – Limits for power sources with an overcurrent protective device . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 77
Table 1 9 – Wire bending space from terminals to enclosure .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... . 86
Table 20 – Thickness of sheet metal for enclosures: carbon steel or stainless steel .. ... ... .. ... 90
Table 21 – Thickness of sheet metal for enclosures: alum inium, copper or brass ... ... ... ... ... .. 91
Table 22 – Test overview .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 97
Table 23 – Pull values for hand les and manual control securement .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 03
Table 24 – I m pulse voltage test ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 1 05
Table 25 – I m pulse test voltage ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 1 06
Table 26 – AC or d.c. test voltage for circuits connected directl y to m ains suppl y ... ... ... ... ... 1 07
Table 27 – A.c. or d.c. test voltage for circuits connected to non-mains suppl y without
tem porary overvoltages.. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... . 1 08
Table 28 – Partial discharge test .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. 1 1 1
Table 29 – Test duration for protective equ ipotential bond ing test . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 1 7
Table 30 – Environm ental tests .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 35
Table 31 – Dry heat test (stead y state) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 36
Table 32 – Damp heat test (stead y state) .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 37
Table 1 01 – U PS input port configuration .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 32
Table 1 02 – Overvoltage categories .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 51
Table 1 03 – M axim um tem perature lim its for m agnetic components d uring stored
energ y mod e of operation . ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 73
–6–
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Table 1 04 – Short-time withstand current .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 21
Table 1 05 – Temperature lim its for transformer windings . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 24
Table A. 1 – Selection of touch voltage sets to protect against ventricular fibrillation .. ... ... .. . 1 54
Table A. 2 – Selection of touch voltage sets to protect against m uscu lar reaction . ... ... ... ... ... 1 55
Table A. 3 – Selection of touch voltage sets to protect against startle reaction . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 55
Table A. 4 – Examples for protection against electrical shock ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 70
Table A. 1 01 – Comparison of lim its of working voltage .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... . 1 71
Table C. 1 – Sym bols used ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 73
Table D. 1 – Width of grooves by pollution degree . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 74
Table E. 1 – Correction factor for clearances at altitu des between 2 000 m and
20 000 m . ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... 1 81
Table E. 2 – Test voltages for verifying clearances at different altitudes ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . 1 81
Table F. 1 – Minimum values of clearances in air at atm ospheric pressure for
inhom ogeneous field conditions (Table 1 of I EC 60664-4: 2005) . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... 1 84
Table F. 2 – Mu ltiplication factors for clearances in air at atmospheric pressure for
approxim atel y homogeneous field cond itions ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... ... ... ... ... .. 1 84
Table F. 3 – Minimum values of creepage distances for d ifferent frequency ranges
(Table 2 of I EC 60664-4: 2005) ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1 86
Table G. 1 – Stand ard cross-sections of round conductors... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... . 1 88
Table AA. 1 – Cond uctor cross-sections (extract from I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 ) ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .. 21 0
Table FF. 1 – Test steps . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. . .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. ... . .. ... . 224
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
IEC
62040-1 : 201 7
E XV
©
I EC
201 7
I N T E R N AT I O N AL
–
7
–
E L E C T R O T E C H N I C AL
COM M I SSI ON
____________
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS (UPS) –
Part 1 : Safety requirements
F O RE W O RD
1 )
Th e
I n t e rn a t i o n a l
al l
n a ti o n a l
i n t e rn a t i o n a l
th i s
end
c o - o p e ra t i o n
an d
Te ch n i ca l
in
R e p o rt s ,
th e
s u b j ect
g o v e rn m e n t a l
wi th
2)
th e
Th e
d eci s i o n s
of
i n t e re s t e d
3)
d eal t
b e t we e n
I EC
in
P u b l i ca ti o n s
is
o rd e r
to
th e
5)
an y
i ts e l f
s e rv i c e s
Al l
No
a
wo rl d wi d e
c o n c e rn i n g
I EC
s t a n d a rd i z a t i o n
pu bl i s h es
S p e c i fi c a t i o n s
e n t ru s t e d
p a rt i c i p a t e
wi th
in
th e
fo r
to
th i s
an d
th e
(I S O)
in
in
fo r
s t a n d a rd i z a t i o n
o b j e ct
S t a n d a rd s ,
an y
of
e l e c t ri c a l
G u i d es
w o rk .
p a rt i c i p a t e
S t a n d a rd i z a t i o n
in
co m m i tte e s ;
p re p a ra t o r y
al so
Th e
I n t e rn a t i o n a l
(PAS )
te ch n i ca l
IEC
o rg a n i z a t i o n
C o m m i tte e s ) .
and
I n t e rn a t i o n a l ,
th i s
wi t h
p ro m o t e
e l e c t ro n i c
fi e l d s .
to
C o m m i tte e
IEC
To
S p e c i fi c a t i o n s ,
as
an d
c o l l a b o ra t e s
co n d i ti on s
"I EC
i n t e re s t e d
g o v e rn m e n t a l
p re p a r a t i o n .
a c c o rd a n c e
to
r e fe r re d
N a ti o n a l
c o m p ri s i n g
is
Te ch n i ca l
( h e re a ft e r
IEC
I EC
n on -
cl o s e l y
d e t e rm i n e d
by
o rg a n i z a t i o n s .
th e
of I EC
re l e v a n t
on
te ch n i ca l
s u b j e cts
m a t t e rs
s i n ce
e a ch
e x p re s s ,
te ch n i ca l
as
n e a rl y
as
co m m i tte e
possi bl e,
h as
an
i n t e rn a t i o n a l
re p re s e n t a t i o n
fro m
al l
C o m m i tte e s .
th e
an y
fo r m
of
While
I EC
en d
re c o m m e n d a t i o n s
al l
re a s o n a b l e
ca n n o t
be
h el d
fo r
e ffo rt s
i n t e rn a t i o n a l
a re
m ade
re s p o n s i b l e
fo r
to
th e
use
an d
e n s u re
wa y
a re
th a t
in
a cce p te d
th e
wh i ch
by
te ch n i ca l
th ey
a re
IEC
N a ti o n a l
co n te n t
used
or
of
I EC
fo r
an y
u s e r.
i n t e rn a t i o n a l
th e
IEC
d oes
assessm en t
6)
on
is
N a ti o n a l
m a xi m u m
P u b l i ca ti o n
u n i fo rm i t y ,
e xt e n t
and
th e
IEC
possi bl e
N a ti on a l
in
th e i r
c o r re s p o n d i n g
C o m m i tte e s
n a ti on a l
n a ti o n a l
or
and
u n d e rt a k e
re g i o n a l
re g i o n a l
to
appl y
IEC
pu bl i ca ti o n s .
p u b l i ca ti on
sh al l
be
P u b l i ca ti o n s
An y
d i v e rg e n c e
c l e a rl y
i n d i ca te d
in
l a t t e r.
I EC
7)
to
is
l iaising
t wo
a c c u ra t e ,
p ro m o t e
t ra n s p a r e n t l y
b e t we e n
m ay
sen se.
by
Ava i l a b l e
(I E C)
(I E C
a c ti vi t i e s ,
o r a g re e m e n t s
h a ve
th a t
m i s i n t e rp re t a t i o n
In
oth er
O rg a n i z a t i o n
th e
N a ti o n a l
P u b l i ca ti o n s
C o m m i tte e s
4)
wi th
opi n i on
IEC
q u e s ti o n s
p re p a ra t i o n
I n t e rn a t i o n a l
fo rm a l
to
o rg a n i z a t i o n s
a g re e m e n t
con s e n s u s
all
P u b l i cl y
Th ei r
Com m issi on
com m i tte e s
on
a d d i ti on
P u b l i ca ti o n ( s ) " ) .
in
E l e c t ro t e c h n i c a l
e l e c t ro t e c h n i c a l
c a rri e d
u s e rs
m e m b e rs
i ts
dam age
and,
by
a tta ch
th a t
to
te ch n i ca l
of
any
a ri s i n g
ou t
any
in
a tt e s ta ti o n
s om e
a re a s ,
i nd epen den t
e n s u re
sh al l
of
e xp e n s e s
p ro v i d e
ou t
sh ou l d
l i a bi l i ty
o th e r
n ot
s e rv i c e s
th e y
IEC
or
c o n fo rm i t y .
c e rt i fi c a t i o n
h a ve
i ts
co m m i tte e s
th e
an d
IEC
w h a t s o e v e r,
of
pu bl i ca ti on ,
to
IEC
e d i ti on
o f th i s
e m p l o ye e s ,
N a ti o n a l
wh e th e r
use
I n d epen d en t
m a rk s
of
c e rt i fi c a t i o n
c o n fo rm i t y .
bodi es
IEC
is
n ot
p ro v i d e
c o n fo rm i t y
re s p o n s i b l e
fo r
an y
b od i es.
l a te s t
d i r e c t o rs ,
n a t u re
th e
of
a cce s s
o f,
C o m m i tte e s
d i re c t
or
pu bl i ca ti o n .
s e rva n t s
or
or
fo r
i n d i re c t ,
re l i a n c e
u pon ,
a g e n ts
any
or
i n cl u d i n g
p e rs o n a l
fo r
th i s
co s ts
IEC
i n d i vi d u a l
i n j u ry ,
e x p e rt s
p r o p e rt y
( i n cl u d i n g
P u b l i ca ti o n
l egal
or
any
an d
d am ag e
or
fe e s )
an d
oth e r
IEC
P u b l i ca ti o n s .
8)
Atte n ti o n
is
d ra wn
i n d i spen sabl e
9)
Atte n ti o n
p a te n t
is
fo r
to
th e
d ra wn
ri g h t s .
I EC
th e
N o rm a t i ve
c o rr e c t
to
th e
shal l
p ossi bi l i ty
n ot
re fe r e n c e s
a p p l i ca ti o n
be
hel d
o f th i s
th a t
som e
re s p o n s i b l e
ci te d
in
th i s
pu b l i ca ti o n .
U se
of
th e
r e fe r e n c e d
p u b l i ca ti o n s
is
p u b l i c a ti o n .
of
fo r
th e
e l e m e n ts
i d e n t i fy i n g
of
an y
th i s
or al l
I EC
s u ch
P u b l i ca ti o n
paten t
m ay
be
th e
s u b j e ct
of
ri g h t s .
DISCLAIM ER
This Extended version is intended only to provide the user with a comprehensive
content consisting of a product standard and its reference document. An Extended
version is not an official IEC Standard. Only the current versions of the related
standards are to be considered the official documents.
This Extended version of IEC 62040-1 : 201 7 includes the provisions of the general rules
dealt with in IEC 62477-1 : 201 2. Clauses and subclauses of IEC 62477-1 : 201 2 that are
applicable in IEC 62040-1 : 201 7 have been introduced in the content in red text.
I n te rn a t i o n a l
p o we r
S t a n d a rd
s ys t e m s
IEC
(U PS),
62 0 40 -1
of
I EC
h as
been
te c h n i c a l
p re p a r e d
c o m m i tte e
by
s u b co m m i tte e
22:
P o we r
22H :
e l e c t ro n i c
U n i n t e rr u p t i b l e
s ys t e m s
an d
eq u i pm en t.
Th i s
s econ d
Am e n d m e n t
e d i ti o n
1 : 201 3.
ca n ce l s
Th i s
an d
e d i ti o n
re p l a c e s
co n s ti tu te s
a
th e
fi rs t
tech n i ca l
e d i ti o n
re v i s i o n .
pu bl ish ed
in
2008
an d
i ts
–
Th i s
e d i ti o n
e d i ti o n :
e q u i p m e n t)
Th e
i n cl u d es
th e
te x t
th e
re fe r e n c e
to
I EC
o f th i s
fo l l o w i n g
d o cu m e n t
62477-1
I n t e rn a t i o n a l
s i g n i fi c a n t
h as
( g ro u p
8
been
s a fe t y
S t a n d a rd
is
–
IEC
tech n i ca l
ch a n g e d
s t a n d a rd
based
on
2 2 H /2 1 7 /F D I S
Fu l l
th e
i n fo rm a t i o n
re p o rt
on
on
Th i s
d o cu m e n t
Th i s
I n t e rn a t i o n a l
Th e
th a t
a re
"Clause
e xce p ti o n s
or a n
been
th e
as
a d d i ti o n
S u bcl a u ses ,
d o c u m e n t,
th i s
th e n
ta b l e s
and
by
a p p ro v a l
a b o ve
be
re a d
ru l e s
in
dealt
d ocu m en t
Th e
fi g u r e s
in
wi th
wi th i n
th e
p re v i o u s
( s a fe t y
fo r
IT
c o n v e rt e rs ) .
d o c u m e n ts :
vo ti n g
I n t e rn a t i o n a l
th e
I EC
ci ted .
a re
a re
th e
th i s
co n j u n cti o n
I S O /I E C
wi th
S t a n d a rd
i d e n t i fi e d
an d
by
e xce p t
ca n
I EC
D i re c ti ve s ,
can
be
fo u n d
in
ta k e
a re
on l y
s u b cl au s es
re fe r e n c e
as
P a rt
2.
62477-1 : 201 2.
62477-1 : 2 01 2
Cl au ses
appl i es,
fi g u re s
th a t
s u ffi x
of
e xc e p ti o n s
ta b l es ,
to
201 7
ta b l e .
a c c o rd a n c e
s p e c i fi c a l l y
l i s te d .
a
in
re s p e c t
© I EC
2 2 H /2 1 8 /RVD
62477-1 : 2 01 2
of s u bcl au ses,
i d e n t i fi e d
th e
th e
to
a re
of I E C
a re
is
g e n e ra l
th e y
in
4
fo r
in
d ra ft e d
S t a n d a rd
of
i n s o fa r
voti n g
i n d i ca te d
a p pl i ca b l e
e xa m p l e ,
Th e
h as
p ro v i s i o n s
d ocu m en t
th e
v o ti n g
on
E XV
60950-1 : 2005
e l e c tro n i c
fo l l o w i n g
R e p o rt
wi t h
IEC
p o we r
th e
FDI S
ch a n g e
fro m
fo r
62040-1 : 201 7
to
of
I EC
a p p l i ca b l e
IEC
to
th i s
6 24 7 7-1 : 20 1 2
62 4 77-1 : 2 0 1 2 ,
fo r
fo l l o ws " .
th e
fo rm
of
a
d e l e ti o n ,
a
re p l a c e m e n t
or a n n exes .
a d d i ti o n a l
fo rm a t
to
th o s e
of X. 1 0 x,
fo r
in
I EC
e xa m p l e
62477-1 : 201 2
a re ,
in
th i s
l e t t e re d
AA,
4. 3. 1 01 .
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
An n e x e s
BB,
In
th a t
a re
a d d i ti o n a l
th i s
d o c u m e n t,
th e
fo l l o w i n g
•
re q u i re m e n t s
•
co m p l i a n ce
•
n o te s
•
n o rm a t i v e
co n d i ti o n s
•
t e rm s
a re
A
l ist
of
an d
th os e
p a rt s
c o m m i tte e
s ta b i l i t y
d a te
in
s p e c i fi c
•
re c o n fi rm e d ,
•
w i t h d ra w n ,
•
re p l a c e d
•
am en d ed .
a
,
in
in
I EC
on
At
re v i s e d
t yp e s
a n n e xe s :
te s t
62 4 7 7-1 : 20 1 2
m a t te r:
ta b l e s :
a re ,
in
th i s
d o cu m e n t,
th i s
th e
I EC
e d i ti o n ,
sm al l er
sm al l er
t yp e
on
th e
ro m a n
ro m a n
t yp e
typ e
pu bl i shed
IEC
c o n te n ts
th e
ita lic typ e
bold
we b s i t e
d a te ,
used:
ro m a n
s e ri e s ,
fo u n d
th a t
th e
3:
62040
be
a re
s p e c i fi c a t i o n s :
Cl au se
I EC
can
d eci d ed
d o cu m e n t.
by
wi th i n
th e
i n d i c a te d
th e
and
i n fo rm a t i v e
d e fi n e d
h as
p ri n t
n o rm a t i v e
s t a t e m e n ts
o th e r
th a t
all
an d
Powe r Syste m s (UPS)
Th e
to
e tc .
u n d er
th e
g e n e ra l
ti tl e
Un in te rrup tib le
we b s i te .
o f th i s
u nd er
d ocu m en t
d ocu m en t
wi l l
re m a i n
" h t t p : / / we b s t o r e . i e c . c h "
wi l l
u n ch a n g e d
in
th e
d a ta
u n ti l
th e
re l a t e d
to
be
or
IM PORTANT – The 'colour inside' logo on the cover page of this publication indicates
that it contains colours which are considered to be useful for the correct
understanding of its contents. Users should therefore print this document using a
colour printer.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
–9–
I NTRODUCTI ON
I EC technical sub-comm ittee 22H : U ninterruptible power systems (UPS) carefully considered
the relevance of each paragraph of I EC 62477-1 : 201 2 in U PS applications. This part of
I EC 62040 utilizes I EC 62477-1 : 201 2 as a reference docum ent and references, ad ds,
replaces or modifies requirem ents as relevant. This is because product-specific topics not
covered by the reference document are the responsibility of the technical comm ittee using the
reference docum ent.
I E C 6 2 4 7 7 -1 : 2 0 1 2 relates to products that inclu de power electronic converters, with a rated
system voltage not exceed ing 1 000 V AC or 1 500 V DC. I t specifies requ irem ents to
reduce risks of fire, electric shock, therm al, energ y and m echanical hazards, except
functional safety as defined in I EC 61 508 (all parts). The objectives of this document are to
establish a com m on term inolog y and basis for the safety requirem ents of products that
contain power electronic converters across several I EC technical com m ittees.
I E C 6 2 4 7 7 -1 : 2 0 1 2 was developed with the intention:
•
•
to be used as a reference document for product com mittees insid e I EC technical
comm ittee 22: Power electronic system s and equipm ent in the development of product
standards for power electronic converter systems and equipm ent;
to replace I EC 621 03 as a product famil y standard providing m inim um requ irements for
safety aspects of power electronic converter systems and equipm ent in apparatus for
which no prod uct standard exists; and
N OTE The scope of I EC 621 03 contai ns reli abil ity aspects, which are not covered by this d ocum ent.
•
to be used as a reference document for product comm ittees ou tsid e TC 22 in the
developm ent of prod uct standards of power electronic converter system s and equ ipm ent
intended for renewable energ y sources. TC 82, TC 88, TC 1 05 and TC 1 1 4, in particu lar,
have been identified as relevant technical committees at the time of pu blication .
The reference document, being a group safety standard, will not take preced ence over this
product-specific standard according to I EC Guide 1 04. I EC Guide 1 04 provides inform ation
about the responsibility of prod uct com mittees to use group safety standards for the
developm ent of their own product standards.
– 10 –
U N I N T E RR U P T I B L E
P a rt 1 :
1
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
P O WE R S YS T E M S
(U P S )
–
S a fe t y re q u i re m e n ts
S cop e
This part of I EC 62040 applies to m ovable, stationary, fixed or built-in
for use in lowvoltage d istribution system s and that are intended to be installed in an area accessible by an
or in a
as applicable, that deliver fixed frequ ency
AC ou tpu t voltage with
voltages not exceed ing 1 000 V AC or 1 500 V DC and that
inclu de an energ y storage device. I t applies to pluggable and to
, whether consisting of a system of interconnected units or of independent units, subject
to installing, operating and maintaining the
in the m anner prescribed by the
manufacturer.
U PS
o rd i n a ry
p e rs o n
re s t ri c t e d
acces s
a re a
p o rt
p e rm a n e n t l y
c o n n e c te d
UPS
U PS
NOTE 1 Typical
config urati ons, i ncludi ng voltag e an d/or frequ ency con verters an d other topologies, are
described in I EC 62040-3, th e test and perform ance prod uct stand ard for
.
U PS
UPS
NOTE 2
generall y con n ect to their energ y storage d evice th roug h a DC link. A chem ical battery is used
through out the standard as an exam ple of an energ y storag e device. Alternati ve devices exi st, and as such, where
"battery" appears in the text of this docum ent, this is to be un derstood as "energ y storage d evice".
U PS
This d ocument specifies requ irem ents to ensure safety for the
who comes
into contact with the
and, where specificall y stated, for the
. The objective
is to reduce risks of fire, electric shock, therm al, energ y and m echanical hazards during use
and operation
y stated,
d uring service
and
maintenance.
Getand,
morewhere
FREEspecificall
standards
from Standard
Sharing
Group
and our chats
o rd i n a ry
UPS
s ki l l e d
p e rs o n
p e rs o n
This prod uct stand ard is harm onized with the applicable parts of group safety publication
I EC 62477-1 : 201 2 for
and contains add itional
requirements relevant to
.
p o we r
e l e c t ro n i c
c o n v e rt e r
s ys te m s
UPS
This d ocument does not cover:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
that have a DC output;
system s for operation on moving platforms including, but not limited to, aircrafts, ships
and m otor vehicles;
external AC or DC input and outpu t d istribution boards covered by their specific product
standard;
stand-alone static transfer systems (STS) covered by I EC 6231 0-1 ;
systems wherein the outpu t voltage is directl y d erived from a rotating machine;
telecomm unications apparatus other than
for such apparatus;
functional safety aspects covered by I EC 61 508 (all parts).
U PS
U PS
NOTE 3 Even if this d ocum ent does not cover the applicati ons li sted above, it is com m only taken as a g uid e for
such appl ications.
NOTE 4 Speciali zed
applications are g eneral ly g overn ed by additi on al requi rem ents covered elsewhere, for
exam ple
for m edical appli cations.
U PS
U PS
2
N o rm a t i ve
re fe re n c e s
The following docum ents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their
content constitutes requ irements of this docum ent. For d ated references, onl y the ed ition
cited applies. For undated references, the latest ed iti on of the referenced d ocument (includ ing
an y am endm ents) applies.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 11 –
I EC 60364-4-42, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-42: Protection for safety –
Protection against thermal effects
IEC 60384-1 4, Fixed capacitors for use in electronic equipment – Part 14: Sectional
specification – Fixed capacitors for electromagnetic interference suppression and connection
to the supply mains
IEC TR 60755, General requirements for residual current operated protective devices
IEC 60947-2: 2006 , Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 2: Circuit-breakers 1
I EC 60950-1 : 2005, Information technology equipment – Safety – Part 1: General requirements
I EC 61 000-2-2: 2002, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 2-2: Environment –
Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signaling in public lowvoltage power supply systems
I EC 61 008-1 , Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral overcurrent
protection for household and similar uses (RCCBs) – Part 1: General rules
I EC 61 009-1 , Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent protection
for household and similar uses (RCBOs) – Part 1: General rules
I EC 62040-2: 2005, Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) – Part 2: Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) requirements 2
I EC 62477-1 : 201 2, Safety requirements for power electronic converter systems and
equipment – Part 1: General
I EC 60050 (all parts), International
< http: //www. electropedia. org > )
Electrotechnical
Vocabulary
(available
at
I EC 60060-1 : 201 0, High-voltage test techniques – Part 1: General definitions and test
requirements
I EC 60068-2-2, Environmental testing – Part 2-2: Tests – Test B: Dry heat
I EC 60068-2-6, Environmental testing – Part 2-6: Tests – Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal)
I EC 60068-2-52, Environmental testing – Part 2-52: Tests – Test Kb: Salt mist, cyclic (sodium
chloride solution)
I EC 60068-2-68, Environmental testing – Part 2-68: Tests – Test L: Dust and sand
I EC 60068-2-78: 2001 , Environmental testing – Part 2-78: Tests – Test Cab: Damp heat,
steady state
I EC 601 1 2: 2003, Method for the determination of the proof and the comparative tracking
indices of solid insulating materials
___________
1
2
4 th edition (2006). This 4 th edi tion h as been repl aced i n 201 6 by a 5 th ed ition I EC 60947-2: 201 6, Low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear – Part 2: Circuit-breakers .
2 n d edition (2005). This 2
nd
editi on h as been repl aced in 201 6 by a 3 rd editi on I EC 62040-2: 201 6,
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) – Part 2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements .
– 12 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
I EC 6021 6-4-1 , Electrical insulating materials – Thermal endurance properties – Part 4-1:
Ageing ovens – Single-chamber ovens
Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 1: Fundamental principles,
assessment of general characteristics, definitions
IEC 60364-1 ,
IEC 60364-4-41 : 2005, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-41: Protection for safety –
Protection against electric shock
IEC 60364-4-44: 2007, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-44: Protection for safety –
Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances
IEC 60364-5-54: 201 1 , Low voltage electrical installations – Part 5-54: Selection and erection
of electrical equipment – Earthing arrangements and protective conductors
I EC 6041 7, Graphical symbols for use on equipment (available at < http: //www. graphicalsym bols. info/eq uipment >)
IEC/TS 60479-1 , Effects of current on human beings and livestock – Part 1: General aspects
IEC 60529: 1 989, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
IEC 6061 7, Graphical symbols for diagrams (available from < http: //std. iec.ch/iec6061 7 >)
IEC 60664-1 : 2007, Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems – Part 1:
Principles, requirements and tests
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
IEC 60664-3: 2003, Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems – Part 3:
Use of coating, potting or moulding for protection against pollution
IEC 60664-4: 2005, Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems – Part 4:
Consideration of high-frequency voltage stress
IEC 60695-2-1 1 : 2000, Fire hazard testing – Part 2-11: Glowing/hot-wire based test methods –
Glow-wire flammability test method for end-products
IEC 60695-1 0-2, Fire hazard testing – Part 10-2: Abnormal heat - Ball pressure test
IEC 60695-1 1 -1 0, Fire hazard testing – Part 11-10: Test flames – 50 W horizontal and vertical
flame test methods
I EC 60721 -3-3, Classification of environmental conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of
environmental parameters and their severities – Section 3: Stationary use at weatherprotected
locations
IEC 60721 -3-4, Classification of environmental conditions – Part 3: Classification of groups of
environmental parameters and their severities – Section 4: Stationary use at nonweatherprotected locations
IEC 60730-1 , Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use – Part 1: General
requirements
IEC/TR 60755, General requirements for residual current operated protective devices
IEC 60949, Calculation of thermally permissible short-circuit currents, taking into account nonadiabatic heating effects
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 13 –
I EC 60695-2-1 0, Fire hazard testing – Part 2-10: Glowing/hot-wire based test methods –
Glow-wire apparatus and common test procedure
I EC 60695-2-1 3, Fire hazard testing – Part 2-13: Glowing/hot-wire based test methods –
Glow-wire ignition temperature (GWIT) test method for materials
I EC 60695-1 1 -1 0, Fire hazard testing – Part 11-10: Test flames – 50 W horizontal and vertical
flame test methods
IEC 60695-1 1 -20, Fire hazard testing – Part 11-20: Test flames – 500 W flame test methods
IEC 60990: 1 999, Methods of measurement of touch current and protective conductor current
I EC 61 032: 1 997, Protection of persons and equipment by enclosures – Probes for verification
I EC 61 1 80-1 : 1 992, High-voltage test techniques for low-voltage equipment – Part 1:
Definitions, test and procedure requirements
I EC Guide 1 04: 201 0, The preparation of safety publications and the use of basic safety
publications and group safety publications
I EC Guide 1 1 7: 201 0, Electrotechnical equipment – Temperatures of touchable hot surfaces
I SO 3864-1 , Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Part 1: Design principles
for safety signs in workplaces and public areas
I SO 3746, Acoustics – Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise
sources using sound pressure – Survey method using an enveloping measurement surface
over a reflecting plane
I SO 7000, Graphical symbols for use on equipment – Index and synopsis (available from
< http: //www. graphical-sym bols. info/eq uipm ent >)
ISO 701 0, Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Registered safety signs
ISO 961 4-1 , Acoustics – Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound
intensity – Part 1: Measurement at discrete points
ISO 9772, Cellular plastics – Determination of horizontal burning characteristics of small
specimens subjected to a small flame
AN SI /ASTM E84 – 1 1 b, Standard test method for surface burning characteristics of building
materials
ASTM E1 62 – 1 1 a, Standard test method for surface flammability of materials using a radiant
heat energy source
– 14 –
3
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Terms and definitions
For the purposes of this docum ent, the term s and definitions given in I EC 60050-1 1 1 : 1 996,
I EC 60050-1 51 : 2001 , I EC 60050-1 61 : 1 990, I EC 60050-1 91 : 1 990, I EC 60050-441 : 1 984,
IEC 60050-442: 1 998, I EC 60050-551 : 1 998, I EC 60050-601 : 1 985 and I EC 60664-1 : 2007, and
the following apply.
Table 1 provides an alphabetical cross-reference listing of term s.
Table 1 – Alphabetical list of terms
Terms
Term number
62040-1
adjacent circuit
Terms
62477-1
3. 1
Term number
62040-1
power sem iconductor device
62477-1
3. 34
active power
3. 1 1 1
prim ary power
3. 1 08
apparent power
3. 1 1 2
prospective short-circuit
current
3. 1 22
backfeed
3. 1 27
protective equi potential
bon ding
3. 36
backfeed protection
3. 1 28
protective class I
3. 37
basic insulation
3. 2
protective class I I
3. 38
basic protection
3. 3
protective class I I I
3. 39
protective earthing (PE)
3. 40
PE conductor
3. 41
protective im pedance
3. 42
bypass
3. 1 1 0
com m issioning test
cord
3. 4
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
3. 1 09
decisive vol tage class
( DVC )
3. 5
(electrically) protective
screenin g
3. 43
dou ble insul ation
3. 6
protective separation
3. 44
DVC As
DVC Ax
3. 7
PEC
3. 45
3. 8
PECS
3. 46
earth faul t
3. 1 31
rated cond ition al short-ci rcuit
current
3. 1 20
electrical breakd own
3. 9
rated current
3. 1 1 7
(electrical) insulati on
3. 1 0
rated load
3. 1 1 5
(electronic) (power)
conversion
3. 1 1
rated peak withstan d current
3. 1 1 8
enclosure
3. 1 2
rated short-tim e withstan d
current
3. 1 1 9
enh anced protection
3. 1 3
rating
3. 1 1 3
expected lifetim e
3. 1 4
rated valu e
3. 1 1 4
Extra Low Voltage (ELV)
3. 1 5
rated voltag e
3. 1 1 6
fault protection
3. 1 6
reference non-l inear l oad
3. 1 26
field wirin g term inal
3. 1 7
reference test load
3. 1 25
fire enclosure
3. 1 8
reinforced insulation
3. 47
functional insulation
3. 1 9
restricted access area
3. 48
routin e test
3. 49
sam ple test
3. 50
SELV (system s)
3. 51
short-ci rcuit backup protection
3. 52
hazardous energ y
3. 1 07
hazardous live part
hazardous voltage
installation
3. 20
3. 1 06
3. 21
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Term s
– 15 –
Term n u m ber
620 40 -1
Term s
62477-1
Term n u m ber
620 40-1
instructed person
3. 1 03
service acces area
3. 1 05
linear load
3. 1 23
short-ci rcuit protecti ve d evice
(SCPD)
3. 1 30
live part
3. 22
low im ped ance path
3. 1 21
62477-1
sim ple separation
3. 53
single fault condition
3. 54
low voltag e
3. 23
skill ed person
m ains supply
3. 24
startle reaction
3. 55
m uscular reaction (in ability
to let go)
3. 25
supplem entary insulation
3. 56
surge protective device (SPD)
3. 57
n on -l in ear l oad
3. 1 24
3. 1 02
non -m ains supply
3. 26
system
3. 58
open type
3. 27
system voltage
3. 59
ord i nary person
3. 1 04
stored energ y m ode
3. 1 29
output short-circu it current
3. 28
tem porary overvoltage
3. 60
PELV (system s)
3. 29
touch current
3. 61
Perm anentl y connected
3. 30
type test
3. 62
plugg able equipm ent
type A
3. 31
ventricular fibrillation
3. 63
plugg able equipm ent
type B
3. 32
workin g voltag e
3. 64
port
3. 33
uninterru ptibl e power system
( U PS )
3. 1 01
zon e of equipotential bon ding
N ote 1 to entry:
specified.
Note 2 to entry:
3. 65
Where th e term s "voltag e" an d "current" are used, RMS valu es are im plied unl ess otherwise
N on-sin usoid al signals are m easu red with appropriate tru e RMS m easurin g instrum ents.
3. 1
ad j acen t ci rcu i t
circuit next to the circuit under consideration having a requirem ent for functional, simple or
protective insulation
3. 2
basi c i n su l ation
insulation applied to h azard ou s l ive part s to provide basic protecti on against electric shock
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-06, modified ]
3. 3
basi c protection
protection against electric shock und er fault-free conditions
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-01 ]
3. 4
com m i ssion in g test
test on a device or equipment perform ed on site, to prove the correctness of installation and
operation
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-41 1 : 1 996, 41 1 -53-06, m od ified]
– 16 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
3. 5
d eci sive voltag e cl ass
DVC
classification of voltage range used to determ ine the protective measures against electric
shock and the req uirements of i n su l ati on between circuits
3. 6
d ou bl e i n su l ati on
insulation comprising both
basi c i n su l ati on and su ppl em en tary i n su l ati on
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-1 6]
3. 7
DVC As
maxim um safe voltage values to be touchable, com ing from DVC Ax
3. 8
DVC Ax
DVC Ax is the general DVC value used for DVC A , DVC A1 , DVC A2 or DVC A3
3. 9
el ectri cal breakd own
failure of insulation under electric stress when the discharge completel y bridges the
insulation , thus red ucing the voltage between the electrod es almost to zero
[SOU RCE: I EC 60664-1 : 2007, 3. 20]
3. 1 0
FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
(el ectri cal)Get
in sumore
lation
electrical separation between circuits or conductive parts provided by clearance or creepage
distance or solid insulation or combinations of them
3. 1 1
(el ectron i c) (power) con versi on
change of one or m ore of the characteristics of an electric power system essentiall y without
appreciable loss of power by m eans of power sem i con d u ctor d evi ces
Note 1 to entry: Characteristics are, for exam ple, voltag e, num ber of phases and frequency, i ncludi ng zero
freq uency.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-551 : 1 998, 551 -1 1 -02, modified ]
3. 1 2
en closu re
housing affording the type and degree of protection suitable for the intended application
Note 1 to entry: This stand ard provi des requ irem ent for the en cl osu re accordi ng to I EC 60529 as well as
additi on al req uirem ent for m echanical and en vironm ental im pact. The purpose of the ad diti onal requi rem ent is to
ensure th e en cl osu res ability to provi de b asi c protecti on und er the en vi ronm ental con d itions specifi ed by th e
m anufacturer.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-02-35]
3. 1 3
en h an ced protecti on
protective provision having a reliability of protection not less than that provid ed by two
ind ependent protective provisions
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 17 –
3.1 4
expected lifetime
design d uration for which the perform ance characteristics are valid at rated conditions of
operation
3.1 5
extra-low voltage
ELV
voltage not exceeding the relevant voltage limit of band I specified in I EC 60449
Note 1 to entry: I n I EC 60449, ban d I i s defined as not exceedin g 50 V a. c. r. m . s. and 1 20 V d. c. Other product
comm ittees m ay have defi ned ELV with different voltage l evel s.
Note 2 to entry: I n this standard, protecti on against el ectric shock is depend ent on the decisive voltage
classification.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-30, modified]
3.1 6
fault protection
protection against electric shock und er single-fault conditions
Note 1 to entry: For low-voltage instal lations , systems an d equi pm ent, faul t protecti on g enerall y corresponds to
protection agai nst indi rect contact as used in I EC 60364-4-41 , m ainly with reg ard to fai l ure of basi c insul ati on .
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, Am endment 1 : 1 998, 1 95-06-02]
3.1 7
field wiring terminal
term inal provided for connection of external cond uctors to the U PS
3.1 8
fire enclosure
part of the equ ipment intend ed to minimize the spread of fire or flames from within
3.1 9
functional insulation
insulation between conductive parts within a circuit that is necessary for the proper
functioning of the circuit, bu t which does not provide protection against electric shock
Note 1 to entry: Functional i nsul ati on m ay, h owever, red u ce the likeli hood of ig nition an d fire.
3.20
hazardou s-live-part
live part which, u nder certain cond itions, can give a harmful electric shock
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-05]
3.21
installation
equipm ent or equipm ents including at least the U PS
Note 1 to entry: The word instal lation is also used i n this standard to d enote the process of i nstalling a UPS . I n
these cases, the word does not appear i n italics.
3.22
live part
conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in norm al operation, including a neutral
conductor, but by convention not a protective earth conductor or protective earth neutral
N ote 1 to entry: This concept does n ot necessari ly im pl y a ri sk of electric shock.
– 18 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-02-1 9, modified]
3.23
low voltage
LV
set of voltage levels used for the distribution of electricity and whose u pper lim it is generall y
accepted to be 1 000 V a.c. or 1 500 V d. c.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-601 : 1 985, 601 -01 -26, mod ified]
3.24
mains supply
low voltage a. c. power d istribution system for su pplying power to a.c. equ ipment
3.25
muscular reaction (inability to let go)
ph ysiological reaction du e to a minimum derived valu e of touch voltage for a popu lation for
which a current flowing through the bod y is just enough to cause involuntary contraction of a
muscle, such as inability to let go from an electrode, bu t not inclu ding startle reaction
[SOU RCE: I EC/TR 60479-5: 2007, 3.3. 2, m odified]
3.26
non-mains supply
electrical circu it that is not energized directl y from the mains su pply , but is, for example,
isolated by a transform er or supplied by a battery, generator, or sim ilar sources not directl y
connected to the a. c. power d istribution system
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
3.27
open type
product intended for incorporation within enclosure or assembl y that will provide protection
against hazards
3.28
output short circuit current
available current r. m.s or d. c. that flows at the output of the U PS when a short circuit is
applied by a cond uctor of negligible im pedance
3.29
PELV (system)
electric system in which the voltage cannot exceed the value of extra low voltage :
–
–
under normal conditions; and
under single fault condition s , except earth faults in other electric circuits
Note 1 to entry: PELV is the abbreviati on for protecti ve extra low vol tage .
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-32]
3.30
perman ently conn ected (equipment)
equipm ent that is intended for connection to the building installation wiring using screw
term inals or other reliable m eans
3.31
pluggable equipment type A
equipm ent that is intended for connection to the mains supply via a non-industrial plug and
socket-outlet or a non-industrial appliance coupler, or both
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 19 –
3. 32
pl u g g ab l e
eq u i pm en t
type
B
equipm ent that is intended for connection to the
via an ind ustrial plug and
socket-outlet or an appliance cou pler, or both, com pl ying with I EC 60309 or with a
com parable national standard
main s
su ppl y
3. 33
p o rt
access to a device or network where electromagnetic energ y or signals may be supplied or
received or where the device or network variables m ay be observed or m easured
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 31 : 2002, 1 31 -1 2-60]
3. 34
p o we r s e m i co n d u cto r
d evi ce
sem icond uctor device used for electronic power conversion
3. 35
p ro s p e c t i v e
s h o rt
c i rc u i t
Replaced by 3. 1 22
c u rre n t
3. 36
p ro t e c t i v e
eq u i poten ti al
bon d i n g
equ ipotential bond ing for purposes of safety (e.g. protection against electric shock)
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-01 -1 5, m odified]
3. 37
p ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
I
equipm ent in which protection against electric shock does not rel y on
onl y,
but which includes an add itional safety precau tion in such a way that m eans are provided for
the connection of accessible conductive parts to the protective (earthing) conductor in the
fixed wiring of the
, so that accessible conductive parts cannot becom e live in the
event of a failure of the
basi c
i n s u l ati o n
i n s ta l l ati o n
b as i c
i n s u l a ti o n
3. 38
p ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
II
equipm ent in which protection against electric shock does not rel y on
but in which additional safety precautions such as
are provided, there being no provision for
conditions
s u p p l e m e n t a ry
i n s u l ati o n
p ro t e c t i v e
basi c
onl y,
or
or reliance upon
i n s u l ati o n
i n s u l a ti o n
e a rt h i n g
re i n fo rc e d
i n s t a l l ati o n
3. 39
p ro t e c t i v e
cl a s s
III
equ ipment in which protection against electric shock relies on suppl y at DVC Ax (or B under
certain cond itions) and in which voltages higher than those of DVC Ax ( B ) are not generated
and there is no provision for protective earthing
Note 1 to entry: Oth er stan dards defi ne
p ro t e c t i v e
cl a s s
III
as suppli ed by
E LV
.
3. 40
p ro t e c t i v e
PE
e a rt h i n g
earthing of a point in a system , or eq uipment, for protection against electric shock in case of a
fau lt
– 20 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
3.41
PE conductor
cond uctor in the building installation wiring, or in the power suppl y cord, connecting a m ain
protective earthing terminal in the equ ipm ent to an earth point in the bu ilding installation for
safety purposes
3.42
protective
impedance
such value
value, and
eq uipm ent
impedan ce
connected between hazardous live part s and accessible conductive parts, of
that the current, in normal use and under likel y fau lt conditions, is limited to a safe
which is so constructed that its ability is maintained throughou t the life of the
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-442: 1 998, 442-04-24, mod ified]
3.43
(electrically) protective screening
separation of circuits from hazardous live-parts by m eans of an interposed conductive screen,
connected to the m eans of connection for a PE conductor , either d irectly or via protective
equipotential bonding
3.44
(electrically) protective separation
separation of one electric circuit from another by m eans of:
double in sulation or
– basic in sulation and electricall y protective screening or
– reinforced insulation
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, Amendment 1 : 1 998, 1 95-06-1 9]
–
3.45
power electronic converter
PEC
N ot used - Replaced by UPS see definition 3. 1 01
3.46
power electronic converter system
PECS
N ot used - Replaced by UPS see definition 3. 1 01
3.47
one or more power electronic converters intended to work together with other
equipment
reinforced insulation
insulation of hazardous-live-parts which provid es a degree of protection against electric
shock equ ivalent to double insu lation
[SOU RCE: I EC 60664-1 : 2007, 3. 1 7.5]
3.48
restricted access area
area accessible onl y to electricall y skilled persons and electricall y in structed person s with
the proper authorization
Note 1 to entry: An electrical l y skil led person is a person with rel evant educati on an d experience to enable him
or h er to perceive risks and to avoid h azards which electricity can create
Note 2 to entry: An electrical ly instru cted person is a person ad eq uately ad vised or su pervised by electrical ly
skil led persons to en abl e him or h er to perceive risks and to avoid h azards which electricity can create
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 21 –
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-04-04, mod ified]
3.49
routine test
test to which each individual device is subj ected during or after manufacture to ascertain
whether it com plies with certain criteria
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-41 1 : 1 996, 41 1 -53-02, m od ified]
3.50
sample test
test on a num ber of devices taken at rand om from a batch
3.51
SELV (system)
electric system in which the voltage cannot exceed the value of extra-low voltage :
–
–
under normal conditions; and
under single fault condition s , including earth faults in other electric circuits
NOTE SELV is the abbreviati on for safety extra low vol tag e .
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-31 , modified]
3.52
short circuit backup protection
protection that is intend ed to operate when other protective measures within a system or
equipm ent fail to clear a fau lt
3.53
simple separation
separation between electric circu its or between an electric circu it and local earth by means of
basic insulation
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-28]
3.54
single fault condition
condition in which one failure is present which could cause a hazard covered by this standard
Note 1 to entry: I f a singl e faul t condition resul ts in oth er subsequent fai lu res, the set of failures is considered
as one singl e fault condi tion .
Note 2 to entry: Exam ples of hazards inclu de, but are not li m ited to electric sh ock, fire, en erg y, m echanical, sonic
pressu re etc.
3.55
startle reaction
ph ysiological reaction d ue to a m inim um derived value of touch voltage for a population for
which a current flowing through the bod y is just enough to cause involuntary muscu lar
contraction to the person throu gh which it is flowing
[SOU RCE: I EC/TR 60479-5: 2007, 3.3. 1 , modified]
3.56
supplementary insulation
ind ependent insulation applied in add ition to basic in sulation for fault protection
Note 1 to entry: Basic and su pplementary insul ati on are separate, each desig ned for si mpl e separati on against
electric shock.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60664-1 : 2007, 3. 1 7.3, m odified ]
– 22 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
3. 57
su rg e protecti ve d evi ce
SPD
device that contains at least one non-linear component that is intended to limit surge voltages
and divert surge currents
Note 1 to entry: An SPD is a complete assembly, having appropriate connecting means.
[SOU RCE: I EC 61 643-1 1 : 201 1 , 3. 1 . 1 ]
3. 58
system
set of interrelated and/or interconnected ind ependent elements
Note 1 to entry: A system i s generally defi ned with the view of achievin g a gi ven obj ective, for exam ple by
perform ing a defin ite function.
3. 59
system voltag e
voltage used to determ ine insulation requ irements
Note 1 to entry: See 4. 4. 7. 1 . 6 for further consid erati on of s ystem vol tag e .
3. 60
tem porary overvoltag e
overvoltage at power frequency of relativel y long duration
[SOU RCE: I EC 60664-1 : 2007, 3. 7. 1 ]
3. 61
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
tou ch cu rren t
electric current passing through a human bod y or through an animal bod y when it touches one
or m ore accessible parts of an electrical in stall ati on or electrical equipm ent
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 1 -1 2]
3. 62
type test
test of one or more devices m ade to a certain design to show that the design m eets certain
specifications
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-81 1 : 1 991 , 81 1 -1 0-04]
3. 63
ven tri cu l ar fibri l l ation
cardiac fibrillation, lim ited to the ventricles, leading to ineffective circulation and then to heart
failure
Note 1 to entry: Ven tri cu l ar fi bri l l ati on stops blood circu lati on.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-891 : 1 998, 891 -01 -1 6]
3. 64
worki n g voltag e
voltage, at rated suppl y cond itions (without tolerances) and worst case operating conditions,
that occurs by design in a circuit or across insulation
Note 1 to entry: Th e worki n g vol tag e can be d. c. or a. c. Both the r. m . s. and recu rring peak valu es are used.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 23 –
3. 65
zon e of eq u i poten ti al bon d in g
zone where all sim ultaneousl y accessible conductive parts are electricall y connected to
prevent h azard ou s vol tag es appearing between them
Note 1 to entry: For equipotential bond ing, it is not necessary for the parts to be earth ed.
3. 1 01
u n in terru ptibl e power system
U PS
com bination of convertors, switches and energ y storage d evices (such as batteries),
constituting a power system for m aintaining continuity of load power in case of inpu t power
failure
Note 1 to entry: Conti nuity of load power occurs wh en voltage an d freq uency are within rated steady-state an d
transient tolerance bands, and with distortion an d interrupti ons within the lim its specified for th e output port. I nput
power failu re occurs when voltage an d freq uency are outsi d e rated steady-state an d transient tolerance ban ds, or
with distortion or i nterruptions outside th e lim its specified for the U PS .
3. 1 02
ski l l ed person
person with relevant ed ucation and experience to enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which the equ ipment can create
Note 1 to entry:
Such person has access to restri cted access areas .
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-04-01 , m od ified – The word "(electricall y)" has been
deleted from the term , and "electricity" has been replaced by "the equipm ent" in the definition.
The note has been added. ]
3. 1 03
in stru cted person
person adequatel y ad vised or su pervised by ski ll ed person s to enable him or her to perceive
risks and to avoid hazard s which the eq uipm ent can create
Note 1 to entry:
Note 2 to entry:
Clause 8.
Such person has access to restri cted access areas .
Exam ples of activiti es perform ed by an i n stru cted person can be fou n d in I EC 61 1 40: 2001 ,
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-04-02, m odified – The word "(electricall y)" has been
deleted from the term, and the notes have been added .]
3. 1 04
ord i n ary person
person who is neither a ski ll ed person nor an i n stru cted person
Note 1 to entry: Such person does not h ave access to a restri cted access area and is not trai ned to i dentify
hazards. Such person m ay oth erwise h ave access to the eq u ipm ent or m ay be in the vici nity of the eq uipm ent. An
ord i n ary person will not i ntentionally create h azards n or have access to h azardous parts u nder n orm al and si n g l e
fau l t con d i ti on s .
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-04-03, modified – The note has been ad ded .]
3. 1 05
servi ce access area
area accessible by ski l l ed person s by the use of a tool, where it is necessary for skil l ed
person to have access regardless of the eq uipment being energized
– 24 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
3. 1 06
h azard ou s voltag e
voltage exceed ing 42, 4 V peak, or 60 V DC, existing in a circuit that does not meet the
requirements for either a limited current circu it or a TN V-1 circuit
Note 1 to entry: A lim ited current ci rcuit is understood i n the context of "protection by m eans of protecti ve
i m ped an ce " as described i n 4. 4. 5. 4.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60950-1 : 2005, 1 . 2. 8. 6 m odified – TN V has been replaced by TN V-1 . ]
3. 1 07
h azard ou s en erg y
available power level of 240 VA or more, having a duration of 60 s or more, or a stored energ y
level of 20 J or m ore (for exam ple, from one or m ore capacitors), at a potential of 2 V or m ore
Note 1 to entry:
See 4. 5. 1 . 2.
3. 1 08
pri m ary power
power su pplied by an electrical utility com pan y or by a local generator
3. 1 09
cord
flexible cable with a lim ited num ber of conductors of sm all cross-sectional area
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-461 : 2008, 461 -06-1 5. ]
3. 1 1 0
bypass
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
alternative power path, either internal or external to the U PS
3. 1 1 1
active power
und er period ic cond itions, mean value, taken over one period T, of the instantaneous power p
T
P = 1 ∫ pd t
T0
Note 1 to entry:
P = Re S
N ote 2 to entry:
U nder sin usoidal con ditions, the acti ve power is the real part of th e com plex power S, th us
The coh erent SI unit for acti ve power is watt, W.
N ote 3 to entry: DC, fund am ental an d harm onic voltag es and cu rrents contribute to th e m agnitude of the acti ve
power . Where applicable, in strum ents used to m easure acti ve power sh oul d therefore present sufficient
ban d wi dth and be capable of measuring an y significant non-symm etri cal and h arm onic power com ponents.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 31 : 201 3, 1 31 -1 1 -42, m odified – A third note to entry has been
add ed. ]
3. 1 1 2
apparen t power
prod uct of the RMS voltage and RM S current
3. 1 1 3
ratin g
set of rated valu es and operating cond itions of a m achine, a d evice or eq uipm ent
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 25 –
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 51 : 2001 , 1 51 -1 6-1 1 , m odified – The words "of a machine, a device or
equ ipment" have been added. ]
3.1 1 4
rated value
valu e of a quantity used for specification purposes, generall y established by a m anufacturer
for a specified set of operating conditions of a com ponent, device, eq uipm ent, or system
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 51 : 2001 , 1 51 -1 6-08, mod ified – The word "established" has been
expanded to read "generall y established by a m anufacturer". ]
3.1 1 5
rated load
load or cond ition in which the output of the UPS delivers the power for which the UPS is rated
Note 1 to entry: The rated load is expressed in apparent power (VA) an d active power (W) resulting in a (rated )
power factor that includ es the effect of any applicable com bination of linear an d of non-linear load as prescri bed
in Annex BB.
Note 2 to entry: Rated load is a value of load used for specification pu rposes, generall y establ ished by a
m anufacturer for a specified set of operatin g con ditions of a com ponent, d evice, eq uipm ent, or system
3.1 1 6
rated voltage
input or ou tpu t voltage as declared by the m anufacturer
Note 1 to entry:
For a three-phase supply, th e rated voltag e correspon ds to the phase-to-phase voltage.
3.1 1 7
rated current
input or ou tpu t current of the UPS as declared by the m anufacturer
3.1 1 8
rated peak withstand current
Ipk
value of peak short-circu it current, d eclared by the UPS manufacturer, that can be withstood
under specified conditions
Note 1 to entry: For the pu rpose of this docum ent,
prospective test current listed i n Tabl e 1 04.
Ipk
refers to th e initi al asym m etric peak valu e of th e
3.1 1 9
rated short-time withstand current
Icw
RMS value of short-tim e current, declared by the UPS m anufacturer, that can be carried under
specified cond itions, defined in terms of current and tim e
[SOU RCE: I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 3. 8. 1 0. 3, m odified – The d efinition has been rephrased and
the word "assem bl y" has been replaced by " UPS ".]
3.1 20
rated conditional short-circuit current
Icc
RMS valu e of prospective short-circuit current , declared by the UPS manufacturer, that can
be withstood for the total operating tim e (clearin g tim e) of the short-circuit protective device
( SCPD ) u nder specified conditions
Note 1 to entry:
The short-ci rcuit protective device does not necessaril y form an integ ral part of th e UPS .
[SOU RCE: I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 3.8.1 0.4, mod ified – The word "RMS" has been ad ded to
"value", the word "assembl y" has been replaced by " UPS ", and the note has been rephrased. ]
– 26 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
3. 1 21
low im ped an ce path
path containing d evices that for U PS load purposes present negligible im pedance, such as
cabling, switching d evices, protecting d evices and filtering devices
Note 1 to entry: Th e devices in a l ow i m ped an ce path g enerall y present current lim iting characteristics under
short-ci rcuit con ditions.
Note 2 to entry:
inductors.
Exam ples i nclude current lim iting fuses, current lim iting circuit-breakers, transform ers and
3. 1 22
prospecti ve sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t
Icp
RMS value of the current which would flow if the suppl y cond uctors to the circu it are shortcircuited by a cond uctor of negligible im pedance located as near as practicable to the suppl y
terminals of the U PS
[SOU RCE: I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 3.8. 7, modified – The word "assem bl y" has been replaced by
" U PS ".]
3. 1 23
l in ear l oad
load where the current drawn from the supply is defined by the relationship:
I
= U/ Z
where
I
is the load
current;
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
U
is the suppl y voltage;
Z
is the constant load impedance
Note 1 to entry:
Applicati on of a l i n ear l oad to a si nusoi dal voltage results in a sinusoi dal current.
[SOU RCE: I EC 62040-3: 201 1 , 3. 2. 4]
3. 1 24
n on -l in ear l oad
load where the parameter Z (load impedance) is no longer a constant but is a variable
dependent on other parameters, such as voltage or tim e
[SOU RCE: I EC 62040-3: 201 1 , 3. 2. 5]
3. 1 25
referen ce test l oad
load or cond ition in which the output of the U PS delivers the active power (W) for which the
U PS is rated
Note 1 to entry: This d efiniti on perm its, when in test m ode and subj ect to l ocal regul ation s, the U PS output to be
injected i nto th e in put AC supply.
[SOU RCE: I EC 62040-3: 201 1 , 3. 3. 5]
3. 1 26
referen ce n on -l in ear l oad
n on -l in ear l oad that when connected to a U PS , consumes the apparen t power at which the
U PS shall be tested
Note 1 to entry:
Refer to Cl au se BB. 5 for test details.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 27 –
[SOU RCE: I EC 62040-3: 201 1 , 3. 3. 6, modified – The expression "the apparent and active
power for which the U PS is rated in accordance with Ann ex E" has been replaced by "the
apparent power at which the UPS shall be tested", and the note has been add ed. ]
3.1 27
backfeed
condition in which a voltage or energ y available within the UPS is fed back to an y of the input
term inals, either directl y or by a leakage path while operating in the stored energy mode and
with primary power not available
[SOU RCE: I EC 62040-3: 201 1 , 3. 2. 3, modified – The words "while AC input power is" have
been replaced by "with primary power ".]
3.1 28
backfeed protection
control scheme that redu ces the risk of electric shock due to backfeed
3.1 29
stored energy mode
stable m ode of operation that the UPS attains under the following cond itions:
a) AC input power is disconnected or is out of required tolerance;
b) all power is d erived from the energ y storage device;
c) the load is within the specified rating of the UPS
[SOU RCE: I EC 62040-3: 201 1 , 3. 2.1 0, modified – The words "of U PS operation" have been
deleted in the term , and the word "system" has been replaced by "device" in b). ]
3.1 30
short-circuit protective device
SCPD
device intend ed to protect a circuit or parts of a circuit against short-circuit currents by
interrupting them
[SOU RCE: I EC 60947-1 : 2007, 2. 2. 21 ]
3.1 31
earth fault
occurrence of an accidental conductive path between a live conductor and the earth
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-04-1 4, m odified – The second preferred term "grou nd
fault" has been d eleted, as well as the notes. ]
4 Protection against hazards
4.1
General
Clause 4 defines the m inim um requ irements for the d esign and construction of a UPS , to
ensure its safety during installation, normal operating conditions and m aintenance for the
expected lifetime of the UPS . Consideration is also given to m inim ising hazards resulting
from reasonabl y foreseeable misuse.
Manufacturers and prod uct comm ittees using this stand ard as a reference docum ent shall
clearl y specify what is contained in the UPS , covered by and evaluated accord ing to this
standard. This shall as a m inimum cover the UPS includ ing the load interface and su ppl y
interface.
– 28 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Protection against hazards shall be maintained u nder norm al and si n g l e fau l t con d i ti on s , as
specified in this standard.
Com ponents com pliant with a relevant I EC product standard which provides sim ilar safety
requirements as the requirem ent of this standard do not req uire separate evaluation.
Com ponents or assem blies of com ponents, for which no relevant produ ct standard exists,
shall be tested according to the requirements of this standard.
Product comm ittees using this standard as reference shou ld m ake use of 7. 3 from
I EC Gu ide 1 04: 201 0.
Where the U PS is intended to be used together with specific auxiliary equipm ent, the safety
evalu ation and test shall include this auxiliary equ ipm ent u nless it can be shown that it d oes
not affect the safety of either equ ipment.
4. 2
Fau l t an d abn orm al con d i ti on s
The U PS shall be d esigned to avoid operating modes or sequences that can cause a fau lt
cond ition or component failure leading to a hazard, u nless other measu res to prevent the
hazard are provided by the i n stal l ati on and are described in the installation information
provided with the U PS . The req uirem ents in this clause also appl y to abnormal operating
cond itions as applicable.
Circu it anal ysis or testing shall be performed to determine whether or not failure of a
particular com ponent (including insulation system s) would result in hazard.
Get shall
more inclu
FREE
Standard
Sharing
and ouror
chats
This anal ysis
de standards
situations from
where
a failure
of theGroup
com ponent
the insulation
( functional, basic and supplementary) would result in:
–
–
–
–
–
–
an impact on the decisive voltage determ ination according to 4. 4. 2;
a risk of electric shock d ue to:
•
degradation of the basi c protecti on according to 4. 4. 3, or
•
degradation of the fau l t protecti on according to 4. 4. 4;
a risk of energ y hazard accord ing to 4. 5;
a risk of degradation du e to em ission of flame, burning particles or m olten m etal of the fire
according to 4. 6;
a risk of therm al hazard due to high tem perature accord ing to 4.6;
a risk of m echanical hazard accord ing to 4.7.
NOTE This stand ard does not provi de any requi rem ent to protect against chem ical hazard. Prod uct comm ittees or
m anufacturers m ight consider this when it applies to th eir products.
Compliance is checked by analysis or by test according to 5.2. 4.6 of IEC 62477-1:2012 .
Compliance through analysis only is permitted when such analysis conclusively shows that no
hazard will result from failure of the component
The evaluation of com ponents shall be based on the expected stress occurring in the
expected l i feti m e of the U PS including, but not limited to:
–
–
–
specified clim atic and mechanical conditions accord ing to 4. 9 (tem perature, humidity,
vibration, etc.);
electrical characteristics according to 4. 4.7 (expected im pulse voltage, worki n g vol tag e ,
tem porary overvol tag e , etc. );
m icro environm ent according to 4. 4. 7 (pollu tion degree, humidity, etc.).
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 29 –
Com ponents evaluated for their reliability according to relevant prod uct stand ards are
considered to meet these requ irements and do not need an y further investigation, if tested
under cond itions that fu lfill the conditions for which the U PS is designed.
Clearance and creepage distances on printed wiring boards (PWBs) including com ponents
mounted on PWBs, for functional, basic, supplementary and rei n forced in su l ation , designed
according to 4. 4. 7. 4 and 4. 4. 7.5, are consid ered to m eet these requ irem ents and do not need
an y further investigation.
Fu n cti on al in su lation on PWB and between legs of com ponents assembled on PWBs not
fulfilling the requirem ents for clearance and creepage distance in 4.4. 7. 4 and 4. 4. 7. 5 shall
meet the requirement of 4. 4. 7.7.
Consideration shall be given to potential safety hazards associated with m ajor component
parts of the U PS , such as flamm ability of transformer and capacitor flu ids.
4. 3
Sh ort-ci rcu i t an d overl oad protection
4. 3. 1 G en eral
The U PS shall not present a hazard, u nder short circu it or overload conditions at an y port ,
inclu ding phase to phase, phase to earth and phase to neutral. Ad equate inform ation shall be
provided in the documentation to allow proper selection of external wiring and protective
devices (see 6. 3.7. 6 and 6. 3. 7.7).
Protective systems or devices shall be provid ed or specified in sufficient q uantity and location
so as to d etect and to interrupt or limit the current flowing in an y possible fau lt current path
between cond uctors or from conductors to earth.
NOTE 1
I n this stand ard, the term overcurrent covers both short circuit an d overload.
NOTE 2 Local i n stal l ati on codes will still usual ly req uire provisi on of such protection for the purposes of
protecting th e input wi rin g in th e i n stal l ati on .
Protection against overcurrents shall be provided for all input circuits, and for output circuits
that do not com pl y with the requ irements for limited power sources in 4.6. 5.
I f the U PS complies with all norm al, abnormal and fault test conditions in this stand ard withou t
such protection provided , provision or specification of overcurrent protection for input circuits
is not necessary for the protection of the U PS .
No protection is requ ired against overcurrent to earth in eq uipment that either
–
–
has no connection to earth; or
has d ou ble in su l ation or rei n forced i n su l ati on between l ive parts and all parts
connected to earth.
NOTE 3 U n der a si n g l e fau l t con d i ti on in an I T system no short circuit cu rrent or a lim ited short ci rcuit current
will fl ow. Th e i nterru ption of the short circuit current in an I T system (see 4. 4. 7. 1 . 4) is d one when a second fault
occurs. Typically onl y d etection is don e after the first fault in an I T system .
NOTE 4 Where d ou bl e i n su l ati on or rei n forced i n su l ati on is provided, a short circuit to earth woul d be
considered to be two fau lts.
For pl u gg abl e eq u i pm en t type A, the protective d evice is provided in the i n stal l ati on and
shall not require an y specific characteristics other than that required in I EC 60364 or other
local i n stal l ati on codes.
For pl u gg able eq u ipm en t type B or fixed installed equ ipment, this protection m ay be
provided by devices external to the equipment, in which case the installation instructions shall
– 30 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
state the need for the protection to be provid ed in the
and shall inclu de the
specifications for the req uired short circuit and /or overload protection (see 6. 3. 7).
i n s ta l l a ti o n
NOTE 5 I EC 60364 provid es requi rem ents for sh ort ci rcui t an d overl oad protecti on of the i nput wi ri ng in the
. Th e above requi rem ent ensu res that the user is inform ed about an y speci al characteristics of th e
protective d evices for th e protection of th e
, in additi on to th e requi rem ents in I EC 60364 or other local
cod es.
i n s ta l l a ti o n
UPS
i n s ta l l a ti o n
I f a protective device interrupts the neutral conductor, it shall also sim ultaneousl y interrupt all
other su ppl y conductors of the same circu it. I t is permissible for the protective device to
interrupt the neutral cond uctor after the other suppl y conductors of the same circuit.
Compliance shall be checked by inspection and where necessary, by simulation of
fault conditions (see 4. 2) and by the tests of 5.2.4.4 and 5.2.4.5.
4. 3 . 2
S p e c i fi c a t i o n
c u rre n t
4. 3 . 2 . 1
of
input
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
wi th s ta n d
s t re n g t h
an d
ou tpu t
s h o rt
single
c i rc u i t
ab i l i ty
G e n e ra l
The interrupting capability of the overcurrent protective device shall be eq ual or greater than
the
of the
.
p ro s p e c t i v e
For
p ro t e c t i o n
For
eq u i pm en t
c u rre n t
typ e
s h o rt
p e rm a n e n t l y
s h o rt
c i rc u i t
m ai n s
su ppl y
shall be designed so that the building
, either the
provid es
, or add itional
shall be provided as part of the eq uipm ent.
pl u g g abl e
i n s ta l l ati o n
s h o rt
c i rc u i t
co n n e cte d
b a c ku p
U PS
A
c i rc u i t
b a c ku p
or
to be in the build ing
eq u i pm en t
p ro t e c t i o n
p ro t e c t i o n
pl u g g ab l e
s h o rt
eq u i pm en t
i n stal l ati on
.
typ e
B
c i rc u i t
b a c ku p
, it is permitted for
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
4. 3 . 2 . 2
In pu t
ports
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
wi th s ta n d
s t re n g t h
The input
ratings appl y to ports intend ed to be connected
to battery circuits, external
, non-mains a.c. or d .c. sources, and to other ports
for which overcurrent protection is necessary.
p ro s p e c t i v e
s h o rt
c i rc u i t
m ai n s
c u rre n t
su ppl y
For co-ord ination and selection of internal or external protective devices, the
manufacturer shall specify:
–
–
a maximum allowable
and
a minimum required
operation of the protective device
p ro s p e c t i v e
p ro s p e c t i v e
s h o rt
c i rc u i t
s h o rt
c u rre n t
c i rc u i t
for each input
c u rre n t
p o rt
of the
U PS
U PS
;
in order to ensure proper
NOTE 1 This req ui rem ent is especiall y applicabl e to fuses, which are not specifi ed to be operated below a certain
fault current val ue.
NOTE 2 The m axim um allowable and m inim um required
proper coordi nation between th e
of the el ectrical
.
p ro s p e c t i v e
s h o rt
p ro s p e c ti v e
c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
s h o rt
c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
are used to ensu re a
and a suitable protective device at th e location
i n s ta l l a ti o n
I f external protective devices are specified or provided the characteristics of those shall be
specified by the manufacturer.
See 6. 2 for m arking.
4. 3 . 2 . 3
O u tp u t
s h o rt c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
ab i l i ty
The
ratings appliy to a.c. and d.c. power output ports and to
other ports for which overcurrent protection is necessary.
o u tp u t
s h o rt
c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 31 –
For all ou tpu t ports , short circu it evalu ation to determ ine the m inim um and m aximum output
short circuit current shall be perform ed according to 5. 2. 4. 4 and the output short circuit
current available from the UPS shall be specified as in 5. 2.4.4 and 6.2.
I nternal electronic output short circuit protection is considered acceptable as an output short
circuit protection d evice of the UPS , when com pliance is shown by test in 5. 2. 4.4.
4.3.2.4
Combined input and output ports
For ports which are both input and output ports the applicable req uirem ents of both 4. 3. 2. 1
and 4.3. 2. 3 appl y.
4.3.3 Short-circuit coordination (backup protection)
Protective d evices provided or specified shall have adeq uate breaking capability to interrupt
the m aximum prospective short circuit current specified for the port to which they are
connected.
I f internal protection of the UPS is not rated for the prospective short circuit current , the
installation instructions shall specify an upstream protective device, rated for this prospective
short circuit current of that port, which shall be used to provide backu p protection. Anal ysis
shall ensure the protection coordination between the external and internal protective device.
NOTE I EC 60364 provi des requi rem ents for upstream protective devices of the backup protection in th e
installation . The above requi rem ent ensu res that th e user is inform ed about any special characteristics of the
upstream protective devices for the backu p protecti on of the UPS , in additi on to the requi rem ents in I EC 60364 or
other local install ation cod es.
Compliance shall be checked by inspection and by the tests of 5.2. 4.4 and 5.2. 4.5 .
4.3.4 Protection by several devices
Where protective d evices that require m anu al replacem ent or resetting are used in more than
one pole of a suppl y to a given load, those devices shall be located together. I t is permitted to
com bine two or m ore protective d evices in one component.
Compliance shall be checked by inspection.
4.3.1 01 AC input current
The input current to the UPS shall not exceed that declared by the UPS manufacturer –
see 6. 2 a).
I n determining the stead y state input current, the consumption due to optional features offered
or provided by the m anufacturer for inclusion in or with the UPS shall be considered and
adj usted to give the most unfavourable result.
NOTE Transient in put cu rren t arising from dyn am ic occurences, for exam ple in rush or overload current, is not
considered.
Compliance is checked when highest current measured or calculated (as applicable) when
performing the test described in 5.2.3.102 does not exceed the input current declared by the
manufacturer (see 6.2).
4.3.1 02 Transformer protection
Transform ers shall be protected against overtemperature.
NOTE Means of protection i n clude:
– overcu rrent protection,
– 32 –
–
–
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
internal th erm al cut-outs,
use of current lim iti ng devices.
Compliance is checked by the applicable tests of 5. 2. 3.104.
4.3.1 03 AC input short-circuit current
The UPS m anufacturer shall specify the rated conditional short-circuit current ( Icc ) or the
rated short-time withstand current ( Icw ) at each AC input port of the UPS . The U PS
m anufacturer m ay specify both. I ndividu al AC input ports of a UPS m ay have ind ividual
ratings .
A UPS with AC input ports that m ay be configured with jum pers or busbars to present a single
AC input port or multiple AC input ports shall be tested as having m ultiple AC input ports.
Testing with installed j u mpers or busbars that com bine m ultiple AC input ports into a single
AC input port is not requ ired when the construction of the jum pers or busbars is at least as
robust as that of the phase conductors in terms of cross-sectional area, mechanical support
and clearance.
A UPS with multiple AC input ports and d ifferent ratings for each port shall indicate, when
configured as a single AC input port, a rating equ al to the lowest rating of an y port
(see table 1 01 ).
Table 1 01 – UPS input port configuration
UPS input port
configuration
AC input port(s)
Icc /Icw
rating
Port 1 , e. g. com bined rectifier and bypass Ic c /Icw
Get more FREE input
standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Si ngle i nput port
Multi ple i nput ports
Port 1 , e. g. rectifier input
Port 2, e. g. bypass in put
Com bined ports 1 an d 2
Icc1 /Icw 1
Icc2 /Icw 2
Lesser of Icc1 /Icw 1 or Icc2 /Icw 2
Except where exempted in 5. 2.3.1 03. 4, conditional short-circuit ratings and withstand
current ratings shall be verified by application of a short-circu it across the AC ou tpu t port
onl y in modes of operation wherein the output power is d elivered by the AC inpu t throu gh a
low impedance path . Refer to 5. 2.3. 1 03. 1 for general procedure, and to Figures EE. 1 to
EE. 3 for a typical circu it for implementation of the test of Clause EE. 4.
The effects of faults that originate within the UPS are addressed in 4.2, except as follows.
Where a UPS has an AC inpu t port with no low impedance path to the AC outpu t port,
compliance is checked by appl ying the short-circuit immediatel y before the point where the
input path no longer presents negligible im ped ance. The point of application of the shortcircuit may be internal to the UPS .
Compliance shall be verified in the modes of operation wherein the output power is or, as a
result of the short-circuit, becomes delivered, by the AC input through a low impedance path .
Verification in stored energy mode is not required.
NOTE 1 Exam ples of such m odes of operation incl ude:
– input voltage an d frequency d epen dent (VFD) UPS operating i n norm al and/or bypass m odes;
– input voltage i nd epend ent (VI ) UPS operati ng in norm al and/or bypass m odes;
– input voltage an d frequency i ndepend ent (VFI ) UPS operatin g in bypass m ode;
– UPS with built-i n m ainten ance bypass switch when operati ng in m aintenance bypass m ode.
NOTE 2 UPS perform ance classifi cations VFD, VI and VFI are detai led i n I EC 62040-3: 201 1 .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 33 –
4.3.1 04 Protection of the energy storage device
The energ y storage device whether internal (integral) or external to the UPS unit shall be
protected against fault cu rrent and against overcurrent.
An overcurrent protective device providing the functions of a d isconnect device as stated in
4. 1 01 .2 shall be located in close proxim ity to the energ y storage device, and the following
requirements appl y:
a) for the purpose of interrupting a fau lt current supplied by the energ y storage device, the
overcurrent protective device shall :
– not require a cu rrent greater than the fault current available,
– be rated to interrupt the maximum fault current available.
b) the cables interconnecting the energ y storage device, the overcurrent protective device
and the U PS u nit shall be rated to support:
– the maximum current requ ired by the U PS when operating in stored en ergy mode,
– the m axim um fault current available.
The maxim um fault current available shall be determ ined at the output of the full y ch arged
energ y storage device.
Compliance with requirements a) and b) above is verified by investigation of the
characteristics of the protective device(s) and of the cables as supplied (or as specified for
installation) while considering the energy storage device (or range of energy storage devices)
to be supported.
NOTE Guid ance for current rati ng of cables is foun d in I EC 60287-1 -1 .
4.3.1 05
Unsynch ronised load transfer
This abnormal condition is to be simulated on a UPS which employs either a solid state or
manual switch that connects the bypass source of suppl y to the U PS output.
Compliance is determined by conducting the test in 5.2.3.105.
NOTE This test is to sim ulate the effects of foreseeabl e wi ri ng conn ection m isplacem ents i n the sou rces of suppl y
to the UPS .
4.4
Protection again st electric sh ock
4.4.1 General
Protection against electric shock depends on the decisive voltage class from 4. 4. 2 and
insulation requ irements from 4. 4. 2.3, and is to be provided by at least one of the following
measures:
–
–
basic protection from 4. 4. 3 and fault protection from 4. 4. 4;
enh anced protection from 4.4. 5
Protection und er norm al conditions is provid ed by basic protection , and protection under
sin gle fault conditions is provid ed by fault protection .
Enhan ced protection provides protection under both conditions.
Additional protection can be provided by residual current-operated protective devices (RCD).
For further inform ation, see 4. 4. 8.
– 34 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
NOTE I n this stan dard, 4. 4. 1 to 4. 4. 6 have been harm onized with the concepts of the horizontal standard
I EC 61 1 40 for protection ag ai nst electrical shock. Basi c protecti on , fau l t protecti on , en h an ced pro tecti on and
the com bination of those m easures h as been im plem ented.
4. 4. 2 Deci si ve vol tag e cl ass
4. 4. 2. 1
G en eral
The probability of electric shock increases with voltage level, surface area of the accessible
conductive part or circuit in contact with the skin and the humidity condition of skin. To reduce
the likelihood of electric shock, it is important to determ ine the safe d eci si ve vol tag e cl ass
( DVC As ).
For the selection of the relevant d eci si ve vol tag e cl ass Ax for accessible circuits the
following appl y:
–
–
–
the reaction of the bod y (see A. 5);
the area of the accessible part of the eq uipment in relation to the area of the part of the
bod y that may contact the accessible part, from Table 3;
the hum idity condition of the bod y skin from Table 4.
The values in Table 5 are based on a current path from the contact area of the bod y to feet
with the person in standing position.
No protection is required if:
–
–
under normal operation, the lim its derived from Table 5, and
under si n g l e fau l t con d i ti on the lim its of touch voltage lim its from Figures 1 to Figure 3,
Geted.
more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
are not exceed
DVC Ax, as chosen in Table 5 becomes the highest voltage value permitted to be touched for
the U PS under consideration and is so-called DVC As for use in this standard . Other DVC Ax
values higher than DVC As shall then be treated as DVC B .
I n this standard , values of DVC B and DVC C are not allowed to be touchable, except u nder
dry cond ition with finger tip for DVC B as shown in Table 2.
NOTE Within the U PS , this stand ard all ows m ore than on e DVC As circuit with different levels of DVC As .
4. 4. 2. 2
4. 4. 2. 2. 1
Determ i n ati on of decisive voltage class
G en eral
For protection against the ven tri cu l ar fi bri l l ati on bod y reaction, DVC can be selected from
Table 2. For less severe reactions of the bod y, more information is given in A. 5.
I f it is im possible to protect against the bod y reaction relevant to the DVC As, a basi c
protecti on against accessibility to h azard ou s l i ve parts according to 4. 4. 3 is required.
The DVC voltage lim its for the stead y-state values und er normal operation from Table 2 are
given in Table 5. The short term non-recurring touch voltage limits are given in Figure 1 to
Figure 3.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 35 –
Table 2 – Selection of DVC for touch voltage to protect against ventricular fibrillation
Bod y contact area
Bod y skin
humidity
conditions
Part of the bod y
Hand
Finger tip
DVC A2
DVC A1
DVC A
DVC A2
DVC B
DVC A
Basic protection ag ainst
DVC A1
DVC A2
Dry
Water wet
Saltwater wet
4.4.2.2.2
accessibili ty is requi red
Selection tables for contact area and skin humidity condition
I n order to protect against ventricular fibrillation , the appropriate conditions from Table 3
and Table 4 shall be selected.
Table 3 – Selection of body contact area
Contact area of accessible parts
Hand
Finger tip
cm 2
accessible parts
Part of the bod y
cm 2
<
1
1
<
accessible parts
<
80
cm 2
80
<
accessi ble parts
<
500
N OTE I n ord er to m atch several basic standards, deali ng wi th Sm all, Medium and Larg e contact areas, this
standard is usin g Fin ger tip instead of Sm all, H an d instead of Medium and Part of the bod y i nstead of Large.
Table 4 – Selection of humidity condition of the skin
Dry
norm al in door con di tion
Humidity condi tion of the ski n
Water wet
imm ersed for m ore th an 1 m in i n
n orm al water (a vera g e val u e ρ =
35
Ω cm ,
pH = 7, 7 to 9)
Saltwater wet
i mm ersed for m ore th an 1 m in i n a
solution of 3 % N aCl in water
(a ve rag e val u e ρ = 0, 2 5 Ω cm , pH =
7, 5 to 8, 5)
N OTE 1 For selection of skin hum idity con dition Table 1 8 provi des the rel evant skin cond iti on related to th e
service en vi ronm ent con dition.
N OTE 2 I nform ation an d valu es are taken from I EC 60479-1
UPS within the scope of this docum ent are by default specified for ind oor dry environmental
service conditions and for access by an ordinary person . For such defau lt application, select
the following area and condition:
a) bod y contact area: "Hand" (Table 3)
b) skin humidity condition: "Dry" (Table 4)
NOTE The area and conditi on above d eterm ine the decisi ve voltage categ ory of the U PS to be DVC A, thus
lim iting the voltag e on touch abl e parts to equ al or less than 30 V RMS, 42, 4 V peak or 60 V DC.
Different bod y contact area and/or skin hum idity condition shall be applied where different
environm ental service conditions and/or operator access restrictions apply.
For equipment to be installed in a restricted access area, the following exceptions are
perm itted .
•
Contact with bare parts of a circuit at hazardous voltage with the test finger is
perm itted (see Figure M. 1 01 ). H owever, such parts shall be so located or guarded that
unintentional contact is u nlikel y.
– 36 –
•
•
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Bare parts that present a hazardous energy level shall be located or guarded so that
unintentional bridging by conductive m aterials that might be present is unlikel y.
N o requirement is specified regarding contact with bare parts of circuits complying
with the limits of decisive voltage classifications DVC A1 , A2, A3, A or B (see
Table A. 1 01 ).
I n deciding whether or not unintentional contact is likely, account is taken of the need to gain
access past, or near to, the bare parts. For d etermination of a hazardous en ergy level, see
4. 5. 1 . 2.
Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement.
Limits of th e working voltage for the DVC
4.4.2.2.3
Lim its for the working voltage regarding the DVC for norm al operation are given in Table 5.
Table 5 – Steady state voltage limits for the decisive voltage classes
Li mi ts of worki ng vol tage
V
DVC
AC vol tag e (r.m.s.)
UACL
AC vol tag e
(peak)
DC vol tag e (mean )
UACPL
UDCL
A1
8
1 1 ,3
22
A2
12
17
28
A3
20
28, 3
48
a
Get more
Standard Sharing
42, 4 Group and our
60 chats
A FREE standards
30 from
B
50
71
1 20
C
> 50
> 71
> 1 20
NOTE I n som e standards SELV and PELV have sim ilar li m its to DVC B .
a
I n this standard th e DVC A li m its are consi dered for one circuit onl y. When m ore
than on e DVC A circuit of the UPS is accessible an d evaluation from 4. 2 shows th at
the voltag e of the two circuit can ad d togeth er u nd er si ngle fau lt condi tion , the lim it
is 25V for a. c. voltag e r. m . s.
A. 6 shows three exam ples of d ifferent waveform s of working voltage and provides methods
to evaluate the voltage und er consideration to match with the DVC levels.
The short term non-recurring touch voltages limits during a single fault are given in Figure 1 ,
Figu re 2 and Figure 3.
Within 1 0 000 m s, the voltage has to decrease to the stead y state value given in Table 5.
Table 5, or the fault is to be interru pted by a protective device. U nder fault conditions where a
protective device is used the characteristics of such device shall ensure that the time-voltage
lim its given in Figure 1 to Figure 3 are not exceeded . I f an external protective device is used,
information on characteristics of such device shall be specified by the U PS manufacturer in
the installation m anu al according to 6. 3. 7. 7.
NOTE 1 Figu re 1 to Fig ure 3 onl y provi de d. c. values for touch voltage because m ost freq uent touch abl e voltag e
are d. c. val ues. I f the m anufacturer n eeds val ues for a. c. voltage, see A. 5. 5.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 37 –
28 V
1 00 000
60 V
1 20 V
Time ( ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Part of the body
Hand
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Finger
1 00
575 V 1 000
IEC 1205/12
Fi g u re 1 – Tou ch ti m e - d . c. peak vol tag e zon es of ven tri cu l ar fi bri l l ati on
i n d ry ski n con d i ti on
22 V
1 00 000
28 V
60 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Part of the body
Hand
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Finger
1 00
575 V 1 000
IEC 1206/12
Fi g u re 2 – Tou ch ti m e - d . c. peak vol tag e zon es of ven tri cu l ar fi bri l l ati on
i n water-wet ski n con d i ti on
– 38 –
22 V
1 00 000
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
28 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
575 V
1 000
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Hand
Finger
IEC 1207/12
Fi g u re 3 – Tou ch ti m e - d . c. peak vol tag e zon es of ven tri cu l ar fi bri l l ati on
i n sal twater-wet ski n con d i ti on
For part of the bod y, no information for time-voltage zone is given. Basi c protecti on against
more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
accessibilityGet
is required.
For testing, see 5. 2.4.
I f the test resu lts in a failure, ad ditional m easure is required for protection against electric
shock according to 4. 4. 3.
4. 4. 2. 3
Req u i rem en ts for protecti on ag ai n st el ectri c sh ock
Table 6 shows possible solutions for com pliance with 4. 4 for the application of simple or
depend ent on the DVC of the circu it under consid eration and of
protecti ve separati on ,
ad j acen t ci rcu i ts .
The req uirements of this standard for protection against electric shock may be fu lfilled by
other m eans than shown in Table 6, in which case failure anal ysis and testing shall show that
the requirem ents of 4. 1 and 4. 4 are m et.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 39 –
Table 6 – Protection requirements for circuit u nder consideration
DVC of ci rcui t
under
consi derati on
Protecti on
agai nst
accessi bil ity
Protecti on to
accessi bl e
conductive
parts
connected to
PE
Protection to
accessi bl e
conductive
parts th at are
not conn ected
to PE g
As a
B or
Ax > As
C
As a
No
1b
1
1 c or 2 d
2
enhanced
protection
B or
Ax > As
C
basic
protection e
basi c
protection e
basi c
protecti on
1 c or 2 d
enhanced
protection
enhanced
protecti on
basi c
protection
enhanced
protecti on
Protecti on to ad jacent ci rcui t
of DVC:
1 or 2 f
N OTE 1
1
Protection is not necessary for safety, but m ay be requ ired for functional reasons accordin g to 4. 4. 7. 3.
2
Basi c protecti on for ci rcuit of high er voltag e.
1 or 2 Depen di ng on separation with other circui ts.
N OTE 2 Ax > As
Voltage l ess than DVC B but hi gher than DVC As, that d oes n ot m eet 4. 4. 2. 2.
A, A1 , A2 or A3, which ever is appropri ate accordin g to 4. 4. 2. 2.
b
I f the consid ered ci rcuit is d esignated as a SELV ci rcuit, basi c protecti on is requi red from earth and from
PELV circuits.
c
Both circuits un der considerati on h ave the sam e DVC As level.
d
Both circuits under considerati on h ave different DVC As level .
e
Except for Fing er ti p. See Tabl e 2.
f
Basi c protection is req uired between g alvanically isol ated circuits (e. g. mains suppl y , U PS output, PV or
gen erator output, au xili ari es).
g
Also appli es to cond uctive parts connected to fu nction al earth .
a
To ensure the integrity of the insulation of the U PS , the manufacturer of a UPS shall state the
maxim um voltage allowed to be connected to each port . See 6. 3. 7. 1 for marking.
4.4.3
4.4.3.1
Provision for basic protection
General
Basic protection is employed to prevent persons from touching hazardous live parts . I t
shall be provid ed by one or m ore of the m easures given in:
–
–
–
–
Protection
Protection
Protection
Protection
by m eans
by means
by m eans
by m eans
of basic insulation of live parts in 4. 4. 3. 2;
of enclosures or barriers in 4. 4. 3.3;
of lim itation of touch current and charge in 4. 4.3. 4;
of lim ited voltages in 4.4. 3. 5.
NOTE Furth er m easu res to fulfill the requi rem ent for basic protection are gi ven in I EC 61 1 40. Product
comm ittees using this docum ent as reference docum ent m igh t consi der those m easures.
4.4.3.2
Protection by means of basic insulation of live parts
Live parts shall be completel y surrounded with insulation if their working voltage is greater
than DVC As or if they do not have protective separation from adj acent circuits of DVC C .
Basic in sulation may be provid ed by solid insulation or air clearance.
The insulation shall be rated accord ing to the impulse voltage, temporary overvoltage or
working voltage (see 4. 4. 7. 2.1 ), whichever gives the m ost severe requirement. I t shall not be
possible to rem ove the insulation without the use of a tool or key.
– 40 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
An accessible cond uctive part is consid ered to be conductive if its surface is bare or is
covered by an insulating layer that d oes not com pl y with the requ irements of at least basic
insulation .
An y accessible cond uctive part is considered to be a hazardous live part if not separated
from the live parts by at least as specified in Table 6.
The basic insulation shall be designed and tested to withstand the impu lse voltages and
temporary overvoltages for the circuits to which they are connected. See 5. 2. 3.2 and 5.2.3. 4
for tests.
A. 7 provides examples of the use of elem ents of protective measures.
4.4.3.3
Opening
Accessible openings in enclosu res shall com ply with m inim um protection degree I P2X in
accord ance with I EC 60529 when installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
unless a greater level of protection is stated by the manufacturer.
Openings shall not exceed 5 mm in an y dimension when such openings are located in the top
of an en closure not exceed ing a height of 1 , 8 m and when located above bare parts
presenting a hazardous voltage , unless the construction prevents vertical access to such
parts, for exam ple, by m eans of design (see Figu re 1 01 ).
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
IEC
Slanted openi ngs
IEC
Vertical openings
Figu re 1 01 – Examples of design of open ings
preventing vertical access
Compliance is checked by inspection as per 5. 2. 2. 2 in this document
4.4.3.4
Protection by means of limitation of touch current an d ch arge
The limitation of touch current and discharge energ y shall not exceed:
–
–
a valu e of 3, 5 mA a.c. or 1 0 mA d.c. for the limitation of touch current ; and
a valu e of 50 µ C for the lim itation of discharge energ y.
See A. 3 and A. 4 for examples of these measures.
NOTE 1
The val ue of the tou ch current is in dependent of the DVC Ax .
NOTE 2 Product comm ittees using this d ocum ent as referen ce docum ent m ay consider the touch cu rren t level of
0, 5 m A a. c. / 2 mA d. c. as threshold of perception as recommend ed by I EC 61 1 40.
4.4.3.5
Protection by mean s of limited voltages
The voltage between simultaneously accessible parts shall not be greater than DVC As as
determined in 4. 4. 2. 2.
See A. 2, A. 3 and A. 4 for examples of these measures.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4.4.4
4.4.4.1
– 41 –
Provision for fault protection
General
Fault protection is req uired to prevent shock currents which can result from contact with
accessible conductive parts during and after an insulation failure.
Fau lt protection shall be provid ed by one or m ore of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
–
Protective equ ipotential bonding in 4.4.4. 2 in combinations with the PE conductor in
4. 4. 4.3;
Automatic disconnection of su ppl y in 4. 4. 4.4;
Supplementary insulation in 4. 4. 4. 5;
Simple separation between circuits in 4. 4. 4.6;
Electricall y protective screening in 4. 4. 4. 7.
Fault protection shall be independ ent and additional to those for basic protection .
NOTE Furth er m easures to fulfill th e req ui rem ent for faul t protection are gi ven in I EC 61 1 40. Prod uct
comm ittees using this docum ent as reference docum ent m igh t consider those m easures.
4.4.4.2
4.4.4.2.1
Protective equipotential bonding
General
Protective equipotential bonding shall be provided between accessible conductive parts of
the equipm ent and the means of connection for the PE conductor , except:
a)
accessible conductive parts that are protected by one of the m easures in 4.4. 6. 4; or
b)
when accessible condu ctive parts are separated from live parts using double or
reinforced in sulation .
Electrical contact to the means of connection of the PE conductor shall be achieved by one
or m ore of the following m eans:
–
–
–
through direct metallic contact;
through other accessible conductive parts or other metallic com ponents which are not
rem oved when the U PS is used as intended;
through a d edicated protective equipotential bonding conductor.
When painted surfaces (in particular powder painted surfaces) are joined together, m asking of
paint, paint piercing methods or a separate connection shall be made to ensure reliable
contact.
Where electrical equipment is m ounted on lids, doors, or cover plates, continuity of the
protective equipotential bonding circuit shall be ensured by a d edicated conductor or
equivalent means com plying with the req uirements for protective equipotential bondin g . I f
fasteners, hinges or sliding contacts do not provide and guarantee low enou gh im ped ance,
sufficient parallel bonding is required.
Electrical connections of protective equ ipotential bonding circu it shall be designed so that
contact pressure is not transmitted through insulating m aterial, unless there is sufficient
resilience in the metallic parts to compensate for an y possible shrinkage or distortion of the
insulating material.
Unless specified by the m anufacturer and in compliance with 4.4. 4. 2. 2 metal d ucts of flexible
or rigid construction and metallic cable sheaths shall not be used as protective equ ipotential
bonding m eans. N evertheless, such m etal ducts and the metal sheathing of all connecting
– 42 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
cables (for example cable arm ouring, lead sheath) shall be connected to the protective
equipotential bonding circuit.
The protective equipotential bonding circuit shall not incorporate a com ponent such as
switch or overcurrent protective d evices which may open the circuit.
The electrical connection points of the protective equipotential bonding shall be corrosionresistant.
Figu re 4 shows an exam ple of a U PS assembl y and its associated protective equ ipotential
bonding .
Subsystem 1
Subsystem 2
Subsystem n
Door
5
EE
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
1
6
1
6
1
6
2
4
3
IEC 1208/12
Key
1
protecti ve equ ipoten ti al bonding of sub system s or UPS PE conductor (dim ension ed accordi ng to UPS
req uirem ents)
2
protecti ve equi poten tial bon di ng
3
PE conductor (dim ensioned accordin g to UPS requ irem ents) to i nstallati on earth ing poi nt
4
earth bar
5
hing e
6
PE conductor to the load
EE other electrical equi pm ent (bonded as rel evant for that equi pment)
Figure 4 – Example of a U PS assembly an d its
associated protective equipoten tial bonding
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 43 –
Figu re 5 shows an example of a U PS assembly and its associated protective equipotential
bonding throu gh direct m etallic contact.
Subsystem 1
Subsystem 2
Subsystem n
1
Door
5
EE
7
6
3
6
6
4
2
2
IEC 1 209/1 2
Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
EE
protecti ve equi poten tial bon di ng of sub system s throug h di rect m etallic contact (paint rem oved)
protecti ve equi poten tial bon ding
PE conductor (dim ensioned accordin g to UPS requ irem ents) to i nstallati on earth ing poi nt
earth bar
hinge
PE conductor to the load
m etal subplate
other electrical equi pm ent (bon ded as rel evant for that equi pment)
Figure 5 – Example of a U PS assembly an d its
associated protective equipotential bonding
– 44 –
4. 4. 4. 2 . 2
Ra t i n g
P ro t e c t i v e
o f p ro t e c t i v e
e q u i p oten ti a l
bon d i n g
eq u i poten ti al
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
bon d i n g
shall either be:
a) sized in accordance with the req uirem ents for the
in 4.4. 4.3 and the m eans
of connection for the
in 4.4. 4. 3. 2 to ensure no voltage drop exceeding the
values from 4. 4. 2. 2.3 during a fault; or
PE
PE
con d u ctor
co n d u c to r
b) sized
item(s) concerned when they
– to withstand the highest stresses that can occur to the
are subj ected to a fau lt connecting to accessible cond uctive parts; and
– to remain effective for as long as a fault to the accessible conductive parts persists or until
an upstream protective device removes power from the part; and
– to ensure no voltage drop exceeding the values from 4.4. 2.2. 3 d uring normal operation
and d uring a fau lt.
U PS
Compliance shall be checked with the type tests in 5. 2.3.11 .
4. 4. 4. 3
4. 4. 4. 3 . 1
PE
co n d u cto r
G e n e ra l
, u nless
shall be connected at all times when power is supplied to the
com plies with the requirem ents of
(see 4. 4. 6. 3) or
. U nless local wiring regulations state otherwise, the
cross-sectional
area shall be d etermined from Table 7 or by calculation accord ing to 543. 1 of I EC 60364-554: 201 1 .
A
the
PE
U PS
co n d u cto r
U PS
cl a ss
p ro t e c t i v e
III
cl as s
II
p ro t e c t i v e
PE
co n d u c to r
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I f the
is routed through a plu g and socket, or sim ilar means of disconnection, it
shall not be possible to disconnect it unless power is simultaneousl y rem oved from the part to
be protected .
PE
co n d u cto r
a
Tabl e
C ro s s - s e c t i o n a l
a re a
o f th e
of ph ase
UPS
S
7 – PE
co n d u cto r
c o n d u c to rs
c ro s s - s e c t i o n
Minimum
c ro s s - s e c t i o n a l
PE
mm 2
a
a re a
o f th e
c o n d u c to r
S
c o r re s p o n d i n g
p
mm 2
S ≤ 16
S
1 6 < S ≤ 35
16
35 < S
S/2
These valu es are vali d onl y if the
is m ade of the sam e m aterial as the ph ase conductors. I n
case of different m aterials the cross-sectional area of th e
shall be d eterm ined in a m anner
which produces a conductance equi val ent to th at wh ich results from the applicati on of this table.
PE
c o n d u c to r
PE
co n d u c to r
The cross-sectional area of every
that does not form part of the suppl y cable
or cable
shall, in an y case, be not less than:
PE
co n d u cto r
e n c l o s u re
–
–
2, 5 m m 2 if m echanical protection is provided; or
4 mm 2 if mechanical protection is not provided.
Provisions within cord-connected equipm ent shall be mad e so that the
in the
shall, in the case of failure of the strain-relief mechanism, be the last cond uctor to be
interrupted .
PE
co n d u cto r
c o rd
For special system topologies, the
req uired .
U PS
designer shall verify the
PE
co n d u cto r
cross-section
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4.4.4.3.2
– 45 –
M eans of connection for the PE conductor
UPS shall have a means of connection for the PE con ductor , located near the terminals for
the respective live conductors. The means of connection shall be corrosion-resistant and shall
be su itable for the connection of conductors according to Table 7 and of cables in accordance
with the wiring rules applicable at the installation . The m eans of connection for the PE
conductor shall not be used as a part of the m echanical assembl y of the equipment or for
other connections. Connection and bond ing points shall be designed so that their currentcarrying capacity is not impaired by mechanical, chem ical, or electrochemical influences.
Where enclosu res and /or conductors of alum inium or aluminium alloys are used, particular
attention should be given to the problem s of electrolytic corrosion.
Compliance shall be checked by inspection.
Annex K provides further inform ation about electrochem ical corrosion.
See 6. 3. 7. 3. 2 for marking req uirem ents.
The marking shall not be placed on or fixed by screws, washers or other parts which might be
rem oved when conductors are being connected.
4.4.4.3.3
Touch current in case of failure of PE conductor
The req uirem ents of this subclause shall be satisfied to prevent accessible conductive parts
to become dangerous in case of damage to or d isconnection of the PE conductor .
For pluggable type A equipment, the touch current shall not exceed the limits specified in
4. 4. 3.4
For all other U PS , one or m ore of the following measures shall be applied, unless the tou ch
current can be shown to be less than the lim its specified in 4. 4. 3. 4:
a)
Use of a fixed connection and
– a cross-section of the PE conductor of at least 1 0 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al; or
– autom atic disconnection of the suppl y in case of d iscontinuity of the PE conductor ; or
– provision of an additional term inal for a second PE conductor of the same crosssectional area as the original PE conductor ;
or
b)
Use of a pluggable type B connection with a minimum PE con ductor cross-section of
2, 5 m m 2 as part of a m ulti-conductor power cable. Adequ ate strain relief shall be
provided.
For m arking req uirements, see 6. 3. 7. 4.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by test of 5. 2.3.7.
For equipm ent which may be energized from multiple sources of suppl y, the touch cu rrent
limits above apply in all possible intended in stallation configurations and com binations of
sources that may be energized at the same time, unless one of the measures in a) or b)
above is used.
When it is intended and allowed to interconnect two or m ore U PS using one com mon PE
conductor , the above touch cu rrent requ irements appl y to the maximum number of U PS to
be interconnected, unless one of the m easures in a) or b) above is used. The maxim um
– 46 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
number of interconnected U PS is used in the testing and has to be stated in the installation
manual.
4.4.4.4
Automatic disconnection of supply
For automatic disconnection of su ppl y:
–
–
a protective equ ipotential bondin g system shall be provided ; and
a protective device operated by the fau lt current shall d isconnect one or more of the line
cond uctors suppl ying the equipm ent, system or installation , in case of a failure of basic
insulation .
The protective device shall interru pt the fault current within a tim e as specified in Figure 1 ,
Figure 2 or Figure 3 in 4. 4. 2. 2.3.
4.4.4.5
Supplementary insulation
Supplementary insulation is an independ ent insulation applied in add ition to basic
insulation for fau lt protection and shall be dimensioned to withstand the same stresses as
specified for basic in sulation .
4.4.4.6
Simple separation between circuits
Simple separation between a circuit and other circuits or earth shall be achieved by basic
insulation throu ghout, rated for the highest voltage present.
I f an y com ponent is connected between the separated circu its, that component shall withstand
the electric stresses specified for the insulation which it bridges.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I f an y com ponent is connected between a circu it and a circuit connected to earth, its
im pedance shall limit the current flow through the com ponent to the stead y-state touch
current values indicated in 4. 4. 3.4.
4.4.4.7
Electrically protective screen ing
Electrically protective screening interposed between hazardous live parts of a U PS , shall
consist of a cond uctive screen connected to the protective equipotential bonding of the
UPS whereby the screen is separated from live parts by at least simple separation .
The protective screen and the connection to the protective equipotential bonding system of
the U PS and that interconnection shall compl y with the requirem ents of 4. 4.4.2.
4.4.5
4.4.5.1
Enhan ced protection
General
Enhanced protection shall provide both basic and fault protection and can be achived by
m eans of:
–
–
–
Reinforced insulation in 4.4. 5. 2;
Protective separation between circu its in 4. 4. 5. 3;
Protection by m eans of in 4. 4.5. 4.
NOTE Furth er m easu res to fulfil the req uirem ent for enh anced protecti on are given in I EC 61 1 40. Prod uct
comm ittees using this docum ent as reference docum ent m igh t consi der those m easures.
4.4.5.2
Reinforced insulation
Reinforced in sulation shall be so designed as to be able to withstand electric, therm al,
mechanical and environmental stresses with the sam e reliability of protection as provided by
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
d ou bl e
4. 4. 4. 5).
(
i n s u l ati o n
4. 4. 5 . 3
P ro t e c t i v e
P ro t e c t i v e
basi c
–
–
d ou bl e
4. 4. 4.5);
s e p a ra t i o n
i n su l ati on
re i n fo rc e d
i n su l ati on
s e p a ra t i o n
following m eans:
– 47 –
and
b e twe e n
s u p p l e m e n t a ry
i n s u l a ti o n
, see 4. 4. 3. 2 and
c i rc u i t s
between a circu it and other circu its shall be achieved by one of the
(
basi c
i n s u l ati on
i n su l ati on
s u p p l e m e n t a ry
i n s u l ati on
in 4. 4. 3. 2 and
in 4. 4. 5.2;
–
electrically
–
a combination of these provisions.
p ro t e c t i v e
and
in 4. 4. 4. 7;
s c re e n i n g
I f cond uctors of the separated circu it are contained together with conductors of other circuits
in a m ulti-cond uctor cable or in another grouping of conductors, they shall be insulated,
individuall y or collectivel y, for the highest voltage present, so that
is
achieved.
d ou bl e
i n s u l ati o n
I f an y component is connected between the separated circuits, that com ponent shall comply
with the requirem ents for
devices (see 4. 4.5. 4)
p ro t e c t i v e
4. 4. 5 . 4
P ro t e c t i o n
P ro t e c t i v e
co n d i ti o n s
b y m ean s
i m ped an ce
o f p ro t e c t i v e
i m p ed an ce
shall be arranged so that under both norm al and
the current and discharge energ y available shall be limited accord ing to 4. 4. 3. 4.
i m p ed an ce
The
and
5. 2. 3.4 for tests.
si ngl e
fa u l t
shall be d esigned and tested to withstand the im pulse voltages
for the circuits to which they are connected. See 5. 2. 3. 2 and
p ro t e c t i v e
i m p ed an ce s
t e m p o ra ry
o v e rv o l t a g e s
Compliance with the requirement for the limitation of
5.2.3.6 .
touch current
is checked by test of
Compliance with the requirement for the discharge energy shall be checked by performing
calculations and/or measurements to determine the voltage and capacitance.
NOTE A
connection.
p ro t e c t i v e
4. 4. 6
4. 4. 6 . 1
i m ped a n ce
P ro t e c t i v e
desi gn ed accordin g to this subclause is not consi dered to be a g al vanic
m e a s u re s
G e n e ra l
That part of a
That part of a
That part of a
U PS
U PS
UPS
which m eets the requirem ents of 4. 4. 6. 2 is defined as
which m eets the requirem ents of 4. 4. 6. 3 is d efined as
which m eets the requirem ents of 4. 4. 6. 4 is d efined as
.
p ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
I
p ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
II
p ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
III
Compliance shall be checked by satisfying the requirements for protective
class III.
class I, class II
A. 7 provides Examples of the use of elements of protective measures.
Equipm ent of protective class I, II and III shall be m arked according to 6. 3. 7. 3.
.
.
or
– 48 –
4. 4. 6 . 2
P ro t e c t i v e
P ro t e c t i v e
–
–
basi c
fa u l t
cl as s
fo r p ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
I
eq u i pm en t
equipment shall m eet the requ irements for:
in 4.4. 3; and
in 4. 4. 4. 2 an d 4. 4.4. 3 with respect to equipotential bond ing and
p ro t e c t i o n
p ro t e c t i o n
con d u ctor
4. 4. 6 . 3
I
m e a s u re s
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
.
P ro t e c t i v e
m e a s u re s
fo r p ro t e c t i v e
cl ass
II
eq u i pm en t
eq uipment shall meet the requ irem ents for
according to 4. 4.5 and the
shall m eet the requirem ent for
4. 4. 3 with respect to accessibility to
.
P ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
II
en h an ced
e n c l o s u re
h a z a rd o u s
PE
basi c
p ro t e c t i o n
p ro t e c t i o n
in
l i v e p a rt s
equ ipment shall not have means of connection for the
. This
does not appl y if a
is passed through the eq uipment to equipm ent seriesconnected beyond it.
P ro t e c t i v e
cl a s s
II
PE
PE
I n the latter case the
–
–
c o n d u cto r
co n d u ctor
PE
and its means for connection shall be separated from:
co n d u ctor
accessible surface of the eq uipment; and
circuits which em ploy
p ro t e c t i v e
with at least
si m pl e
si mple
accord ing to the req uirem ent in 4. 4. 4. 6.
s e p a ra t i o n
The
connected equ ipment.
s e p a ra t i o n
shall be designed according to the
s e p a ra t i o n
ra t e d
of the series-
vo l tag e
fromhave
Standard
Sharing
and our chats
Equipm ent Get
of more FREE standards
may
provision
for Group
the connection
of an earthing
conductor for functional reasons or for the dam ping of overvoltages. I n this case, the
functional earthing condu ctor shall be separated from:
p ro t e c t i v e
–
–
cl a s s
II
accessible surface of the eq uipment; and
circuits which em ploy
p ro t e c t i v e
with at least
p ro t e c t i v e
Equipm ent of
s e p a ra t i o n
p ro t e c t i v e
cl a s s
II
s e p a ra t i o n
accord ing to 4. 4. 5. 3
according to the requ irement in 4. 4. 5. 3.
shall be marked accord ing to 6.3. 7. 3. 3.
Compliance is checked by inspection .
4. 4. 6 . 4
4. 4. 6 . 4. 1
P ro t e c t i v e
m e a s u re s
fo r p ro t e c t i v e
m eans:
–
–
–
basi c
III
eq u i pm en t
o r c i rc u i t s
G e n e ra l
Protective measures shall be achieved by
–
cl as s
i n s u l ati o n
4. 4. 3.2 and 4. 4.4.5;
and
s u p p l e m e n t a ry
p ro t e c t i v e
i n s u l ati on
according to 4. 4. 5. 2;
electrically
and
a combination of these provisions;
re i n fo rc e d
s e p a ra t i o n
(
d ou bl e
by one of the following
i n su l ati on
) according to
i n s u l ati on
p ro t e c t i v e
s c re e n i n g
simple
s e p a ra t i o n
accord ing to 4. 4. 4. 7; or
used in combination with one of the following m eans:
–
p ro t e c t i v e
i m p ed an ce
of current; or
accord ing to 4. 4. 5. 4 comprising limitation of discharge energ y and
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
–
– 49 –
lim itation of voltage accord ing to 4. 4. 3. 5.
The
intended use of the
p ro t e c t i v e
4. 4. 6 . 4. 2
s e p a ra t i o n
U PS
.
C o n n e cti o n
to
shall be full y and effectivel y maintained under all cond itions of
P ELV an d
S E L V c i rc u i t s
If a
is intended for connection of an external
than DVC As :
p o rt
–
–
PELV
or
SELV
circu it with a higher voltage
m easures to limit the voltage to that of DVC As shall be taken (see Annex A); or
shall be provided.
basi c
p ro t e c t i o n
For connectors containing pins with very sm all contact area ( < 1 m m²), the next higher voltage
level for DVC As, of Table 5, is perm itted . Example: if DVC A1 is DVC As , then DVC A2 is
permitted at pins of signal connectors.
The connection of external
following consideration:
–
–
PELV
or
SELV
circuits to an internal circuit is permitted with the
without measures: onl y if the DVC of the
and
voltage are lower than or eq ual
to the DVC selected from Table 5 for the internal circuit u nder consideration; and
with m easures: if the DVC of the
and
voltage are higher than the DVC
selected from Table 5 for the internal circuit under consideration.
PELV
PELV
SELV
SELV
The possibility of an ad dition of the voltages of the circuits under consideration to a higher
level under fau lt conditions shall be consid ered.
For marking, see 6. 3. 7.1 .
Consid eration needs to be given to factors such as whether the circu its involved are earthed
or not, what the voltages involved are, whether or not direct contact with
is
possible, single fau lts in either equ ipment or the interconnections, etc.
l i ve
4. 4. 7
4. 4. 7 . 1
4. 4. 7 . 1 . 1
p a rt s
I n s u l a ti o n
G e n e ra l
I n fl u e n c i n g
fa c t o rs
This su bclause gives m inimum requ irements for insulation , based on the principles of
I EC 60664.
Manufacturing tolerances shall be taken into account for the requirements in 4. 4. 7.
Insulation shall be selected after consideration of the following influences:
–
–
–
–
–
–
pollution degree;
overvoltage category;
supply system earthing;
impu lse withstand voltage,
location of insulation ;
type of insulation .
t e m p o ra ry
o v e rv o l t a g e
and
w o rk i n g
vo l tag e
;
Verification of insulation shall be m ade according to 5. 2. 2. 1 , 5. 2. 3. 2, 5. 2. 3. 4, and 5. 2. 3.5.
The working voltage can also be m easured in accord ance with Annex A
– 50 –
4.4.7.1 .2
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Pollution degree
Insulation , especiall y wh en provided by clearances and creepage distances, is affected by
pollution which occurs d uring the expected lifetime of the UPS . The micro-environm ental
cond itions for insulation shall be applied according to Table 8.
Table 8 – Definitions of pollution degrees
Pollution
degree
Description
1
No polluti on or only dry, non-cond uctive poll ution occurs. The polluti on h as no i nfluence.
2
Norm al l y, onl y n on -con ductive poll ution occurs. Occasional ly, however, a tem porary cond uctivity
caused by con densation is to be expected.
3
Con ductive pol luti on or d ry non -cond uctive pol lution occurs which becom es cond uctive due to
condensation wh ich is to be expected.
4
The polluti on g en erates persi stent cond uctivity caused, for exam ple by conducti ve d ust or rain or
snow.
The pollution degree shall be d etermined accord ing to the environmental condition for which
the product is specified. See Table 1 8 for selection of pollu tion d egree accord ing to
environm ental classification of the installation .
The insulation may be determ ined according to pollution degree 2 if one of the following
applies:
I nstructions are provided with the UPS ind icating that it shall be installed in a pollution
more FREE
standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
degreeGet
2 environm
ent; or
b) the specific installation application of the UPS is known to be a pollution d egree 2
environment; or
c) the UPS enclosure or coatings applied within the UPS accord ing to 4. 4. 7.8.4. 2 or
4. 4. 7.8.6 provide adequ ate protection against what is expected in pollution degree 3 and
4 (conductive pollution and condensation).
a)
The UPS m anufacturer shall state in the documentation the pollution d egree for which the
UPS has been designed.
If operation in a pollution d egree 4 en vironm ent is requ ired, protection against cond uctive
pollution shall be provid ed by means of a suitable enclosure .
NOTE 1
See An nex B for fu rther i nform ation about th e redu ction of pol luti on d egree.
NOTE 2 The dim ensions for creepag e distance can not be speci fied where perm anentl y conducti ve polluti on is
present (polluti on degree 4). For tem poraril y conducti ve pollu tion (pol luti on degree 3), the surface of the insulation
m ay be desig ned to avoi d a contin uous path of cond uctive poll ution, e. g. by m eans of ribs and grooves. An nex D
provi des further inform ation about the evalu ation of clearance and creepag e distances.
Unless otherwise specified by the UPS manufacturer, the UPS shall be suitable for installation
in environm ents in which the pollution degree is 2 (PD2), see Table 8
4.4.7.1 .3
Overvoltage category (OVC)
The concept of overvoltage categories (based on I EC 60364-4-44 and I EC 60664-1 ) is used
for eq uipment energized from the suppl y m ains, and ad dresses the level of overvoltage
protection expected. The OVC for non-mains supply is determined by taking into account
whether control of overvoltages is provided or not, and whether the U PS is connected to
outdoor lines or not, and if so, the length of the lines.
Four categories are considered.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 51 –
Equ ipm ent of overvoltage category I V (OVC I V) is for use at the origin of the installation .
–
NOTE 1 Exam ples of such equipm ent are electricity m eters and prim ary overcu rrent protection eq uipm ent and
other eq uipm ent connected directly to outdoor open lin es.
Equ ipm ent of overvoltage category I I I (OVC I I I ) is equipment in fixed installations and for
cases where the reliability and the availability of the equipm ent are subject to special
requirements.
–
NOTE 2 Exam ples of such eq uipm ent are switches in the fi xed installation and eq uipm ent for i nd ustrial use with
perm anent conn ecti on to the fi xed installation .
Equ ipm ent of overvoltage category I I (OVC I I ) is energ y-consum ing equipment to be
supplied from the fixed installation .
–
NOTE 3 Exam ples of such eq uipm ent are appli ances, portable tools and other household and si m ilar loads.
I f such equ ipment is subj ected to special requirements with regard to reliability and
availability, overvoltage category I I I applies.
– Equ ipm ent of overvoltage category I (OVC I ) is equipm ent for connection to circu its in
which measures are taken to lim it transient overvoltages to an appropriatel y low level.
NOTE 4 Exam ples of such eq uipm ent are those contai ning electron ic circuits protected to this level.
NOTE 5 U nl ess the ci rcuits are desig ned to take the temporary overvoltages i nto account, eq uipm ent of
overvoltage category 1 cannot be di rectl y connected to th e su ppl y m ains.
The measures for reduction of the impu lse voltage shall ensure that the temporary
overvoltages that cou ld occur are sufficiently lim ited so that their peak valu e d oes not
exceed the relevant rated im pulse voltage of Table 9 and shall m eet the requirem ent of
4. 4. 7. 2.2, 4.4.7. 2. 3 and 4.4. 7. 3 as applicable.
Annex I shows exam ples of overvoltage category considerations for insulation requirements.
For UPS and circuits not intended to be powered from the suppl y m ains, the appropriate
overvoltage category shall be determ ined as required by the application based on the
overvoltage control provided on the suppl y to the eq uipment or circuit.
NOTE 6 Prod uct comm ittees using this standard as a reference docum ent shoul d consid er the d eterm inati on of
overvoltage catagories for special applications.
As a m inim um , the UPS shall be suitable for installation in environments presenting
overvoltage categories listed in Table 1 02.
For UPS units designed to be part of a parallel configuration, the current to be considered in
Table 1 02 is that provided by the parallel configuration.
Table 1 02 – Overvoltage categories
Rated UPS outpu t cu rrent I (RMS)
A
I
Overvoltage category
OVC a
II
≤ 16
1 6 < I ≤ 75
II
75 < I ≤ 400
II
400 < I ≤ 500
III
500 <
III
I
N OTE I n general and depending on the m ode of operation , the OVC to which th e critical load is subjected i s
that of the UPS input. Th is can be reduced throu gh overvoltag e reduction techni qu es (see An nex I ).
a
The OVC specified represent those of typical installations i n accordance with 4. 4. 7. 1 . 3. Different OVC can
appl y u nd er speci al con ditions (see An nex I ).
– 52 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
I f m easures are provided to red uce im pu lses of overvoltage category I I I to values of category
I I , or values of category I I to valu es of category I , appropriate insulation may be designed to
the red uced values, provided that following a single failure, e.g. of the red uction m easure, at
least the
requ irements for the original overvoltage category shall be fulfilled .
basi c
i n s u l ati o n
NOTE For g uid ance on overvol tage categ ory red uction, see Annex I
4. 4. 7 . 1 . 4
Su ppl y
s ys te m
e a rt h i n g
The following three basic types of system earthing are described in I EC 60364-1 .
TN system : has one point directl y earthed, the accessible conductive parts of the
being connected to that point by protective conductors. Three types of TN
system , TN-C, TN -S and TN -C-S, are defined according to the arrangement of the neutral
and protective conductors.
TT system : has one point directl y earthed, the accessible conductive parts of the
being connected to earth electrodes electricall y independent of the earth
electrodes of the power system .
I T system : has all
isolated from earth or one point connected to earth through
an impedance, the accessible conductive parts of the
being earthed
independentl y or collectivel y to the system earthing.
–
i n s ta l l a ti o n
–
i n s ta l l a ti o n
–
l i ve
p a rt s
i n s ta l l a ti o n
4. 4. 7 . 1 . 5
D e t e rm i n a t i o n
of i m pu l se
wi th s ta n d
vo l ta g e
an d
t e m p o ra ry
o v e rv o l t a g e
Table 9 uses the
(see 4. 4.7. 1 . 6) and overvoltage category of the circuit under
consid eration to determ ine the im pulse withstand voltage. The
is also used to
determine the
.
s ys te m
vo l ta g e
s ys t e m
t e m p o ra ry
vol tag e
o v e rv o l t a g e
A
having
m ore FREE
than one
input orfrom
ou tput
shall Sharing
be evaluated
ingchats
to the input or
Get more
standards
Standard
Groupaccord
and our
ou tpu t which gives the m ost severe requ irements.
U PS
Tabl e
9 – Impu l se
Col u m n
System
1
wi th s ta n d
2
vo l tag e
t e m p o ra ry
3
o v e rv o l t a g e
4
v e rs u s
s ys te m
5
6
Impu l se
vo l ta g e
wi th s ta n d
V
vo l ta g e
Te m p o ra ry
b
o ve rv o l ta g e
V
4. 4. 7 . 1 . 6 )
Up
vo l ta g e
a
V
(s e e
an d
to
an d
i n cl u d i n g
O ve rvo l t a g e
I
a. c.
III
IV
d . c.
r. m . s .
/ peak
50
75
330
500
800
1 500
1 250 / 1 770
1 00
1 50
500
800
1 500
2 500
1 300 / 1 840
1 50
225
800
1 500
2 500
4 000
1 350 / 1 91 0
300
450
1 500
2 500
4 000
6 000
1 500 / 2 1 20
600
900
2 500
4 000
6 000
8 000
1 800 / 2 550
c
1 500
4 000
6 000
8 000
1 2 000
2 200 / 3 1 1 0
1 000
a
II
c ate g o ry
I nterpolati on of
.
s ys t e m
vo l t a g e
is n ot perm itted wh en determ inin g th e im pulse withstand vol tage for
m ai n s
su ppl y
b
The r. m . s. values are d erived u sing the form ula (1 200 V +
c
The last row onl y appli es to single-ph ase systems , or to the ph ase-to-phase voltag e in three-phase
systems .
s ys t e m
vo l ta g e
) from I EC 60664-1 .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4.4.7.1 .6
4.4.7.1 .6.1
– 53 –
Determination of the system voltage
For mains supply
For UPS su pplied by an a. c. mains supply , the system voltage (in column 1 of Table 9) is:
–
in TN and TT systems , the r.m. s. value of the rated voltage between a phase and earth;
NOTE 1 A corn er-earth ed system is a TN system wi th one phase earthed, in which the system vol tage is th e
r. m . s. value of the rated voltage between a n on -earthed phase and earth (i. e. th e phase-ph ase voltag e).
–
in three-phase I T systems for d etermination of impulse voltage:
•
the r.m. s. valu e of the rated voltage between a phase and an artificial neu tral point
(an imaginary junction of equ al impedances from each phase);
NOTE 2 For m ost systems , this is equivalent to di vid ing th e phase-to-ph ase voltage by √ 3.
NOTE 3 The ph ase to an arti ficial n eutral poi nt can be accepted d ue to the well bal ance systems . Und er singl e
fault condition the system voltage will tem porary chang e to phase to phase voltage, but und er this single fault
condition the im pulse voltag e is allowed to be reduced by on e step accordi ng to Tabl e 9 an d will lead to the sam e
result for the d eterm ination of clearance.
the r.m .s. value of the rated voltage between phases for UPS with increased
reliability;
•
for determ ination of temporary overvoltage , the r. m. s. value of the rated voltage
between phases;
in single-phase I T systems , the r.m .s. value of the rated voltage between suppl y
cond uctors.
•
–
NOTE 4 For UPS havin g series-con nected di ode brid ges (1 2-pulse, 1 8-pulse, etc. ), the system vol tage is th e
sum of the a. c. voltages at th e diod e brid ges.
When the su ppl y voltage is rectified d .c. derived from the a. c. m ains, the system voltage is
the r. m. s. value of the source a.c. before rectification, taking into accou nt the su ppl y system
earthing.
NOTE 5 Voltag es gen erated within th e UPS by the second ari es of transform ers providi ng galvanic isolati on from
the mains suppl y are also con sidered to be system voltages for the d eterm ination of im pulse voltag es .
See 6. 3. 7. 3 for marking req uirem ents.
4.4.7.1 .6.2
For non-mains supply
For UPS supplied by non-m ains a.c. or d.c., the system voltage is the r.m .s. value of the
suppl y voltage between phases.
4.4.7.1 .7
Components bridging insulation
Components bridging insulation shall com pl y with the requirements of the level of insulation
(e. g. basic, reinforced, double ) they are bridging.
A capacitor connected between two line conductors in a prim ary circuit, or between one line
conductor and the neutral conductor or between the prim ary circuit and protective earth shall
com pl y with one of the subclasses of I EC 60384-1 4 or with the req uirement of 4. 4. 7. 1 . 7 and
shall be used in accordance with its rating for voltage and current .
For equipm ent to be connected to I T power d istribu tion systems components connected
between line and earth shall be rated for the line-to-line voltage. H owever, capacitors rated
for the applicable line-to-neu tral voltage are perm itted in such applications if they comply with
subclass Y1 , Y2 or Y4 of I EC 60384-1 4.
– 54 –
4. 4. 7. 2
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Insulation to th e su rrou n d i n g s
4. 4. 7. 2 . 1
Gen eral
Insulation for basi c , su ppl em en tary, and rei n forced i n su l ati on between a circuit and its
surroundings shall be designed accord ing to:
–
–
–
the impulse withstand voltage; or
the tem porary overvol tag e ; or
the worki n g vol tag e of the circuit.
For creepage d istances, the r. m.s. value of the worki n g vol tag e is used, as described in
4. 4. 7.5.
For clearance distances and solid insulation , the im pulse withstand voltage, the tem porary
or the recurring peak value of the worki n g vol tag e is used, as described in
4. 4. 7.2. 2 to 4.4. 7. 2. 4.
overvol tag e
NOTE 1 Exam ples of worki n g vol tag e with th e com bination of a. c. , d. c. an d recurrin g peaks are on th e d. c. link
of an i ndi rect voltage source converter, or th e d am ped oscill ation of a th yristor sn ubber, or internal voltag es of a
switch -m ode power suppl y. For m ore inform ation see A. 6.
NOTE 2 The im pulse withstan d voltag e and tem porary overvol tag e depend on the s ys tem vol tag e of the circuit,
and th e im pulse withstand voltage also depends on the overvoltag e categ ory, as shown in Table 9.
For U PS with galvanic isolation between the mains and non-mains circuits, the impulse
voltage withstand ratings of the mains and non-mains circuits are d etermined as in 4. 4. 7.2. 2
and 4. 4. 7. 2. 3. Thereafter the effect of red uction of the overvoltage categories (OVC) across
the isolation is evalu ated as follows:
–
–
–
–
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
The magnitu de of im pulses from the m ai n s su ppl y circu it on the n on -m ai n s su ppl y
circuit is determ ined by reducing the OVC of the n on -m ai n s su ppl y supplies by one level,
and d etermining the resulting im pulse voltage withstand rati n g based on m ai n s su ppl y
system vol tag e .
The rati n g to be used on the non-mains circuit is the higher of the value in 4. 4. 7. 2. 3 and
the value determined above.
The magnitud e of impu lses from the non-mains circuit on the m ains circuit is d etermined
by reducing the OVC of the non-mains circuit by one level, and determ ining the resu lting
impu lse voltage withstand rati n g based on n on -m ai n s su ppl y system vol tag e .
The rati n g to be used on the mains circu it is the higher of the value in 4. 4. 7. 2. 2 and the
value determ ined above.
For U PS not providing galvanic isolation between the mains and non-mains circu its, the
im pulse withstand voltage ratings of the mains and non-mains circuits are determ ined as in
4. 4. 7.2.2 and 4. 4. 7. 2. 3 above. The higher of the two im pulse withstand voltage ratings is used
for the entire combined circuit. For circuits connected to the combined circuit without galvanic
isolation, the impulse withstand voltage rati n g of the com bined circuit applies.
NOTE 3 See I . 5 for exam ples.
When circuits of DVC A or B are supplied from the mains through a transformer providing
galvanic isolation working at a freq uency higher than that of the suppl y, the insulation
between the circuit and the surroundings m ay be determined according to the worki n g
vol tag e of the circuit.
I n that case the transform ers ability to red uce the im pulse voltages to values less than the
im pulse voltage associated with the worki n g vol tag e determined from Table 1 0 shall be
shown by test, sim ulation or calculation.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 55 –
NOTE 4 The abili ty of a hig h frequ ency transform er to reduce im pulse voltages orig in ates from the very l ow
coupli ng capacitance across the g alvanic insulation com pared to a the typical groun din g capacitance i n th e DVC A
or B circuit.
4.4.7.2.2
Circuits connected to mains supply
Insulation between the surrou ndings and circuits which are connected directl y to the mains
supply shall be designed according to the impulse withstand voltage, temporary
overvoltage , or working voltage , whichever gives the m ost severe requirem ent.
This insulation is normally evalu ated to withstand impulses of overvoltage category I I I , except
that overvoltage category I V shall be used when the UPS is connected at the origin of the
installation . Overvoltage category I I m ay be u sed for plug-in equipm ent without special
requ irements with regard to reliability.
I f m easures are provided which reduce impu lses of overvoltage category I V to values of
category I I I , or valu es of category I I I to values of category I I , basic or supplementary
insulation may be designed for the reduced valu es. The requ irements for double or
reinforced insulation shall not be red uced to values less than those required for basic
insulation designed to withstand impulses without these m easures being present.
I f the d evices used for this purpose can be dam aged by overvoltages or repeated impulses,
thus decreasing their ability to red uce impulses, they shall be m onitored and an indication of
their status provided.
NOTE 1 The determ ined im pulse withstan d vol tag e based on the system vol tage m ay be red uced by m eans of
inherent protection or SPD i ntern al i n th e UPS or as part of the i nstallati on. I EC 61 643-1 2 provi des i nform ation on
the selection an d use of such SPD.
NOTE 2 Circu its whi ch are conn ected to the supply m ains via protective impedances , accordin g to 4. 4. 5. 4, are
not regard ed as con nected directly to the suppl y m ains.
A preventive maintenance plan is an alternative to m onitoring, as long as the continuity of the
overvoltage red uction remains the sam e.
4.4.7.2.3
Circuits connected to non-mains supply
I nsulation between the surroundings and circuits supplied from a non-mains supply shall be
designed according to:
–
–
–
the im pulse withstand voltage determ ined from Table 9 using the system voltage ;
the working voltage ;
the temporary overvoltage if known to exist du e to the nature of the su pply;
whichever gives the m ore severe req uirem ent.
These valu es are used to enter Table 1 0 for the d esign of clearance.
Temporary overvoltage on a non-mains supply shall be determ ined as follows:
–
–
Withou t detailed knowledge of the temporary overvoltage , it shall be according to
Table 9.
I f the temporary overvoltage is known this value shall be used .
By the determ ination of temporary overvoltages on non-mains supply , following situations
should be considered:
– loss of the neutral in a non-mains low-voltage system ;
– accidential earthing of a non-m ains low voltage I T system; and
– short circuit in the non-m ains low voltage installation.
– 56 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
For further information, see I EC 60364-4-44-2007, Clause 442.
The overvoltage category for n on -m ai n s su ppl y shall be overvoltage category I I . A higher
overvoltage category shall be assigned when control of over-voltage is not provided, and
when connected to long ou tdoor lines. For applications and circuits with a known low level of
impu lse voltages and for which it can be shown that the impulse voltages remain on a low level even
under single fault condition , overvoltage category I may be used. This requirement is considered to
be met if the expected impulse voltages do not exceed the values given in Table 9 for overvoltage
category I at the appropriate system voltage .
NOTE 1
The overvoltage category for non-mains supplies does not differ between eq uipm ent perm an en tl y
i n fi xed i n s tal l ati o n s and eq uipm ent not perm an en tl y con n ected to the fi xed i n stal l ati on .
con n ected
Product committees using this stand ard as a reference docum ent shall determine the
appropriate overvoltage category from Table 9, based on the system vol tag e and the
maximum im pulse voltage likel y to occur in their application. Special consideration m ay be
applicable for product specific applications, which have not been considered in this standard.
Com munication lines shall be considered as non-mains supplies .
I f m easures are provid ed which reduce im pulses of overvoltage category I I I to values of
category I I , or values of category I I to values of category I , basi c or su ppl em en tary
i n su l ati on m ay be designed for the reduced value. The requirements for double or
rei n forced i n su l ati on shall not be reduced to values less than those req uired for basi c
i n su l ati on designed to withstand impu lses without these m easures being present.
I f the d evices used for this purpose can be damaged by overvoltages or repeated impulses,
thus decreasing their ability to reduce impu lses, they shall be m onitored and an indication of
their status Get
provided
more. FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
NOTE 2 The d eterm ined im pulse withstand voltage based on the s ys tem vol tag e can be red uced by m eans of
inherent protection or SPD internal in the U PS or as part of th e i n stal l ati on . I EC 61 643-1 2 provid es inform ation on
the selection an d use of such SPD .
4. 4. 7. 2. 4
Insulation between ci rcu i ts
Insulation between two circuits shall be designed accord ing to the circuit having the more
severe requ irem ent.
For the d esign of simple and protecti ve separati on between circuits the insulation shall be
designed according to:
–
–
the circu it having the m ore severe requ irement; or
the worki n g vol tag e between the circuits;
whichever gives the m ost severe requirement.
4. 4. 7. 3
Fu n cti on al i n su l ati on
I f the failure of fu n cti on al i n su l ati on d oes not produce a hazard (electrical, therm al, fire), no
specific requirem ents appl y for the d im ensioning of fu n cti on al i n su l ati on . I n other cases the
following requ irements appl y.
Testing is not required, except where the circu it anal ysis requ ired by 4. 2 shows that failure of
the insulation could resu lt in a hazard.
For parts or circuits that are significantl y affected by external transients, fu n cti on al
shall be d esigned according to the impu lse withstand voltage of overvoltage
category I I , except that overvoltage category I I I shall be used when the U PS is connected at
the origin of the i n stal l ati on .
i n su l ati on
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 57 –
Where m easures are provided that reduce transient overvoltages within the circuit from
category I I I to values of category I I , or values of category I I to valu es of category I , functional
insulation may be d esigned for the reduced valu es.
Where the circuit characteristics can be shown by testing (see 5. 2. 3.2) to reduce impu lse
voltages, functional insulation m ay be designed for the highest im pulse voltage occurring in
the circuit d uring the tests.
For parts or circuits that are not significantl y affected by external transients, functional
insulation .
insulation shall be designed accord ing to the working voltage across the
4.4.7.4
4.4.7.4.1
Clearance distances
Determination
Clearances for functional , basic and supplementary insulation shall be dim ensioned
according to Table 1 0 (see Annex D for examples of the evaluation of clearance d istances).
Interpolation is perm itted, when clearance is determ ined from temporary overvoltage or
working voltage .
Clearances for reinforced insulation shall be d im ensioned to withstand an im pulse voltage
one step higher than the impulse withstand voltage, or 1 , 6 times the peak temporary
overvoltage or peak working voltage , required for basic insulation .
Clearance distances for use in altitudes between 2 000 m and 20 000 m shall be calculated
using a correction factor according to Table A. 2 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007, which is reprod uced as
Table E. 1 .
A correction factor selected from Table F. 2 is also used for determ ination of clearance
distances for approxim atel y hom ogenous fields when frequ encies are greater than 30 kH z, as
given in Annex F.
– 58 –
Tabl e
1 0 – C l e a ra n c e
d i s ta n c e s
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
fo r fu n c t i o n a l ,
d
I m pu l se
W o rk i n g
Te m p o ra r y
d
wi th s ta n d
d
vo l ta g e
Ta b l e
f
a
p eak)
V
9)
V
fo r
Minimum
d e t e rm i n i n g
insulation
2
c l e a ra n c e
000
m
d i stan ce s
a b o ve
b e twe e n
s u rro u n d i n g s
i n su l ati on
vo l ta g e
( re c u rri n g
o n l y re l e v a n t
o r s u p p l e m e n t a ry
f
o ve rvo l ta g e
( p e a k)
( fro m
basi c
s ea
in
ai r u p
to
l e ve l
mm
an d
c i rc u i t s
( fro m
Ta b l e
9)
V
P o l l u ti o n
1
a
b
c
d e g re e
2
3
4
330
330
260
0, 01
500
500
400
0, 04
800
71 0
560
0, 1 0
1 500
1 270
1 01 0
0, 5
0, 5
2 500
2 220
1 770
1 ,5
1 ,5
1 ,5
4 000
3 430
2 740
3, 0
3, 0
3, 0
3, 0
6 000
4 890
3 91 0
5, 5
5, 5
5, 5
5, 5
8 000
6 060
4 840
8, 0
8, 0
8, 0
8, 0
1 2 000
9 430
7 540
14
14
14
14
0, 2
bc
0, 8
c
1 ,6
c
This voltageGet
is approxim
atel y 0, 8standards
tim es the voltag
e requ
ired to break
down Group
the associated
clearance.
more FREE
from
Standard
Sharing
and our
chats
For printed wiring board (PWB), the val ues for polluti on degree 1 appl y except that the value shall not be less
than 0, 04 m m.
The m i nim um clearance distances gi ven for polluti on deg rees 2, 3 and 4 are based on the red uced withstan d
characteristics of the associated creepage distance un der h u m idity conditions (see I EC 60664-5).
d
I nterpolati on is perm itted for
e
Clearances for
I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
f
I nterpolati on is perm itted, wh en clearance is d eterm ined from
t e m p o ra r y
n o n -m a i n s
o v e rv o l t a g e
su ppl y
and
.
w o rk i n g
vo l ta g e
are d erived from Table F. 7a of
t e m p o ra r y
o v e rv o l t a g e
an d
w o rk i n g
vo l ta g e
.
N OTE I f clearances are stressed with stead y-state voltages of 2, 5 kV (peak) an d above, dim ensionin g accord ing
to the breakdown valu es in Table 1 0 m ay not provi de operati on without corona (partial discharges), especial ly for
inhom ogeneous fields. I n order to provi de coron a-free operation, it is possible eith er to use larger clearances, as
given in Tabl e F. 7b of I EC 60664-1 : 2007, or to im prove the fi eld distributi on.
Compliance shall be checked by visual inspection (see 5.2.2.1) or by performing the impulse
voltage test of 5.2.3.2 and the a.c. or d.c. voltage test of 5.2.3. 4.
4. 4. 7 . 4. 2
E l e c t ri c
fi e l d
h om og en ei ty
The dim ensions in Table 1 0 correspond to the req uirem ents of an inhom ogeneous electric
field distribution across the clearance, which are the conditions norm all y experienced in
practice. I f a homogeneous electric field distribution is known to exist, the clearance distance
for
or
may be reduced to not less than that requ ired by
Table F. 2 (Case B) of I EC 60664-1 : 2007. I n this case, however, the impulse voltage test of
5. 2. 3. 2 shall be performed across the considered clearance.
basi c
s u p p l e m e n t a ry
i n s u l ati on
I f the withstand against stead y state voltages, recurring peak or
accord ing to Table 1 0 is d ecisive for the dimensioning of clearance and i f these clearances
are sm aller than the valu es of Table 1 0 then an a. c. or d.c. voltage test accord ing to 5.2. 3. 4 is
t e m p o ra ry
o v e rv o l t a g e s
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
required . Clearance distances for
homogeneous fields.
4. 4. 7 . 4. 3
C l e a ra n c e
to c o n d u cti ve
– 59 –
re i n fo rc e d
i n s u l ati o n
shall not be reduced for
e n c l o s u re s
The clearance between an y non-insu lated
and the walls of a m etal
be in accordance with 4. 4. 7. 4.1 d uring and following the d eflection tests of 5. 2. 2.4. 2.
l i ve
p a rt
e n c l o s u re
shall
Compliance is checked by inspection and by test of 5. 2. 2.4.2.
I f the d esign clearance distance is at least 1 2, 7 mm and the clearance distance req uired by
4. 4. 7.4.1 does not exceed 8 m m, the d eflection tests may be omitted.
4. 4. 7 . 5
C re e p a g e
4. 4. 7 . 5 . 1
d i stan ces
I n s u l ati n g
m a t e ri a l
g ro u p s
Insu lating materials are classified into four grou ps corresponding to their com parative tracking
index (CTI ) when tested according to 6.2 of I EC 601 1 2: 2003:
–
–
–
–
I nsu lating
I nsu lating
I nsu lating
I nsu lating
material
material
material
material
grou p
grou p
group
group
I:
II:
I I I a:
I I I b:
CTI ≥ 600;
600 > CTI ≥ 400;
400 > CTI ≥ 1 75;
1 75 > CTI ≥ 1 00.
Creepage d istance requ irements for PWBs exposed to pollution degree 3 environm ental
conditions shall be d etermined based on Table 1 1 pollution d egree 3 u nder “Other insulators”.
I f the creepage distance is ribbed , then the creepage distance of insu lating m aterial of group I
m ay be applied using insulating material of grou p I I and the creepage d istance of insulating
m aterial of group I I m ay be applied using insulating m aterial of group I I I . The spacing of the
ribs shall equal or exceed the dim ension ‘ X’ in Table D. 1 . For pollution degree 2 and 3, the
ribs shall be at least 2 mm high.
For inorganic insulating m aterials, for exam ple glass or ceramic, which do not track, the
creepage distance m ay equal the associated clearance distance, as determ ined from
Table 1 0.
4. 4. 7 . 5 . 2
D e t e rm i n a t i o n
Creepage d istances for functional ,
and
shall be
d im ensioned according to Table 1 1 . I nterpolation is permitted. Creepage distances for
shall be twice the distances required for
.
basi c
re i n fo rc e d
i n su l ati on
s u p p l e m e n t a ry
basi c
i n su l ati on
i n s u l ati o n
– 60 –
Tabl e
Col u m n
1
2
3
1 1
– C re e p a g e
4
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
d i s ta n c e s
5
6
(in
m i l l i m e t re s )
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2
a
O t h e r i n s u l a t o rs
PWBs
W o rk i n g
vo l ta g e
( r. m . s . )
P o l l u ti o n
1
d e g re e
2
P o l l u ti o n
1
d e g re e
2
3
Al l
I n s u l a ti n g
Al l
Al l
V
m a t e ri a l
g ro u p
I n s u l a ti n g
m a t e ri a l
g ro u p
m a t e ri a l
g ro u p s
I
g ro u p s
II
IIIa
IIIb
I
II
IIIa
IIIb
g ro u p s
excep t
IIIb
< 2
0, 025
0, 04
0, 056
0, 35
0, 35
0, 35
0, 87
0, 87
0, 87
5
0, 025
0, 04
0, 065
0, 37
0, 37
0, 37
0, 92
0, 92
0, 92
10
0, 025
0, 04
0, 08
0, 40
0, 40
0, 40
1 ,0
1 ,0
1 ,0
25
0, 025
0, 04
0, 1 25
0, 50
0, 50
0, 50
1 , 25
1 , 25
1 , 25
32
0, 025
0, 04
0, 1 4
0, 53
0, 53
0, 53
1 ,3
1 ,3
1 ,3
40
0, 025
0, 04
0, 1 6
0, 56
0, 80
1 ,1
1 ,4
1 ,6
1 ,8
50
0, 025
0, 04
0, 1 8
0, 60
0, 85
1 , 20
1 ,5
1 ,7
1 ,9
63
0, 04
0, 063
0, 20
0, 63
0, 90
1 , 25
1 ,6
1 ,8
2, 0
80
0, 063
0, 1 0
0, 22
0, 67
0, 95
1 ,3
1 ,7
1 ,9
2, 1
1 00
0, 1 0
0, 1 6
0, 25
0, 71
1 ,0
1 ,4
1 ,8
2, 0
2, 2
1 25
0, 1 6
0, 25
0, 28
0, 75
1 , 05
1 ,5
1 ,9
2, 1
2, 4
1 60
0, 25
0, 40
0, 32
0, 80
1 ,1
1 ,6
2, 0
2, 2
2, 5
200
0, 40
0, 63
0, 42
1 ,0
1 ,4
2, 0
2, 5
2, 8
3, 2
250
0, 56
1 ,0
0, 56
1 , 25
1 ,8
2, 5
3, 2
3, 6
4, 0
320
0, 75
1 ,6
0, 75
1 ,6
2, 2
3, 2
4, 0
4, 5
5, 0
400
1 ,0
2, 0
1 ,0
2, 0
2, 8
4, 0
5, 0
5, 6
6, 3
500
1 ,3
2, 5
1 ,3
2, 5
3, 6
5, 0
6, 3
7, 1
8, 0
630
1 ,8
3, 2
1 ,8
3, 2
4, 5
6, 3
8, 0
9, 0
1 0, 0
800
2, 4
4, 0
2, 4
4, 0
5, 6
8, 0
1 0, 0
11
1 2, 5
1 000
3, 2
5, 0
3, 2
5, 0
7, 1
1 0, 0
1 2, 5
14
16
1 250
4, 2
6, 3
4, 2
6, 3
9
1 2, 5
16
18
20
1 600
c
c
5, 6
8, 0
11
16
20
22
25
2 000
7, 5
1 0, 0
14
20
25
28
32
2 500
1 0, 0
1 2, 5
18
25
32
36
40
3 200
1 2, 5
16
22
32
40
45
50
4 000
16
20
28
40
50
56
63
5 000
20
25
36
50
63
71
80
6 300
25
32
45
63
80
90
1 00
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
8 000
32
40
56
81
1 00
110
1 25
1 0 000 d
40
50
71
1 00
1 25
1 40
1 60
I nterpolati on is perm itted.
These colum ns also appl y to
com ponents an d parts on PWBs, and
to other creepage distances wi th a
com parabl e control of tol erances.
a
m a t e ri a l
m a t e ri a l
b
c
d
I nsulatin g m aterials of g roup I I I b are not n orm all y recomm ended for
poll ution degree 3 above 630 V.
Above 1 250 V use th e valu es from colum ns 4 to 1 1 , as appropri ate.
For hi gh er voltages, creepage distances shou ld be dim ension ed
accordi ng to Tabl e F. 4 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007
b
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 61 –
When the creepage d istance requ irement determined from Table 1 1 is less than the clearance
distance req uired by 4. 4.7. 4. 1 or the clearance distance determ ined by impulse testing (see
5. 2. 3.2), then the creepage distance shall be increased to the clearance d istance.
Compliance of creepage distances shall be checked by measurement or inspection (see
5. 2. 2.1) (see Annex D for examples of the evaluation of creepage distances) .
4.4.7.6 Coating
A coating m ay be used to provide insulation , to protect a surface against pollu tion, and to
allow a reduction in creepage and clearance distances (see 4. 4. 7. 8. 4.2 and 4. 4. 7.8. 6).
4.4.7.7 PWB spacings for functional insulation
Spacings for functional insulation shall compl y with the req uirement of 4.4.7.4 and 4. 4.7. 5.
Decreased spacings on PWB are permitted when all the following are satisfied:
–
–
–
the PWB has flamm ability rating of V-0 (see I EC 60695-1 1 -1 0);
the PWB base m aterial has a m inim um CTI of 1 00;
the equipm ent complies with the PWB short circuit test (see 5. 2. 4. 7).
Decreased spacing for com ponents m ounted on PWB or d ecreased spacing on PWB are
permitted when all the following are satisfied:
–
–
–
pollution degree 1 or 2 environm ent ; and
not m ore than overvoltage category I .
I n this case the m anufacture specification may be used.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by test of 5. 2. 4. 7 if applicable.
4.4.7.8 Solid insulation
4.4.7.8.1
General
Materials selected for solid insulation shall be able to withstand the stresses occurring. These
include m echanical, electrical, therm al, climatic and chemical stresses which are to be
expected in norm al use. Insulation m aterials shall also be resistant to ageing during the
expected lifetime of the UPS .
Tests shall be performed on components and sub-assemblies using solid insulation , in ord er
to ensure that the insulation perform ance has not been com promised by the d esign or
manufacturing process.
4.4.7.8.2
Material requirements
The insu lating material shall have a CTI of 1 00 or greater.
The insulating material shall be su itable for the maximum temperature it attains as d etermined
by the temperature rise test of 5. 2. 3. 1 0. Consideration shall be given as to whether or not the
insulating material additionall y provides m echanical strength and whether or not the part can
be subj ect to impact d uring use.
The insu lating material in contact with live parts higher than DVC As shall compl y with:
–
the glow-wire test described in 5.2. 5. 3 at a test temperature of 850 °C; or
– 62 –
–
–
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
the glow-wire test described in 5. 2.5.3, at a lower test temperature, but not less than 550
°C, depend ing on the classification of the use of the UPS , according to Table A. 1 of
I EC 60695-2-1 1 : 201 1 ; or
the alternative hot wire ignition test of 5.2. 5. 4.
Thermoplastic insulating m aterials used in contact with live parts higher than DVC As or used
as part of the en closure shall compl y with the ball pressure test as abnorm al heat test
according to I EC 60695-1 0-2.
Where an insulating m aterial is used in a U PS that incorporates switching contacts, and is
within 1 2, 7 mm of the contacts, it shall comply with the high current arcing ignition test of
5. 2. 5. 2.
I n case the m anufacturer of the insulating m aterial provides data to demonstrate compliance
with the above req uirements no further testing is req uired.
No further evalu ation is req uired when generic materials are used according to Table 1 2.
Table 1 2 – Generic materials for th e direct support of un insulated live parts
Generi c material
M i nimum thickness
mm
M aximum temperature
°C
An y cold -moulded composi ti on
N o lim i t
N o lim i t
Cerami c, porcel ai n
N o lim i t
N o lim i t
Di al l yl phth al ate
0, 7
1 05
Epoxy
0, 7
1 05
Get more FREE standards from Standard0,Sharing
Group and our chats
7
1 30
M el ami ne
M el ami ne-phenol ic
0, 7
1 30
Phenoli c
0, 7
1 50
Unfil led n ylon
0, 7
1 05
Unfil led pol ycarbonate
0, 7
1 05
Urea formal d eh yd e
0, 7
1 00
Compliance is checked by inspection and by test of 5. 2. 3. 10 and 5.2. 5. 3 or 5.2. 5. 2.
4.4.7.8.3
4.4.7.8.3.1
Thin sheet or tape material
Gen eral
4. 4. 7. 8.3 applies to the use of thin sheet or tape materials in assemblies such as wou nd
com ponents and bus-bars.
Insulation consisting of thin (less than 0, 75 m m) sheet or tape materials is perm itted, provided
that it is protected from dam age and is not subject to m echanical stress u nder normal use.
Where more than one layer of insulation is used, there is no requirement for all layers to be of
the same material.
NOTE 1
One l ayer of insulation tape woun d with m ore than 50 % overl ap is consi d ered to constitute two l ayers.
NOTE 2 Basic , supplementary and doubl e i n sul ati on can be appl ied as a pre-assem bled system of thi n
m aterials.
4.4.7.8.3.2
M aterial th ickness equal to or more than 0,2 mm
– Basic or supplementary in sulation shall consist of at least one layer of m aterial, which
will m eet the requ irements of 4. 4. 7. 8. 1 and 4.4. 7. 1 0. 1 .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
–
–
– 63 –
Double insulation shall consist of at least two layers of material, each of which will meet
the requ irements of 4. 4. 7. 8.1 , 4. 4. 7. 1 0. 1 , and the partial d ischarge requ irements of
4. 4. 7.1 0. 2, and both layers together will meet the im pulse and a.c. or d.c. voltage
req uirem ents of 4. 4. 7. 1 0. 2.
Reinforced insulation shall consist of a single layer of material, which will meet the
req uirem ents of 4.4. 7. 8. 1 and 4. 4. 7.1 0. 2.
NOTE The req ui rem ents of this subclause ind icate th at double insulation can be at l east 0, 4 mm thick, wh ile
reinforced insulation is perm itted to be 0, 2 mm thick.
4.4.7.8.3.3
Material thickness less than 0,2 mm
Basic or supplementary insulation shall consist of at least two layers of material, which will
meet the requirements of 4.4. 7. 8. 1 and 4. 4. 7. 1 0. 1 .
Double insulation shall consist of at least three layers of material. Each layer shall meet the
requirements of 4. 4.7. 8. 1 and 4. 4. 7. 1 0. 1 , and an y two layers together shall m eet the
requirements of 4.4. 7. 1 0. 2.
Reinforced insulation consisting of a single layer of m aterial is not permitted.
4.4.7.8.3.4
Compliance
Compliance shall be checked by the tests described in 5.2. 3. 1 to 5.2.3.5.
When a component or sub-assem bl y makes use of thin sheet insulating m aterials, it is
permitted to perform the tests on the component rather than on the material.
4.4.7.8.4
4.4.7.8.4.1
Printed wiring boards (PWBs)
General
Insulation between conductor layers in double-sid ed single-layer PWBs, multi-layer PWBs and
metal core PWBs, shall m eet the req uirem ents of 4. 4. 7. 8.1 . Basic , supplementary , double and
reinforced insulation shall meet the appropriate requ irements of 4. 4. 7. 1 0. 1 or 4. 4.7. 1 0.2.
Functional insulation in PWBs shall m eet the req uirements of 4. 4. 7.7.
For the inner layers of mu lti-layer PWBs, the insulation between adjacent tracks on the sam e
layer shall be treated as either:
–
–
a creepage d istance for pollution degree 1 and a clearance as in air (see Exam ple D. 1 4);
or
solid insulation , in which case it shall meet the requirem ents of 4. 4. 7.8. 1 and 4. 4.7.1 0.
4.4.7.8.4.2
Use of coating materials
A coating material used to provide functional , basic , supplementary and reinforced
insulation shall m eet the requirement as specified below.
Type 1 protection (as d efined in I EC 60664-3) im proves the m icroenvironm ent of the parts
under protection. The clearance and creepage distance of Table 1 0 and Table 1 1 for pollution
degree 1 appl y und er the protection. Between two conductive parts, it is a req uirem ent that
one or both conductive parts, together with all the spacing between them, are covered by the
protection.
Type 2 protection is considered to be sim ilar to solid insulation . U nder the protection, the
req uirem ents for solid insulation specified in 4. 4. 7. 8 are applicable, includ ing the coating
m aterial itself, and spacings shall not be less than those specified in Table 1 of I EC 606643: 2003. The requ irem ents for clearance and creepage in Table 1 0 and Table 1 1 do not appl y.
Between two conductive parts, it is a requirement that both conductive parts, together with the
– 64 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
spacing between them, are covered by the protection so that no airgap exists between the
protective material, the cond uctive parts and the printed boards.
The coating m aterial used to provide Type 1 and Type 2 protection shall be designed to
withstand the stresses anticipated to occur during the expected lifetime of the UPS . A type
test on representative PWBs shall be conducted according to Clause 5 of I EC 60664-3: 2003.
For the cold test (5. 7. 1 of I EC 60664-3: 2003), a tem perature of -25 °C shall be used, and for
the rapid change of temperature test (5. 7.3 of I EC 60664-3: 2003): -25 °C to +1 25 °C. N o
routine test is requ ired.
4.4.7.8.5
Wound components
Varnish or enam el insulation of wires shall not be used for basic , supplementary , double or
reinforced insulation .
Wound components shall meet the requirements of 4. 4. 7. 8.1 and 4. 4.7. 1 0.
The com ponent itself shall pass the requ irem ents given in 4. 4. 7. 8. 1 and 4. 4.7. 1 0.2. I f the
com ponent has reinforced or double insulation , the a.c. or d.c. voltage test of 5. 2. 3.4 shall
be perform ed as a routine test .
4.4.7.8.6
Potting materials
A potting m aterial may be used to provide solid insulation or to act as a coating to protect
against pollution. I f used as solid insulation for basic, fault and enhanced protection , it shall
compl y with the requirem ents of 4. 4. 7.8. 1 and 4. 4. 7.1 0. I f used to protect against pollution,
the requirements for type 1 protection in 4. 4. 7. 8. 4. 2 appl y.
4.4.7.9
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Connection of parts of solid insulation (cemented joints)
The creepage and clearance path in the presence of a cemented j oint between two insulating
parts, are determined as follows.
–
–
Type 1 or type 2 protection as described in 4. 4. 7. 8. 4. 2 appl y.
A cem ented joint that is not evaluated as provid ing protection of type 1 or type 2, is
neither considered solid insulation nor to reduce pollution degree. The clearance and
creepage d istances of Table 1 0 and Table 1 1 appl y for the pollution d egree of the
environment arou nd the j oint. See 5.2. 5. 7 for test.
As an example, see Example D. 9.
4.4.7.1 0
4.4.7.1 0.1
Requirements for electrical withstand capability
Basic or supplementary insulation
Basic or supplementary insulation shall be tested as follows:
–
–
Test with impulse withstand voltage according to 5. 2.3. 2; and
Test with a.c. or d.c. voltage according to 5. 2. 3.4.
4.4.7.1 0.2
Double or reinforced insulation
Double or reinforced insulation shall be tested as follows:
–
–
Test with impulse withstand voltage according to 5. 2.3. 2; and
Test with a.c. or d.c. voltage according to 5. 2. 3.4.
For solid insulation , the partial discharge test according to 5. 2.3. 5 shall be performed in
ad dition to the above tests, if the recurring peak working voltage across the insulation is
greater than 750 V and the voltage stress on the insulation is greater than 1 kV/mm .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 65 –
NOTE The voltag e stress is the recurri ng peak voltag e d ivided by th e distance between two parts of different
potential.
The partial discharge test shall be perform ed as a
on all components, subassemblies and PWB. I n ad dition, a
shall be performed if the insulation consists
of a single layer of m aterial.
t yp e
s am p l e
te s t
te st
shall be designed so that failure of the
or of the
will not result in reduction of the insulation capability of the
rem aining part of the insulation .
Dou bl e
i n s u l a ti o n
s u p p l e m e n t a ry
4. 4. 7 . 1 1
basi c
i n su l ati on
i n su l ati on
I n s u l ati o n
re q u i re m e n t s
ab o ve
30
kH z
Where voltages across insulation have fund amental frequencies greater than 30 kH z, further
considerations appl y.
Annex F contains requ irements for the d etermination of clearance and creepage d istances
under these circumstances.
Compliance of creepage and clearance distances shall be checked by measurement or
inspection according to Annex F.
4. 4. 8
C om p ati bi l i ty
wi th
re s i d u a l
c u rre n t - o p e ra t e d
Some d omestic and industrial
insulation faults, in ad dition to the basic and
i n s t al l ati o n s
p ro t e c t i v e
d evi ce s
(RC D )
provide RCD as ad ditional protection against
provided by
.
fa u l t p ro t e c t i o n
U PS
An insulation fault or direct contact with certain types of
circu its can cause failure current
with a d. c. com ponent to flow in the
and thus reduce the ability of an RCD of
type A or AC (see I EC 60755) to provide this protection for other equipm ent in the
.
U PS
PE
con d u ctor
i n s t a l l ati o n
To ensure the intended work of an RCD provid ed by th e
the following conditions.
i n stal l ati on
U PS
shall satisfy one of
a) A
single-phase
, shall be designed so that, under norm al and fault
conditions an y resulting d.c. component of the current in the
does not
exceed the d.c. current withstand req uirem ents in I EC 60755 for RCD of type A.
P l u g g ab l e
T yp e
A
U PS
PE
co n d u cto r
NOTE At the tim e of writi ng, th e requi rem ent in I EC 60755 is for type A RCD to be able to tol erate 6 m A of d. c.
current while still m aintai ning thei r protective functionality.
b) For
that are
or intend ed for permanent connection , d.c. current in
the
is not lim ited if the inform ation and marking requirem ents of 6. 3. 7. 4 are
com plied with.
U PS
PE
Pl u g g abl e
T yp e
B
co n d u cto r
For the d esign and construction of electrical
, care should be taken with RCD of
Type B. All the RCD u pstream from an RCD of Type B u p to the suppl y transform er shall be of
Type B.
i n s ta l l ati o n s
Compliance with RCD provided by the installation shall be checked by simulation or
calculation of current in the PE conductor under normal and single fault conditions
according to the guideline provided in Annex H.
See 6. 3. 7. 4 for information and marking requirements.
– 66 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4.4.9 Capacitor discharge
For protection against shock hazard, capacitors within a UPS shall be d ischarged to a voltage
less than DVC As , or to a residual charge less than 50 µ C, after the rem oval of power from
the UPS :
–
–
–
for pluggable UPS type A, the discharge tim e shall not exceed 1 s or the hazardous live
parts shall be protected against direct contact by at least I PXXB (see 4. 4.3.3);
for pluggable UPS type B, the discharge tim e shall not exceed 5 s or the hazardous live
parts shall be protected against direct contact by at least I PXXB (see 4.4.3. 3);
for permanently connected UPS , the discharge tim e shall not exceed 1 5 s.
For pluggable UPS type A and B and permanently connected UPS , which do not m eet the
above requirem ents, access shall onl y be possible by m eans of a tool or key and the
inform ation and marking req uirem ents of 6. 5. 2 appl y.
Compliance is checked by test of 5. 2.3.8.
NOTE 1
This requ irem ent also applies to capacitors used for power factor correction, filteri ng, etc.
NOTE 2 Prod uct comm ittees usi ng this docum ent as referen ce docum ent can consider the charg e level 0, 5 µ C as
thresh ol d of percepti on as recomm ended by I EC 61 1 40.
4.5
Protection against electrical energy hazards
4.5.1
4.5.1 .1
Operator access areas
General
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Equ ipment shall be so designed that there is no risk of electrical energ y hazard in operator
access areas from accessible circu its by fu lfilling requ irement of 4. 2.
A risk of injury d ue to an electrical energ y hazard exists if it is likel y that two or m ore bare
parts (one of which may be earthed) between which a hazardous energy level exists, will be
brid ged by a metallic object.
The likelihood of bridging the parts u nder consi deration is d etermined by m eans of the test
finger of Figure 1 of I EC 60529: 1 989, in a straight position. I f it is possible to bridge the parts
with this test finger, a hazardous energy level shall not exist.
Barriers, guards, and similar m eans preventing unintentional contact m ay be provided as an
alternative to lim iting the energ y.
4.5.1 .2
Determination of hazardous electrical energy level
A hazardous electrical energ y level is considered to exist if:
–
the voltage is 2 V or m ore;
and
–
–
power available exceeds 240 VA after 60 s; or
the energ y exceeds 20 J .
Compliance shall be checked with the test in 5.2. 3. 9 or by calculation as follows:
in case of a capacitor the stored energy in the capacitor is at a voltage of 2 V or more, and
the stored energy calculated from the following equation, exceeds 20 J:
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 67 –
E = 0, 5 CU 2
where
E is the energ y, in j oules (J );
C is the capacitance, in farads (F);
U is the measu red voltage on the capacitor, in volts (V).
4.5.2
Service access areas
Capacitors located behind panels that are rem ovable for servicing, installation, or
disconnection shall present no risk of electric energ y hazard from charge stored on capacitors
after disconnection of the UPS .
Capacitors within a UPS shall be discharged to an energ y level less than 20 J , as in 4. 5. 1 . 2,
within 5 s after the rem oval of power from the UPS . I f this requirem ent is not achievable for
functional or other reasons, the inform ation and marking requ irements of 6. 5. 2 appl y.
This requ irement does not appl y to terminals covered by 4. 4. 9.
I n a service access area , the following requ irements appl y.
Bare parts at hazardous voltage shall be located or guarded so that unintentional contact
with such parts is unlikel y during service operations involving other parts of the eq uipm ent.
Bare parts at hazardous voltage shall be located or guarded so that accidental shorting to
parts at non-hazard ous potentials (for exam ple, by tools or test probes used by a service
person ) is unlikel y.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
Com pliance is checked by inspection of the equ ipment and relevant circu it diagrams, taking
into accou nt the possibility of disconnection with an y "ON "/"OFF" switch in either position and
non-operation of period ic power consuming devices or com ponents within the UPS . I f the
capacitor d ischarge time can not be accurately calculated, the d ischarge tim e shall be
m easured.
4.6
Protection against fire and thermal hazards
4.6.1
Circuits representing a fire hazard
The following types of circuits are considered a fire hazard:
–
–
–
circuits d irectl y connected to the m ains;
circuits that are not directly connected to the mains but exceed the limits for lim ited power
sources in 4.6. 5;
components having unenclosed arcing parts.
4.6.2
4.6.2.1
Components representing a fire hazard
General
The risk of ignition due to high temperature shall be m inim ized by the appropriate selection
and use of components and by su itable construction.
Electrical com ponents shall be used in such a way that their maximum working tem perature
under normal or single fault conditions is less than that necessary to cause ignition of the
surrou nding materials with which they are likely to com e into contact. U nder normal conditions
the lim its in Table 1 4 shall not be exceeded for components or their surround ing m aterial.
– 68 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Where it is not practical to protect com ponents against overheating under fault conditions, all
materials in contact with such components shall be of flam mability class V-1 , according to
I EC 60695-1 1 -1 0, or better.
Compliance with 4.6.2 and 4.6.3 shall be confirmed by inspection of component and material
data sheets and, where necessary, by test.
4.6.2.2
Components within a circuit representing a fire hazard
I nside fire enclosures , materials for components and other parts and all materials in contact
with such parts shall comply with flammability class V-2 as classified in I EC 60695-1 1 -1 0 or
flamm ability class HF-2 as classified in I SO 9772 or better.
I n case the m anufacturer of components provides data to dem onstrate compliance with the
above requirem ents no further testing is required.
The above requirem ent does not appl y to an y of the following:
–
–
–
–
–
electrical components which do not present a fire hazard u nder abnorm al operating
cond itions when tested accord ing to 5. 2. 4. 6;
m aterials and components within an enclosure of 0, 06 m 3 or less, consisting totally of
metal and having no ventilation openings, or within a sealed unit containing an inert gas;
electronic com ponents, such as integrated circuit packages, opto-cou pler packages,
capacitors and other small parts that are mounted on material of flammability class V-1 or
better;
wiring, cables and connectors insulated with PVC, TFE, PTFE, FEP, neoprene or
polyim ide;
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
the following parts, provided that they are separated from electrical parts (other than
insulated wires and cables) which under fau lt conditions are likel y to produce a
temperature that cou ld cause ignition, by at least 1 3 mm of air or by a solid barrier of
m aterial of flam mability class V-1 or better:
•
other small parts which would contribute negligible fuel to a fire, includ ing, labels,
m ounting feet, key caps, knobs and the like;
•
tubing for air or an y fluid systems , containers for powders or liquids and foamed plastic
parts, provided that they are of flamm ability class HB.
Batteries shall have a flammability class H B or better.
4.6.2.3
Components within a circuit not representing a fire hazard
For components within a circuit not representing a fire hazard 4.6. 2 does not appl y.
4.6.3
4.6.3.1
Fire enclosures
General
Fire enclosures are used to red uce the risk of fire to the environm ent, independent of the
location where they are installed.
A fire enclosure shall be provided for all UPS unless:
–
–
–
circuits insid e of an enclosure are within the limits of lim ited power sources in 4. 6. 5 of
this docum ent ; or
there is an agreement between the user and the manufacturer; or
the UPS is intended to be used onl y in areas withou t combustible m aterials and is marked
according to 6. 3. 5
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4. 6. 3.2
– 69 –
Flam m abi l i ty of en cl osu re m ateri al s
Materials used for fi re en cl osu res of U PS shall meet the flamm ability test req uirem ents of
5. 2. 5.5, except for those portions of the en cl osu re that enclose onl y circuits not representing
a fire hazard.
Materials are considered to comply without test if, in the m inim um thickness used, the
material is of flamm ability class 5VA or better, according to I EC 60695-1 1 -20.
Metals, ceram ic m aterials, and glass which is heat-resistant tempered, wired or lam inated, are
consid ered to com pl y without test.
Materials for com ponents that fill an opening in a fi re en closu re shall:
–
–
–
–
be of at least V-1 class material and no larger than 1 00 m m in an y dimension; or
be of at least V-2 class material and either
•
not larger than 25 mm in an y dimension; or
•
not larger than 1 00 mm in an y dimension and located at least 1 00m m from any part
that is a source of fire hazard; or
be of at least V-2 class m aterial and there is a barrier or device(s) that forms a barrier
m ade of a V-0 class material between the part and a source of fire hazard ; or
comply with a relevant I EC com ponent standard that includes flamm ability requ irements
for components that are intended to form part of, or fill openings in, a fi re en cl osu re .
NOTE Exam ples of these com ponents are fuse-hol ders, switches, pilot lig hts, connectors and appl iance inl ets.
Pol ym eric materials that serve as the ou ter en closu re and have surface area greater than 1
m 2 or a single dimension larger than 2 m , shall have a maximum flame spread index of 1 00 as
determined by ASTM E1 62 or AN SI /ASTM E84.
The m anufacturer may provide data from the fi re en cl osu re m aterial supplier to dem onstrate
compliance with the above requirements. I n this case, no further testing is req uired .
Compliance shall be checked by visual inspection and, where necessary, by test.
4. 6. 3.3
4. 6. 3.3.1
Open i n g s in fi re en cl osu res
Gen eral
For equipm ent that is intended to be used or installed in more than one orientation as
specified in the product documentation, the req uirem ents in 4. 6. 3. 3. 2 to 4. 6.3.3. 4 appl y in
each orientation.
These requirements are in add ition to requ irements regarding openings, in other sections of
this standard.
NOTE For exam ple the sections reg ardin g basi c protecti on with l i ve parts or hazard ous m ovin g parts are
additi on al to the requi rem ents in this section.
4. 6. 3. 3.2
Open i n g s in th e top an d sid e of fire en closu res
Openings in the top surfaces of fi re en closu res shall be d esigned to prevent an external
obj ect falling vertically or at u p to 5° from vertically from entering the en closu re in an area
that could lead to a fire hazard .
This requirement applies to all sides of m oveable equ ipm ent with no defined top and bottom,
unless top and bottom surfaces can be su itabl y d em onstrated in the installation instructions.
– 70 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
The test requirem ents are found in 5. 2. 2. 2 of this docum ent.
Openings in the top surfaces of fi re en closu res not located verticall y above or within 5° from
vertical of a circu it representing a fire hazard as defined in 4.6.1 are not subj ect to the test of
5. 2. 2. 2 and can be of an y construction if the construction prevents access to parts greater
than DVC As with the I P2X probe as detailed in 4. 4. 3. 3.
Where a portion of the side of a fi re en closu re falls within the area traced ou t by the 5° angle
in Figure 6, the limitations in 4. 6. 3. 3. 3 regard ing openings in bottoms of fi re en closu res also
appl y to this portion of the side.
Compliance shall be checked by visual inspection.
4. 6. 3. 3.3
Open i n g s in th e bottom of a fi re en closu re
The bottom of a fire en cl osu re or ind ivid ual barriers shall provid e protection against em ission
of flaming or m olten material u nder all internal parts, inclu ding partiall y enclosed components
or assem blies, located in a circuit representing a fire hazard.
The location and size of the bottom or barrier shall cover area D in Figure 6 and shall be
horizontal, lipped or otherwise shaped to provide equivalent protection. The area shall be free
of openings, except for those protected by a baffle, screen or other means so that m olten
m etal and burning material are unlikel y to fall ou tside the fire en closu re .
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 71 –
PWB
Combustible component
5°
Side openings (electrical enclosure)
FET
Bottom openings (fire enclosure)
D
IEC 121 0/12
NOTE Figure 6 sh ows an exam ple of a cutaway sid e vi ew of a prod uct contai ning a PWB with its com ponents
facing the bottom of the encl osu re . I f the PWB contain s com ponents in prim ary ci rcuitry (e. g. Fiel d Effect
Transistors), it is considered a source of i gniti on.
The bottom en cl osu re is consi dered a fi re en cl os u re so openings in it sh all be restrictive, e. g. see Table 1 2.
Besides providi ng protection against el ectrical sh ocks, the side open ings (el ectrical en cl os u re ) l ocated bel ow the
5 ° projection from the source of igniti on provi de protecti on against spread of fire.
Fig u re 6 – Fi re en closu re bottom open i n g s bel ow an
u n en closed or partial l y en closed fi re-h azard ou s com pon en t
The following constructions are consid ered to satisfy the requirement without test:
–
–
–
–
–
–
no opening in the bottom of a fi re en closu re ;
openings in the bottom of an y size under an internal barrier, screen or the like, which itself
complies with the requirements for a fire en closu re ;
openings in the bottom , each not larger than 40 mm 2 , under components and parts
meeting the flamm ability requ irements of V-1 class as classified in I EC 60695-1 1 -1 0, or
the flamm ability requirem ents of HF-1 class as classified in I SO 9772 or under small
components that pass the needle-flam e test of I EC 60695-1 1 -5 with the flam e applied for
a duration of 30 s;
baffle plate construction as illustrated in Figure 7;
m etal bottoms of fire en cl osu res conform ing to the dimensional lim its of an y line in
Table 1 3;
m etal bottom screens having a m esh with nominal openings not greater than 2 mm
between centre lines and with wire diam eters of not less than 0, 45 mm.
Compliance is checked by inspection or with the hot flaming oil test in 5.2.5.6, in case the
enclosure is designed differently than as described above.
fire
– 72 –
Not less
than 2 X
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Baffle plates (may be above or
below of fire enclosure )
X
Bottom of fire enclosure
IEC 1211/12
Fig u re 7 – Fi re en cl osu re baffle con stru ction
Table 1 3 – Perm i tted open i n g s in fi re en closu re bottom s
Appl i cabl e to ci rcu l ar h ol es
Appl i cabl e to oth er sh aped open i n g s
M etal bottom s
m i n i m u m th i ckn ess
M axi m u m d i am eter
of h ol es
M i n i m u m spaci n g
of h ol es cen tre to
cen tre
M axi m u m area
M i n i m u m spaci n g
of open i n g s bord er
to bord er
mm
mm
mm
mm 2
mm
0, 66
1 ,1
1 ,7
1 ,1
0, 56
0, 66
1 ,2
2, 3
1 ,2
1 ,1
0, 76
1 ,1
1 ,7
1 ,1
0, 55
0, 76
1 ,2
2, 3
1 ,2
1 ,1
from Standard
Sharing Group
0, 81 Get more FREE1 ,standards
9
3, 1
2, 9 and our chats 1 , 1
0, 89
1 ,9
3, 1
2, 9
1 ,2
0, 91
1 ,6
2, 7
2, 1
1 ,1
0, 91
2, 0
3, 1
3, 1
1 ,2
1 ,0
1 ,6
2, 7
2, 1
1 ,1
1 ,0
2, 0
3, 0
3, 2
1 ,0
4. 6. 3. 3.4
Doors or covers in fi re en closu res
I f part of a fi re en closu re consists of a door or a cover leading to an operator access area, it
shall com pl y with one of the following requirem ents:
–
–
the d oor or cover shall be provided with a safety interlock; or
a door or cover, intended to be routinel y opened by the user, shall compl y with both of the
following conditions:
•
it shall not be rem ovable from other parts of the fi re en cl osu re by the user; and
•
it shall be provid ed with a means to keep it closed during norm al operation.
A d oor or cover intended onl y for occasional use by an installer, such as for the installation of
accessories, is perm itted to be rem ovable provided that the equ ipment instructions inclu de
directions for correct removal and reinstallation of the d oor or cover.
Compliance is checked by inspection .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4. 6. 4
4. 6. 4. 1
T e m p e ra t u re
I n t e rn a l
– 73 –
l i m i ts
p a rt s
Equipment and its component parts shall not attain tem peratures in excess of those in
Table 1 4 when tested in norm al m ode in accordance with the ratings of the equipm ent.
Magnetic com ponents shall not attain tem peratures in excess of those in Table 1 03 when
tested in
in accordance with the ratings of the equ ipment.
s t o re d
e n e rg y
m od e
NOTE Tabl e 1 03 provid es ad dition al tem peratu re lim i ts for infrequent and occasi on al occu rrences.
Tabl e
1 03
– M a xi m u m
d u ri n g
t e m p e ra t u re
s t o re d
e n e rg y
T e m p e ra t u r e
I n s u l a ti o n
cl as s
l i m i ts
fo r m a g n e t i c
m od e
o f o p e ra t i o n
b y a ve ra g e
re s i s t a n c e
m e th o d
c o m p o n e n ts
T e m p e ra t u r e
t h e rm o c o u p l e
°C
°C
°C
1 05
1 27
117
1 20
1 42
1 32
1 30
1 52
1 42
1 55
1 71
1 61
1 80
1 95
1 85
200
209
1 99
220
21 6
206
250
234
224
Compliance is checked by test of 5.2.3.10.
by
m e th o d s
– 74 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Tabl e 1 4 – M axi mu m m easu red total temperatu res for in tern al materi al s
an d compon en ts
M ateri al s an d com pon en ts
a
Th erm ocou pl e
m eth od
Ri se of resi stan ce
m eth od
°C
°C
75
1
Rubber- or th erm oplastic-i nsul ated con ductors
2
Fi el d wi ri n g term i n al s an d other parts that m ay contact the
b
3
Copper bus bars and con nectin g straps
c
4
Insulation systems
insulation
of field wi ri ng
b
e
e
Class A (1 05)
90
1 00
Class E (1 20)
1 05
115
Class B (1 30)
110
1 20
Class F (1 55)
1 30
1 40
Class H (1 80)
1 55
1 65
Class N (200)
1 65
1 75
Class R (220)
1 80
1 90
1 95
205
on m agneti c com ponents
d
Class S (240)
a
5
Phenolic com position
6
On bare resistor m ateri al
7
Capacitor
f
8
Power electronic devices
g
9
10
h
PWBs
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
f
Com ponents bri dgi ng at l east basi c protecti on
11
Liqu id cool ing m edi um
1 65
41 5
i
a
The lim itation on phenol ic composition and on rubber an d therm oplastic insulation does not appl y to com pounds
which h ave been i nvestigated and foun d to m eet the requi rem ents for a high er tem peratu re.
b
The m axim um term inal tem perature should not exceed the tem perature rati n g of the term in al and the insulation
tem peratu re rati n g of th e cond uctor or cabl e specifi ed by the m anufacturer (see 6. 3. 6. 4).
c
The m axim um perm itted tem peratu re is determ ined by the tem perature lim it of support m ateri als or insulation of
connectin g wi res or oth er com pon ents. A m axim um tem perature of 1 40 ºC is recom m ended.
d
The m axim um tem peratu res on insulation of m agnetic com ponents assum e therm ocouples are applied on the
surface of coils, and are therefore not located on h ot-spots. Rise of resistance m ethod results in a m easu rem ent
of the average tem peratu re of the wi ndi ng.
e
These l i m its are extracted from the group safety stan dards I EC 61 558-1 an d I EC 61 558-2-1 6 (safety of power
transform ers, power supplies, reactors and sim ilar prod ucts). For m agnetic com ponents, not covered by th e
scope of I EC 61 558 series, comm itees for prod uct stand ards m ay defin e other lim its in accordance with
I EC 60085 and I EC 6021 6.
f
For a com ponent, the m axim u m tem perature specified by the m anufacturer shou ld n ot be exceeded.
g
The m axim um tem perature on the case sh oul d be the m axim um case tem peratu re for the applied power
dissipation specified by the m anufactu rer of power el ectronic devices.
h
The m axim um operatin g tem peratu re of th e PWB shall not be exceeded.
i
The m axim um tem perature of the cool ing m edium , specified by th e m anufactu rer of the m edium or d eterm i ned
from the known ch aracteristics of the m edium , should n ot be exceeded.
The resistance method for tem perature measurement as specified in Table 1 4 consists of the
calculation of the tem perature rise of a wind ing using the eq uation:
∆t =
2
( k + t1 ) − ( k + t 2 )
r1
r
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 75 –
where:
∆t
r
2
r
1
t
1
t
2
k
is the tem perature rise;
is the resistance at the end of the test in ohm s;
is the resistance at the beginning of the test in ohms; .
is the ambient tem perature at the beginning of the test (ºC);
is the ambient tem perature at the end of the test (ºC);
is 234, 5 for copper, 225, 0 for electrical cond uctor grade (EC) aluminium; values of the
constant for other conductors shall be determ ined.
4. 6. 4. 2
Accessi bl e parts
I n ord er to lim it the touch temperatures of accessible parts of U PS , and to protect against
long-term degrad ation of build ing m aterials, the maxim um temperature for accessible parts of
the U PS shall be in com pliance with Table 1 5.
When surface tem peratures of the U PS close to mounting surfaces, exceed the lim it of Table
1 5, a warning according to 6. 3. 5 shall be provid ed.
,
I t is perm itted that accessible parts that are requ ired to get hot as part of their intended
function (for exam ple heatsinks) m ay have tem peratures up to 1 00 °C, if the parts are not in
contact with bu ilding materials upon installation, and are m arked with the warning given in
6. 4. 3. 4. For products only for use in a restricted access area , the temperature may exceed
1 00 °C.
Product committees using this stand ard as a reference document shall consid er the stead y
state tem perature lim its for specific prod ucts and environm ental conditions.
– 76 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
These limits are in add ition to applicable limits in 4. 6. 4. 1 .
Table 1 5 – M aximum measured temperatu res for accessible parts of the U PS
Li mit
°C
1
2
3
4
Glass,
porcel ai n
and
vitreou s
materi al
U ser operated d evices (knobs, han dles,
switch es, displays, etc. ). which are h eld
continu ousl y du rin g norm al an d si ngle fault
condition (approx. 1 0 s)
55
55
55
60
65
70
U ser operated d evices (knobs, han dles,
switch es, displays, etc. ). which are h eld for short
periods only, du rin g norm al an d si ngle faul t
condition (approx. 1 s) a
60
70
65
85
75
80
Accessible encl osure parts likely to be touched
(approx. 1 s) a
65
75
70
90
80
85
Part
(Coated ) metal b
Encl osure parts where th ey contact buil din g
m aterials upon instal lation (continu ousl y)
Plasti c
and rubber
90
N OTE 1 I n Table 1 5, the val ues for accessible parts are taken from I EC Guid e 1 1 7 (bu rn threshol d). For shortduration contact with user operated devices the valu es were reduced by 5 °C to allow for som e m argin. I EC Guid e
1 1 7 also provid es val ues for burn th resholds for oth er coatin gs or m aterials.
N OTE 2 The m ain fig ures of I EC Guid e1 1 7 are reproduced i n Annex J for i nform ation.
a
b
For products intented an d expected to be operated by ch ild ren and eld erl y persons the contact period of I EC
Standard
Sharing Group and our chats
Guid e 1 1 7:Get
201 0more
ClauseFREE
6, Tablstandards
e 2 shou ld befrom
consid
ered .
Coati ng of m etal surfaces:
1 : non e (bare m etal)
2: lac (50 µ m )
3: porcelai n en am el (1 60 µ m ) / powder (60 µ m )
4: pol yam ide 1 1 or 1 2 (400 µ m )
4.6.5 Limited power sources
Where a limited power source is req uired, the source shall com pl y with Table 1 6 or Table 1 7
as applicable.
Compliance to both the m axim um allowed current and maximum apparent power available
from the power source is req uired .
A lim ited power source shall com pl y with one of the following requirem ents:
a)
the output is inherentl y limited in compliance with Table 1 6; or
b)
a linear or non-linear impedance limits the output in com pliance with Table 1 6. I f a
positive temperature coefficient device (PTC) is u sed, it shall pass the tests specified in
I EC 60730-1 , Clauses 1 5, 1 7, J .1 5 and J . 1 7; or
c)
a regulating network lim its the output in compliance with Table 1 6, both with and without
a single fault in the regulating network; or
d)
an overcu rrent protective device is used and the output is lim ited in compli ance with
Table 1 7.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 77 –
Where an overcurrent protective device is used, it shall be a fuse or a non-adjustable, nonautoreset, electrom echanical device.
A lim ited power source operated from an a.c. mains supply , or a battery-operated lim ited
power source that is recharged from an a. c. mains supply while su ppl yi ng the load, shall
incorporate an isolating transform er.
Compliance to determine the maximum available power is checked by test of 5.2.3. 9.
Table 1 6 – Limits for sources without an overcurrent protective device
Output voltage a
Output current
Uoc
a
bd
Apparent power
Isc
cd
S
V a. c.
V d. c.
A
VA
≤ 30 V r. m . s.
≤ 30 V d. c.
≤ 8
≤ 1 00
-
30 < Uoc ≤ 60
≤ 1 50 / Uoc
≤ 1 00
Uoc : Output voltage m easu red in accordance with 5. 1 . 5. 3 wi th all l oad ci rcuits discon nected. Voltag es are for
substantial ly si nusoi dal a. c. an d ri ppl e-free d. c. For non-sin usoidal a. c. an d d. c. with ri ppl e g reater th an 1 0 % of
the peak, the peak voltag e shall not exceed 42, 4 V.
b
c
d
Isc : Maxim um output current wi th an y non-capaciti ve load, i ncludin g a short circuit.
S (VA): Maxim um output
apparent power in VA with an y n on-capacitive load.
Measurem ent of Isc and S are m ade 5 s after application of the load if protection is by an electron ic circuit or a
positi ve tem perature coefficien t device (e. g. PTC), and 60 s in other cases.
Table 1 7 – Limits for power sources with an overcurrent protective device
Output voltage a
Output current
Uoc
a
V a. c.
V d. c.
≤ 20
≤ 20
20 < Uoc ≤ 30
20 < Uoc ≤ 30
–
30 < Uoc ≤ 60
bd
Apparent power
Isc
S
A
VA
cd
Current rating of
overcurrent
protecti ve device e
A
≤ 5, 0
≤ 1 000/ Uoc
≤ 250
≤ 1 00/ Uoc
≤ 1 00/ Uoc
Uoc : Output voltage m easured i n accord ance with 5. 1 . 5. 3 with all load circuits discon nected. Voltages are for
substantial l y sin usoid al a. c. an d ripple free d. c. For n on -sinusoidal a. c. and for d. c. with rippl e greater than
1 0 % of the peak, the peak voltage sh all n ot exceed 42, 4 V.
b
Isc : Maxim um output current wi th an y non-capaciti ve load, i ncludin g a short circuit, m easured 60 s after
appl ication of the l oad.
c
S (VA): Maxim um output VA with any non-capaciti ve l oad m easured 60 s after applicati on of the load.
d
Current lim iting im pedances rem ain in the circuit d uri ng m easurem ent, but overcu rrent protective devices are
bypassed.
NOTE The reason for m aking m easurem ents with overcurrent protective devices bypassed is to determ ine
the am ount of energ y that is available to cause possibl e overh eatin g du rin g the operati ng tim e of the
overcu rrent protecti ve d evices.
e
The current rati ngs of overcurrent protecti ve d evices th at break the ci rcuit within 1 20 s with a current equ al to
21 0 % of the cu rrent rating specified in the table.
– 78 –
4.7
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Protection against mechanical hazards
4.7.1
General
Failure of an y com ponent within the UPS shall not release sufficient energ y to lead to a
hazard, for exam ple, expu lsion of material into an area occupied by personnel.
4.7.2
4.7.2.1
Specific requirements for liquid cooled UPS
General
NOTE Sealed heat-pi pe cooli ng systems , used to transfer heat from a h ot com ponent to a heat sink, are not
considered to be liq uid cooli ng systems in this stand ard. H owever, th e possible fai lure of su ch com ponents should
be consid ered d uring th e circui t anal ysis of 4. 2.
4.7.2.2
Coolant
The specified coolant (see 6. 2) shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient tem peratures
during storage and operation. Coolant temperature in operation shall not exceed the limit
specified in Table 1 4.
The coolant used in a cooling system shall be a refrigerant investigated for the purpose,
water, gl ycol, a m ixture of water and glycol or non flam mable synthetic oils.
Compliance is checked by inspection and test of 5.2.3.10.
NOTE Flam m able coolants used in coolin g systems are not covered by this stand ard.
4.7.2.3
4.7.2.3.1
Design requirements
Get
more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
General
The liqu id containment system components shall be compatible with the liqu id to be used.
Equipment using liqu ids shall be so constructed that it is u nlikel y that either a dangerous
concentration of these materials or a hazard in the m eaning of this standard will be created by
condensation, vaporization, leakage, spillage or corrosion d uring normal operation, storage,
filling or emptying.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
The flexible hoses should be made of material free of conductive contaminents such as
carbon.
4.7.2.3.2 Corrosion resistance
All cooling system com ponents shall be su itable for use with the specified coolant. They shall
be corrosion resistant and shall not corrode as a result of prolonged exposure to the coolant
and/or air.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
4.7.2.3.3 Tubing, joints and seals
Cooling system tu bing, joints and seals shall be d esigned to prevent leakage during
excursions of pressure over the life of the eq uipment. The entire cooling system inclu ding
tubing shall satisfy the requ irements of the h ydrostatic pressure test of 5. 2. 7.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4. 7 . 2 . 3 . 4
P ro v i s i o n
– 79 –
fo r c o n d e n s a t i o n
Where internal condensation occurs d uring normal operation or m aintenance, measures shall
be taken to prevent d egrad ation of insulation . I n those areas where such cond ensation is
expected, clearance and creepage distances of Table 1 0 and Table 1 1 shall be evaluated at
least for a pollution degree 3 environment (see Table 8), and provision shall be made to
prevent accum ulation of water (for exam ple by providing a drain).
Compliance is checked by inspection.
4. 7 . 2 . 3 . 5
Le akag e
of coo l an t
Measures shall be taken to prevent leakage of coolant onto
as a result of normal
operation, servicing, or loosening or detachm ent of hoses or other cooling system parts during
the
. I f a pressure relief mechanism is provid ed, this shall be located so that
there shall be no leakage of coolant onto
when it is activated.
l i ve
e xp e c te d
p a rt s
l i fe t i m e
l i ve
p a rt s
During a leakage measures has to ensure that coolant will not resu lt in wetting of
electrical insulation .
l i ve
p a rt s
or
Compliance is checked by inspection.
4. 7 . 2 . 3 . 6
Los s
of coo l a n t
Loss of coolant from the cooling system shall not result in thermal hazards, explosion, or
shock hazard. The requirements of the loss of coolant test of 5. 2. 4.9. 4 shall be satisfied .
4. 7 . 2 . 3 . 7
C on d u cti vi ty
of coo l a n t
When the coolant is intentionall y in contact with
(for example non-earthed
heatsinks), the conductivity of the coolant shall be continu ousl y monitored and controlled, in
ord er to avoid hazardous current flow through the coolant.
l i ve
4. 7 . 2 . 3 . 8
I n s u l ati o n
re q u i re m e n t s
p a rt s
fo r c o o l a n t h o s e s
When the coolant is intentionall y in contact with
(for example non-earthed
heatsinks), the coolant hoses form a part of the insulation system . Depend ing on the location
of the hoses, the req uirem ents of 4. 4.7 for functional or simple or
shall
be applied where relevant.
l i ve
p a rt s
p ro t e c t i v e
4. 7 . 1 0 1
P ro t e c t i o n
in
s e rv i c e
acces s
s e p a ra t i o n
a re a
Moving parts that can cause injury to persons during service operations shall be located, or
protection shall be provided , such that unintentional contact with the moving parts is not
likel y.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
4. 8
Eq u i pm en t
4. 8 . 1 0 1
wi th
m u l ti p l e
s o u rc e s
of su ppl y
G e n e ra l
If equ ipm ent is provided with m ore than one suppl y connection (for exam ple, with
different voltages or frequ encies or as backup power), the design shall be such that all of
the following conditions are m et:
–
–
separate m eans of connection are provided for different circuits;
suppl y plu g connections, if an y, are not interchangeable if a hazard cou ld be created by
incorrect plu gging;
– 80 –
–
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
hazards, within the m eaning of this document, shall not be present u nder norm al or
si n g l e fau l t con d i ti on s due to the presence of m ultiple sources of suppl y. Actions such
as disconnection or de-energizing of a suppl y are considered a norm al condition.
Compliance is checked by evaluation in accordance with 4. 2.
I nformation is to be provided with the equipment indicating the presence of m ultiple sources
of suppl y and disconnection procedures (see 6. 5. 5).
NOTE Exam ples of the types of hazards consid ered are:
a) Backfeed ;
b) U nintenti onal islan din g;
c) H igh er tou ch cu rren t l evels with m ultiple sou rces connected sim ul taneously (if that is a n orm al condition for
the eq uipm ent);
d) H azard resulti ng from dam age to one or m ore connected sou rces du e to en ergy from anoth er source, such as
from the m ains to a generator;
e) Dam age to wiri ng d ue to cu rrents high er th an th e wi rin g is designed for flowin g from another source.
4. 8. 1 02
Backfeed protecti on
A U PS shall prevent h azard ou s vol tag e or h azard ou s en erg y
U PS input AC terminals after interruption of the input AC power.
from being present on the
No shock hazard shall exist at AC input term inals when measured 1 s after de-energization of
AC input for pluggable U PS , or 1 5 s for perm an en tl y con n ected U PS .
For perm an en tl y con n ected U PS , backfeed protecti on may be im plemented external to the
Getuse
more
FREE
standards
from Standard
U PS with the
of an
AC input
line isolation
d evice. Sharing Group and our chats
In this case, the backfeed protecti on req uirem ent applies to the input term inals of the
isolation device. The U PS supplier shall provide or specify a suitable isolating device which
shall include ad ditional labelling and instructions in accordance with 6. 4. 3. 1 01 .
Compliance is checked by inspection of the equipment and relevant circuit diagram, and by
simulating fault conditions in accordance with 5. 2. 3. 101.
When an air gap is em ployed for backfeed protecti on , the provision of Table 1 0 and
Table 1 1 for creepage and clearance d istances applies in addition to the following.
a)
b)
c)
Subj ect to confirm ation from the manufacturer, the U PS output, in stored en erg y m od e ,
m ay be consid ered a transient free circuit of overvoltage category I (for this purpose
identify the overvoltage category I valu e in Table 9, by using the appropriate U PS RMS
system ou tput voltage). An impulse voltage withstand test is not required since there is
no transient overvoltage present when the AC m ain input su ppl y is not available.
Therefore, the overvoltage category values appl y without an im pulse test.
The creepage and clearance d istances shall m eet the requirem ents for pollution d egree 2
(see Table 1 0 and Table 1 1 ).
Reinforced or equivalent insulation of the U PS output to the U PS input applies if during
stored en erg y m od e of operation not all inpu t poles are isolated by the backfeed
protecti on device. I n all other cases, basi c i n su l ati on is acceptable. I mpu lse withstand
voltage is not requ ired since there is no impulse when the AC m ain inpu t suppl y is not
available. Therefore, the pollution degree values appl y without an impulse test.
N OTE 1
A contactor is an exam ple of an isolati on d evice presenting an ai r g ap.
N OTE 2 One m ethod of obtainin g i nsul ation equ i valent to rei n forced i n su l ati on i s to com bine an air g ap
m eeting the basi c i n su l ati on req uirem ents and a soli d-state power isol ation device(s) as described in
5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 5.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 81 –
Compliance is checked by inspection
4. 9
Protection ag ain st en vi ron men tal stresses
The m anufacturer has to specify the following service conditions for operation, storage and
transportation:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
coolant tem perature (min/max);
am bient tem perature (min/m ax);
hum idity (m in/max);
pollution degree;
vibration;
UV resistance;
OVC (overvoltage category);
altitu de for therm al consideration, if rated for operation above 1 000 m;
altitu de for insulation coordination considerations, if rated for operation above 2 000 m .
NOTE Envi ronm ental categ ori es as specified in the I EC 60721 series can be used where appropri ate.
The manufacturer shall state the environmental service cond ition for the U PS accord ing to
Table 1 8.
Where the U PS com plies with the requ irements of this stand ard onl y at cond itions higher than
the minimum values or lower than the m axim um values given in Table 1 8, then this shall be by
agreement between the supplier and the custom er. The specific cond itions sh all be identified
in the operating manual and on the prod uct as specified in 6. 3. 3.
The U PS , as a m inim um , shall comply with the following indoor cond itions: climatic, pollution
degree, and hum idity condition of the skin as part of the environm ental service condition 3K2
of Table 1 8. The manufacturer m ay elect to com ply with environmental service conditions
more onerous than 3K2 subj ect to the U PS being m arked accordingl y (see 6. 2).
– 82 –
Tabl e
C o n d i ti o n
1 8 – E n v i ro n m e n t a l
I n d o o r co n d i ti o n e d
IEC
C l i m a ti c
IEC
d e g re e
H u m i di ty
co n d i ti o n
c o n d i ti o n s
O u td o o r
6 0 7 2 1 -3 -3
cl as s
3 K2
IEC
3
d ry
w a t e rw e t
6 0 7 2 1 -3 -4
4K6
(Tem perature: -20 °C to 55 °C)
(Hum idity: 4 to1 00 % R. H . /
condensing )
b
2
u n c o n d i ti o n e d
cl as s
3 K3
(Tem perature: +5 ° C to
40 °C)
(H um idity: 5 to 85 % R. H. /
non -con densing )
(Tem perature: +1 5 °C to
30 °C)
(H um idity: 1 0 to 75 % R. H .
non -con densi ng )
P o l l u ti o n
s e rv i c e
I n d o o r u n c o n d i ti o n e d
6 0 7 2 1 -3 -3
cl as s
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4
a
c
s a l t wa te r we t
a
o f th e
s ki n
cl as s
C h em i cal l y
3C1
cl as s
(N o salt m ist)
a cti ve
su b stan ces
cl as s
M ech an i cal l y
3S1
cl as s
(N o requi rem ent)
a c ti ve
su bstan ces
M ech an i cal
cl as s
a
cl as s
cl as s
3M 1
cl as s
3S1
cl as s
cl as s
4S 2
(Dust and sand)
3M 1
cl as s
(Vibration: 1 m /s 2 )
3B1
4C 2
(Salt m ist) a
(No requi rem ent)
(Vibration: 1 m /s 2 )
B i ol og i cal
3C1
(N o sal t m ist)
4M 1
(Vibration: 1 m /s 2 )
3B1
cl as s
4B 2
(N o requi rem ent)
(N o requi rem ent)
(M oul d/fun gus/rodents/term ites)
Where it is ensured that the equipm ent will n ot be used i n water wet or salt water wet condition, the m anufacturer
m ay choose to rate th e equ ipm ent for a less severe con dition. I n this case the
shall be indicated in the
docum entation, according to 6. 3. 3.
Pollution degree 2 m ay be provided if th e con ditions in 4. 4. 7. 1 . 2 are satisfi ed
standards
Sharing
Group
and ag
our
chats
Pollution d egGet
ree 2more
or 3 mFREE
ay be provid
ed if thefrom Standard
provi des
suffi cient
protection
ainst
con ductive polluti on
and th e con ditions in 4. 4. 7. 1 . 2 are satisfied
ra t i n g
b
c
e n c l o s u re
Compliance is checked by test of 5. 2.6.
4. 1 0
P ro t e c t i o n
ag ai n st
s o n i c p re s s u re
h a z a rd s
The requ irements for protection against sonic pressure hazards are considered to be beyond
the scope of this docum ent because such req uirem ents are dependent on local regulations.
4. 1 1
4. 1 1 . 1
W i ri n g
an d
co n n e cti o n s
G e n e ra l
The wiring and connections between parts of the equipm ent and within each part shall be
protected from mechanical damage during installation. The insulation , conductors and routing
of all wires of the equipm ent shall be suitable for the electrical, m echanical, thermal and
environm ental cond itions of use. Conductors which are able to contact each other shall be
provid ed with insulation rated for the DVC req uirem ents of the relevant circuits.
The compliance with 4.11. 2 to 4. 11. 8 shall be checked by inspection (see 5.2. 1) of the overall
construction and datasheets if applicable.
4. 1 1 . 2
Ro u t i n g
A hole through which insulated wires pass in a sheet metal wall within the
of the
equipm ent shall be provided with a smooth, well-rou nded bushing or grommet or shall have
sm ooth, well-rounded surfaces u pon which the wires bear to red uce the risk of abrasion of the
insulation .
e n c l o s u re
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 83 –
Wires shall be routed away from sharp ed ges, screw threads, burrs, fins, moving parts,
drawers, and similar parts, which abrade the wire insulation . The m inim um bend radius
specified by the wire m anufacturer shall not be violated.
Clamps and gu ides, either m etallic or non-m etallic, used for rou ting stationary internal wiring
shall be provided with smooth, well-rounded edges. The clamping action and bearing surface
shall be such that abrasion, or deformation of the insulation does not occu r. I f a m etal clam p
is used for conductors having therm oplastic insulation less than 0, 8 m m thick, non-cond ucting
mechanical protection shall be provided.
4. 1 1 . 3
C ol o u r cod i n g
Insu lated conductors, other than those which are integral to ribbon cable or multi-cord signal
cable, identified by the colour green with or without one or more yellow stripes shall onl y be
used for
.
p ro t e c t i v e
e q u i p o te n ti al
bon d i n g
NOTE The choice of green or green/yellow for the
regulati ons.
4. 1 1 . 4
Sp l i ces
an d
p ro t e c t i v e
e q u i p o te n ti a l
bon d i n g
is covered by nati on al
con n e cti on s
All splices and connections shall be m echanicall y secu red and shall provide electrical
continuity.
Electrical connections shall be soldered, welded , crim ped, or otherwise securel y connected. A
soldered joint, other than a com ponent on a PWB, shall ad diti onall y be m echanically secured.
NOTE Stranded wire shou ld not be consolid ated with sold er wh ere secured in a term inal that reli es on pressure
for contact or eq ui val ent
When stranded internal wiring is connected to a wire-bind ing screw, the construction shall be
such that loose strands of wire do not contact:
–
–
other uninsulated live parts not always of the sam e potential as the wire;
de-energized metal parts.
When screw term inal connections are used, the resulting connections may require routine
maintenance (tightening). Appropriate reference shall be made in the m aintenance manual
(see 6. 5. 1 ).
4. 1 1 . 5
Ac c e s s i b l e
con n e cti on s
I n ad dition to measures given in 4.4. 6. 4 it shall be ensured that neither insertion error nor
polarity reversal of connectors can lead to a voltage on an accessible connection high er than
the m aximum of DVC As . This applies for example to plu g-in sub-assem blies or other plug-in
devices which can be plugged in without the use of a tool or key or which are accessible
without the use of a tool or key. This does not appl y to equipm ent i ntend ed to be installed in
.
re s t ri c t e d
a cce s s
a re a s
I f relevant, non-interchangeability and protection against polarity reversal of connectors, plugs
and socket ou tlets shall be confirmed by inspection and trial insertion.
4. 1 1 . 6
I n t e rc o n n e c t i o n s
b e twe e n
p a rt s
o f th e
U PS
I n add ition to compl ying with the requirem ents given in 4.1 1 .1 to 4. 1 1 . 5, the m eans provided
for the interconnection between parts of the
shall compl y with the following req uirem ents
or those of 4. 1 1 . 7.
U PS
– 84 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Cable assemblies and flexible cords provided for interconnection between sections of
equipm ent or between u nits of a system shall be su itable for the service or use involved .
Cables shall be protected from physical dam age as they leave the enclosure and shall be
provid ed with m echanical strain relief.
Misalignment of male and fem ale connectors, insertion of a multipin m ale connector in a
female connector other than the one intend ed to receive it, and other manipulations of parts
which are accessible to the operator shall not result in m echanical dam age or a risk of
therm al hazards, electric shock, or inj ury to persons.
When external interconnecting cables terminate in a plu g which m ates wi th a receptacle on
the external surface of an enclosure , no risk of electric shock shall exist at accessible
contacts of either the plu g or receptacle when disconnected.
NOTE An i nterlock circuit i n the cabl e to de-en ergi ze th e accessible contacts when ever an end of the cabl e is
disconn ected m eets the intent of these req uirem ents.
4.1 1 .7
Supply connections
The connection points provid ed shall be of appropriate construction to preclude the possibility
of loose strands red ucing the spacing between conductors when carefu l attention is paid to
installation.
See 6. 3. 6. 4 for marking req uirem ent and documentation.
4.1 1 .8
Terminals
4.1 1 .8.1 Construction requirements
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
All parts of term inals which m aintain contact and carry current shall be of m etal having
adequ ate m echanical strength.
Term inal connections shall be such that the conductors can be connected by m eans of
screws, springs or other equivalent means so as to ensure that the necessary contact
pressure is m aintained.
Term inals shall be so constructed that the conductors can be clam ped between suitable
surfaces withou t an y significant dam age either to conductors or terminals.
Term inals shall not allow the cond uctors to be displaced or be displaced themselves in a
manner d etrim ental to the operation of equipm ent and the insulation shall not be reduced
below the rated values .
The requ irements of this subclause are m et by using term inals com pl ying with I EC 60947-7-1
or I EC 60947-7-2, as appropriate.
4.1 1 .8.2 Connecting capacity
Term inals shall be provided which accommodate the conductors specified in the installation
and m aintenance m anuals (see 6.3. 6. 4) and cables in accordance with the wiring rules
applicable at the installation . The terminals shall meet the temperature rise test of 5. 2. 3. 1 0.
I nformation regarding the perm itted wire sizes shall be given in the installation m anual.
Stand ard values of cross-section of round copper conductors are shown in Annex G, which
also gives the approximate relationship between I SO m etric and AWG/MCM sizes.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 85 –
The UPS m anufacturer shall ind icate whether the terminals are suitable for connection of
copper or alum inium conductors, or both. The terminals shall be such that the external
conductors may be connected by a means (screws, connectors, etc.) which ensures that the
necessary contact pressure corresponding to the current rating , the short-circu it strength of
the apparatus and the circuit are maintained.
I n the absence of a special agreement between the UPS manufacturer and the purchaser,
term inals shall be capable of accommodating copper cond uctors from the sm allest to the
largest cross-sectional areas correspond ing to the appropriate rated current (see Annex AA).
Compliance is checked by inspection, by measurement and by fitting at least the smallest and
largest cross-sectional areas of the appropriate range in Annex AA.
4.1 1 .8.3 Connection
Term inals for connection to external conductors shall be readil y accessible during instal lation.
Sets of terminals for connection to the sam e input or output shall be grouped together and
shall be located in proximity to each other and to the m ain protective earthing terminal, if
an y. I f the installation instructions provide detail on the proper earthing of the system , the
protective earthing term inal need not be placed in proxim ity to the term inals.
Clam ping screws and nuts shall not serve to fix an y other component althou gh they may hold
the terminals in place or prevent them from turning.
4.1 1 .8.4 Wire bending space for wires 1 0 mm 2 and greater
The d istance between a terminal for connection to the main suppl y, or between major parts of
the UPS (for example a transformer), and an obstruction toward which the wire is d irected
upon leaving the terminal shall be at least that specified in Table 1 9.Table 1 9 – Wire bend ing
space from terminals to enclosure.
– 86 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Table 1 9 – Wire bending space from terminals to enclosure
Size of wire
Minimum bending space, terminal to enclosure
mm 2
mm
Wires per terminal
2
3
40
-
-
25
50
-
-
35
65
-
-
50
1 25
1 25
1 80
70
1 50
1 50
1 90
95
1 80
1 80
205
1 20
205
205
230
1 50
255
255
280
1 85
305
305
330
240
305
305
380
300
355
405
455
350
355
405
51 0
400
455
485
560
450
455
485
61 0
1
1 0 to 1 6
4.1 1 .1 01 Non-detachable cords
4.1 1 .1 01 .1 Get
Cord
guard
more
FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
A cord gu ard shall be provid ed at the cord inlet opening of eq uipment that has a non
detachable cord and is intended to be m oved while in operation. Alternativel y, the inlet or
bushing shall be provid ed with a sm oothl y round ed bell-mou thed opening having a radius of
curvature equ al to at least 1 50 % of the overall diameter of the cord with the largest crosssectional area to be connected.
Cord guards shall:
–
–
–
be so designed as to protect the cord against excessive bending where it enters the
equipm ent,
be of insu lating m aterial,
be fixed in a reliable m anner, and project outside the equ ipm ent beyond the inlet opening
for a distance of at least five tim es the overall diameter or, for flat cords , at least five
tim es the m ajor overall cross-sectional dim ension of the cord.
4.1 1 .1 01 .2 Cord anchorages and strain relief
For eq uipment with a non-detachable cord , a cord anchorage shall be su pplied such that:
–
–
the connecting points of the cord conductors are relieved from strain, and
the outer covering of the cord is protected from abrasion.
I t shall not be possible to push the cord back into the eq uipment to such an extent that the
cord or its cond uctors, or both, could be damaged or internal parts of the equipm ent cou ld be
displaced.
For non-detachable cords containing a protective earthing conductor, the construction shall
be such that, if the cord should slip its anchorage, placing a strain on conductors, the
protective earthing conductor shall be the last to take the strain.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 87 –
The cord anchorage shall either be m ad e of insulating m aterial or have a lining of insu lating
material com pl ying with the requirements for supplementary insu lation . However, where the
cord anchorage is a bushing that includ es the electrical connection to the screen of a
screened cord, this requirem ent shall not appl y.
The construction of the cord anchorage shall be such that:
•
•
•
•
•
cord replacement does not impair the safety of the equipment,
for replacem ent cords , it is clear how relief from strain is to be obtained,
the cord is not clam ped by a screw that bears d irectl y on the cord, unless the cord
anchorage, includ ing the screw, is m ade of insulating material and the screw is of
comparable size to the d iameter of the cord being clamped,
methods such as tying the cord into a knot or tyin g the cord with string are not used,
and
the cord cannot rotate in relation to the bod y of the equipm ent to such an extent that
mechanical strain is imposed on the electrical connections.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by applying the following tests that are made with
the type of cord supplied with the equipment.
The cord is subjected to a steady pull of the following value, applied in the most unfavourable
direction:
a) 30 N for UPS of mass up and to including 1 kg;
b) 60 N for UPS over 1 kg and including 4 kg;
c) 100 N for UPS over 4 kg.
The test is conducted 25 times, each time for duration of 1 s. During the tests, the cord shall
not be damaged. This is checked by visual inspection, and by AC or DC voltage test
(dielectric strength test) between the cord conductors and accessible conductive parts, at the
test voltage appropriate for reinforced insulation .
After the tests, the cord shall not have been longitudinally displaced by more than 2 mm nor
shall there be appreciable strain at the connections, and clearances and creepage distances
shall not be reduced below the values specified in 4. 4.7.4. and 4. 4. 7. 5.
4.1 2 Enclosures
4.1 2.1
Gen eral
The following requirements are in add ition to enclosure requirements given in other sections
relating to specific hazards, for example electric shock hazard in 4. 4 and fire hazard in 4. 6.
En closures shall be suitable for use in their intended environments. The manufacturer shall
specify the intend ed environment (see 6. 3.3) and the I P rating of the enclosure (see 5. 2. 2. 3
for test).
Equipm ent shall have adequate mechanical strength and shall be so constructed that no
hazard occurs when subj ected to hand ling as m ay be expected.
Mechanical strength tests are not req uired on an internal barrier, screen or the like, provided
to meet the requirem ents of 4. 6. 3, if the enclosure provid es mechanical protection.
An enclosure shall be sufficientl y complete to contain or d eflect parts which, because of
failure or for other reasons, m ight becom e loose, separated or thrown from a m oving part.
– 88 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Compliance shall be checked by the relevant tests of 5. 2.2.4 to 5.2. 2.7 as specified. If the
enclosure complies with the applicable thickness requirement of 4.12.3 or 4. 12. 4 the test in
5. 2. 2.4.2 and 5.2.2.4.3 can be waived.
For open type equipment the tests of 5. 2. 2.4 to 5.2. 2.7 are not required.
4.1 2.2
Handles and manual controls
Handles, knobs, grips, levers and the like shall be reliabl y fixed so that they will not work
loose in normal use, if this could result in a hazard. Sealing compounds and the like, other
than self-hardening resins, shall not be used to prevent loosening. I f hand les, knobs and the
like are used to indicate the position of switches or similar components, it shall not be
possible to fix them in a wrong position if this could resu lt in a hazard.
Compliance shall be checked by inspection, and as applicable by the tests of 5.2. 2.7.
4.1 2.3
Cast metal
Die-cast metal, except at threaded holes for condu it, where a m inim um of 6, 4 m m thickness is
requ ired, shall be:
–
–
not less than 2, 0 mm thick for an area larger than 1 55 cm 2 or having an y d im ension larger
than 1 50 mm ;
not less than 1 , 2 mm thick for an area of 1 55 cm 2 or less and having no dim ension larger
than 1 50 mm .
The area under evalu ation m ay be bou nded by reinforcing ribs subdividing a larger area.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Malleable iron
or permanent-m ou ld cast alum iniu m, brass, bronze, or zinc, except at threaded
holes for condu it, where a minimum of 6, 4 mm thickness is requ ired, shall be:
–
–
at least 2, 4 mm thick for an area greater than 1 55 cm 2 or having an y d im ension m ore than
1 50 mm;
at least 1 , 5 mm thick for an area of 1 55 cm 2 or less having no dimension m ore than
1 50 mm .
A sand-cast m etal enclosure shall be a m inimum of 3, 0 mm thick except at locations for
threaded holes for condu it, where a minimum of 6, 4 mm is req uired.
4.1 2.4
Sheet metal
The thickness of a sheet-metal enclosure at points to which a wiring system is to be
connected shall be not less than 0, 8 mm thick for uncoated steel, 0, 9 m m thick for zinc-coated
steel, and 1 , 2 mm thick for non-ferrous m etal.
Enclosure thickness at points other than where a wiring system is to be connected shall be
not less than that specified in Table 20 or Table 21 .
With reference to Table 20 or Table 21 , a su pporting fram e is a structure of angle or channel
or fold ed section of sheet m etal, which is attached to and has the sam e outside dimensions as
the enclosu re surface, and which has torsional rigidity to resist the bend ing m oments that are
applied by the enclosure surface when it is d eflected. A structure which is as rigid as one
built with a frame of angles or channels has eq uivalent reinforcing.
Constructions withou t supporting frame includ e:
–
–
a single sheet with single formed flanges – formed edges;
a single sheet which is corrugated or ribbed ;
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 89 –
an enclosure surface loosel y attached to a fram e, for example, with spring clips; and
– an enclosure surface having an u nsupported edge.
See Figure 8 for su pported and unsupported enclosu re surfaces.
–
Top C
Side B
Rear A
Side B
Supporting
flanges
Bottom C
IEC 1 21 2/1 2
Figure 8 – Supported and unsu pported enclosure parts
Each enclosu re surface is evaluated individuall y based on the length and width dim ensions.
For each set of surface dim ensions, A, B or C, the width is the smaller dimension regard less
of its orientation to other surfaces. I n Table 20 and Table 21 , there are two sets of dimensions
that correspond to a single m etal thickness requirem ent and the following describes the
applicable proced ure for determining the minimum m etal thickness for each surface.
For a supported surface, all of the table dimensions, includ ing the “not limited ” lengths, are
able to be applied. The rear surface “A”, top and bottom surfaces “C”, are supported either by
adj acent surfaces of the enclosure or by a 1 2, 7 mm (1 /2 inch) wide flange. To d etermine
required metal thickness for supported surfaces, the width is to be m easured and com pared
with the table value in the m axim um width colum n that is eq ual to or greater than the
measured width. When the corresponding length in the m axim um length column is “not
limited”, the m inimum thickness in the far right colum n is to be used. When the corresponding
length in the maxim um length column is a num erical value, and the m easured length of the
side does not exceed this value, the minimum thickness from the far right column is to be
used. When the measured length of the side exceeds the num erical value, the next line in the
Table 20 and Table 21 is to be used .
For an unsupported su rface, onl y the table d im ensions that includ e a specific length
requirement are applied . The dimensions with a “not lim ited” length do not appl y. The front
edge of the left and right surfaces “B”, are not supported by an adjacent surface or by a
flange. To determine the requ ired m etal thickness for u nsupported surfaces, the length is to
be measured and compared with the table value in the maxim um length column that is not
less than the measured length, ignoring the “not lim ited” entries. When the corresponding
width in the maxim um width colum n is not less than the measured width, the minimum
thickness from the far right colum n is to be used. When the m easured wid th of the surface
exceeds the valu e in the maximum width colum n, the next line in the Table 20 and Table 21 is
to be used.
– 90 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Tabl e 20 – Th i ckn ess of sh eet m etal for en cl osu res:
carbon steel or stai n l ess steel
Wi th ou t su pporti n g fram e
M axi m u m wi d th
mm
1
1
1
1
1
1
b
a
M axi m u m l en g th
mm
c
Wi th su pporti n g fram e
M axi m u m wi d th
mm
c
a
M axi m u m l en g th
mm
c
Minimum
th i ckn es s
mm
1 00
Not lim ited
1 60
N ot lim ited
0, 6 d
1 20
1 50
1 70
21 0
1 50
N ot lim ited
240
N ot lim ited
0, 75 d
1 80
220
250
320
200
N ot lim ited
31 0
N ot lim ited
0, 9
230
290
330
41 0
320
N ot lim ited
500
N ot lim ited
1 ,2
350
460
530
640
460
N ot lim ited
690
N ot lim ited
1 ,4
51 0
640
740
91 0
560
N ot lim ited
840
N ot lim ited
1 ,5
640
790
890
1 090
640
N ot lim ited
990
N ot lim ited
1 ,8
740
91 0
1 040
1 300
840
N ot lim ited
1 300
N ot lim ited
2, 0
970
1 200
1 370
1 680
070
N ot lim ited
1 630
N ot lim ited
2, 5
200
1 500
1 730
2 1 30
320
N ot lim ited
2 030
N ot lim ited
2, 8
520 Get more FREE
1 880 standards from2 Standard
1 30
620
Sharing 2Group
and our chats
600
N ot lim i ted
2 460
N ot lim ited
3, 0
850
2 290
2 620
3 230
a
See 4. 1 2. 4.
b
The wi dth is the sm aller dim ension of a rectan gul ar piece of sheet m etal wh ich is part of an en cl osu re .
Adjacent su rfaces of an en cl o su re are abl e to have supports in comm on and be m ade of a si ngle sh eet.
c
N ot lim ited applies onl y wh en the edge of the surface is flan g ed at least 1 2, 7 m m or fastened to adj acent
surfaces not n orm all y rem oved in use.
d
Sheet steel for an en cl o su re i nten ded for outdoor use shou ld be not l ess than 0, 86 mm thick.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 91 –
Tabl e 21 – Th i ckn ess of sh eet m etal for en cl osu res:
al u m i n i u m , copper or brass
Wi th ou t su pporti n g fram e
a
M axi m u m wi d th ,
M axi m u m l en g th ,
75
90
1 00
1 25
1 50
1 65
200
240
300
350
450
51 0
640
740
940
1 1 00
1 300
1 500
N ot lim ited
1 00
N ot lim ited
1 50
N ot lim ited
200
N ot lim ited
300
N ot lim ited
400
N ot lim ited
640
N ot lim ited
1 000
N ot lim ited
1 350
N ot lim ited
1 900
mm
b
mm
c
Wi th su pporti n g fram e
M axi m u m wi d th ,
mm
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
1 80
220
250
270
360
380
480
530
71 0
760
1 00
1 50
500
600
200
400
1 00
300
b
a
M axi m u m l en g th ,
mm
c
N ot lim ited
240
Not lim ited
340
Not lim ited
460
Not lim ited
640
Not lim ited
950
N ot lim ited
1 400
N ot lim ited
2 000
N ot lim ited
2 900
N ot lim ited
4 1 00
Minimum
th i ckn es s
mm
0, 6
d
0, 75
0, 9
1 ,2
1 ,5
2, 0
2, 4
3, 0
3, 9
a
See 4. 1 2. 4.
b
The wi dth is the sm aller dim ension of a rectan gul ar piece of sheet m etal wh ich is part of an en cl osu re .
Adjacent su rfaces of an en cl o su re are abl e to have supports in comm on and be m ade of a single sh eet.
c
N ot lim ited applies onl y wh en the edge of the surface is flan g ed at least 1 2, 7 m m or fastened to adj acent
surfaces not n orm all y rem oved in use.
d
Sheet al um ini um , copper or brass for an en cl osu re i ntend ed for outdoor use sh oul d be not l ess than 0, 74 mm
thick.
4. 1 2. 5
Stabi l i ty test for en cl osu re
Und er conditions of normal use, u nits and eq uipment shall not become ph ysically unstable to
the degree that they could becom e a hazard to an operator or to a service person.
I f units are designed to be fixed together on site and not used individu all y, the stability of each
ind ividual unit is exempt from the requirem ents of 4. 1 2. 5.
The req uirem ents of 4. 1 2. 5 are not applicable if the installation instructions for a u nit specify
that the equ ipment is to be secured to the build ing structure before operation.
Und er cond itions of operator use, a stabilizing m eans, if needed, shall be automatic in
operation when drawers, doors, etc., are opened.
During operations perform ed by a service person, the stabilizing m eans, if need ed, shall
either be au tom atic in operation, or a m arking shall be provided to instruct the service person
to deploy the stabilizing means.
Compliance is checked by test of 5. 2.2.5.
– 92 –
4.1 01
4.1 01 .1
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
U PS isolation and disconnect devices
Emergency switching (disconn ect) device
A U PS shall be provided with an integral single em ergency switching device (or term inals for
the connection of the remote em ergency switching device), which prevents further su ppl y to
the load by the U PS in an y mode of operation. I f reliance is placed on additional
disconnection of supplies in the building wiring installation, the installation instructions shall
so state. The requ irement is not mandatory for pluggable U PS if permitted by national
regu lations.
NOTE I n som e countries, an em ergency switchin g d evice is cal led "EPO" (em ergency power off).
Compliance is checked by inspection and analysis of relevant circuit diagrams.
4.1 01 .2 Normal disconnect devices
Means shall be provid ed to disconnect the U PS from the AC and DC supplies for service and
testing by skilled person .
Means of isolation and disconnect d evices for internal and external DC supplies, for example
a battery bank, shall open all ungrounded conductors connected to the DC suppl y.
Means of isolation and disconnect devices for external AC supplies shall open all u ngrounded
cond uctors connected to the AC suppl y.
NOTE 1 U nl ess applicabl e for functional use, the m eans of disconnection are general ly l ocated either i n the
servi ce access area or external to the equi pm ent, an d specified in the i nstallati on in structions. For furth er
guid ance about selection of disconnect d evices, refer to I EC 60947-3: 2008, Table 2.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
NOTE 2 Disconn ect devices for service an d test purposes are g eneral ly d esi gn ed for operation und er no-load,
provi ded that th e critical l oad can be transferred as appl icable by oth er m eans, for exam ple by using a static
transfer switch.
I f operation of a d isconnect device alters the U PS output voltage with respect to the protective
earth potential, then operation of that d evice shall be alarm ed. Alternativel y, an appropriate
warning label shall be located adj acent to that disconnect d evice or to its command.
NOTE 3 Such a situation ari ses upon openi ng of a 4-pole input isolator that provid es neutral reference to the
UPS .
I f the operating m eans of the disconnection device is operated verticall y rather than rotationall y or horizontall y, the "U P" position of the operating m eans shall be the "ON " position.
Where a permanently connected U PS receives power from more than one external source,
there shall be a prominent marking at each disconnect device giving ad equate instructions for
the rem oval of all power from the u nit.
4.1 02 Stored en ergy source
4.1 02.1
General
Batteries, when selected as the stored energ y source for use with U PS , shall be installed
taking into account the requ irements prescribed in 4. 1 02.
Batteries can be installed in:
•
•
•
separate battery room s or build ings, or
separate cabinets or compartm ents, indoor or outdoor, or
battery bays or compartments within the UPS enclosu re .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 93 –
NOTE Requi rem ents for installation of valve reg ulated batteries i n a separate room , cabin et or com partm ent are
subject to local regul ation.
4.1 02.2 Accessibility and maintain ability
When deem ed necessary, access to battery poles and battery connectors shall be provided so
that their fittings can be tested for correct tightening (torque) and be readjusted if req uired .
Batteries with liqu id electrol yte shall be so located that the battery cell caps are accessible for
electrol yte tests and read justm ent of electrol yte levels.
Compliance is checked by inspection and application of the tools and measuring equipment
supplied or recommended by the battery manufacturer for the prevailing conditions.
4.1 02.3 Distance between battery cells
Battery cells or blocks, as applicable, shall be m ounted for the purpose of com pl ying with
ventilation, battery temperature and insu lation requirements in accordance with the
req uirem ents from the battery manufacturer.
The batteries shall be so located and mounted that the terminals of cells are prevented from
coming into undesirable contact with term inals of adjacent cells, or with metal parts of the
battery compartm ent, as the result of shifting of the battery.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by analysis of the battery manufacturer data-sheet.
4.1 02.4 Case insu lation
Cells in cond uctive casings shall have adeq uate insu lation between each other and to
cabinets or compartm ents. The insulation shall meet the AC or DC voltage test (dielectric
strength test) req uirem ents of 5.2. 3. 4.
Compliance is checked by test.
4.1 02.5 Electrolyte spillage
To prevent effects of electrol yte spillage from the battery, ad equ ate protection such as an
electrol yte-resistive coating on the battery trays and cabinets shall be provided.
This requirem ent does not appl y to valve regulated lead-acid batteries.
Compliance is checked by inspection.
4.1 02.6 Ventilation an d hydrogen concentration
A U PS en closure or compartm ent housing a vented battery
•
•
•
shall com pl y with the ventilation requirements of Annex CC,
may contain arc-producing elem ents such as open fuse links and the contacts of circuit
breakers, relays, switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination
units, only if an y such parts are m ounted at least 1 00 mm below the lowest battery vent,
and
shall not vent into other closed spaces where arc-prod ucing elements are located.
For the purpose of 4. 1 02. 6, the following components are not considered arc-producing
elements: connectors, monitoring sensors (such as thermistors) and sand enclosed fuses. For
battery room s, proper inform ation on the required flow of air shall be provided in the
installation instructions where the battery installation is su pplied with the U PS .
Compliance is checked by inspection, calculation or measurement.
– 94 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
4.1 02.7 Charging voltages
The UPS shall protect the batteries against excessive voltages, including under a single fault
condition within the charger. Protection may be accomplished by turning off the charger or by
interrupting the charging current.
Compliance is checked by circuit evaluation or test.
4.1 02.8 Battery circuit protection
4.1 02.8.1 Overcurrent and earth fault protection
A battery su ppl y circuit shall be provid ed with overcurrent and earth fault protection , and
shall compl y with the requ irem ents described in 4. 1 02. 8.
NOTE Earth -fau lt in the context of 4. 1 02. 8 differs from residual , l eakage or touch current , covered in
4. 4. 8.
4.1 02.8.2 Location of protective devices
The protective device shall be constructed and positioned so that arc-producing elements in
this d evice, if an y, are not subject to operation where hazardous levels of h ydrogen m ixture
with air m ay be present. Where the batteries are installed in a separate room or cabinet, the
overcurrent protective d evice shall be located in close proxim ity to the battery in accordance
with the installation regu lation appl ying.
NOTE Exam ples of locations wh ere hazard ous levels of hydrogen m ixtu re with air can be present includ e those
on top of battery vents and enclosed spaces where hydrogen can be trapped ("ai r-pockets").
ComplianceGet
is checked
by inspection.
more FREE
standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
4.1 02.8.3 Rating of protective devices
The rating of the overcurrent protective device shall be such as to avoid hazards du e to
internal faults of the UPS , and circuit anal ysis shall be carried ou t for the battery circuit in
accordance with 4. 2.
For a UPS to be used with a separate battery suppl y, the rating of the overcurrent protective
device shall be ind icated in the instruction manual and shall take into account the current
rating of the conductors to be connected between the UPS and battery suppl y, as well as the
fault current capability of the battery suppl y.
Where the battery terminals are not directl y grounded, the d evice shall protect all terminals.
Compliance is checked by analysis and inspection.
4.1 03 UPS connection to telecommunication lines
Term inals in the UPS that are intend ed for connection to telecommunication lines shall comply
with the relevant telecomm unication network voltage (TNV) classification. Refer to
Table A. 1 01 for a TN V classification com parison with decisive voltage classification (DVC).
Compliance is checked by analysis.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
5
Te s t
5. 1
– 95 –
re q u i re m e n t s
G e n e ra l
5. 1 . 1
T e s t o b j e cti ve s
an d
c l a s s i fi c a t i o n
is fully in
Testing, as d efined in this Clause 5, is requ ired to dem onstrate that
accord ance with the requirem ents of this stand ard . Testing may be waived if perm itted by the
relevant req uirements subclause of Clause 4.
U PS
The su bclauses in this Clause 5 describe the procedures to be ad opted for the testing of
The tests are classified as:
–
–
–
U PS
.
type tests;
rou tine tests;
sample tests.
The manufacturer and/or test house shall ensure that the specified m axim um and/or minimum
environm ent (or test) values are imposed, taking tolerances and m easurem ent uncertainties
full y into account.
W AR N I N G !
taken
Th ese
to a vo i d
5. 1 . 2
te s ts
i n j u ry
S e l e c ti o n
.
ca n
of test
re s u l t
in
h a z a rd o u s
si tu ati on s .
S u i tab l e
p re c a u t i o n s
sh al l
be
sam pl es
When testing a range or series of sim ilar products, it may not be necessary to test all models
in the range. Each test should be perform ed on a mod el or models having mechanical and
electrical characteristics that ad equ atel y represent the entire range for that particu lar test.
NOTE For exam ple, tests on
of th e sam e m aterial but different sizes can be represented by a singl e
but tests on power com ponents that are different ratings often cannot be represented by testing on one
particu lar m odel.
e n c l o s u re s
e n c l o s u re
5. 1 . 3
S eq u en ce
o f te s t s
I n general, there is no req uirement for tests to be performed in a set seq uence, nor is it
requ ired that they are all perform ed on the sam e sam ple of equipment. However, the pass
criteria for som e of the tests requ ire that they are followed by one or m ore further tests.
5. 1 . 4
E a rt h i n g
con d i ti on s
Test requirements shall be determ ined using the worst-case (most stressful) system earthing
allowed by the m anufacturer. System s earthing may inclu de:
–
–
–
–
neutral to earth;
line to earth;
neutral to earth throu gh high im pedance;
isolated (not earthed).
5. 1 . 5
5. 1 . 5. 1
G e n e ra l
co n d i ti on s
Ap p l i c a t i o n
fo r t e s t s
o f te s ts
Unless otherwise stated, upon conclusion of the tests, the equ ipm ent need not be operational.
– 96 –
5.1 .5.2
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Test samples
Unless otherwise specified, the sample or samples u nder test shall be representative of the
eq uipm ent the user would receive, or shall be the actu al equ ipm ent read y for shipment to the
user.
As an alternative to carrying out tests on the com plete equ ipment, tests may be conducted
separatel y on circu its, com ponents or su b-assemblies outside the equipment, provided that
inspection of the equipm ent and circuit arrangem ents indicates that the results of such testing
will be representative of the results of testing the assem bled eq uipment. I f an y such test
indicates a likelihood of non-conformance in the com plete equ ipment, the test shall be
repeated in the equipment.
Where in this standard compliance of materials, components or sub-assemblies is checked by
inspection or by testing of properties, it is permitted to confirm compliance by reviewing any
relevant data or previous test results that are available instead of carrying out the specified
type tests . See also 4.1
5.1 .5.3
Operating parameters for tests
Except where specific test conditions are stated elsewhere in the standard and where i t is
clear that there is a significant im pact on the results of the test, the tests shall be conducted
under the m ost unfavourable com bination within the m anufactu rer's operating specifications of
the following param eters:
supply voltage;
– supply frequ ency;
– operating tem perature taking derating and cooling control characteristic into account;
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
– ph ysical location of equipm ent and position of movable parts;
– operating mod e;
– load conditions;
– adj ustments of thermostats, regu lating d evices or sim ilar controls available to an ordinary
person :
•
without the use of a tool,
•
with the use of a tool deliberatel y provided
For UPS with external controls intended to be installed in a restricted access area , these
controls shall be set to manufacturer’s settings.
–
NOTE I n d eterm ining the m ost unfavou rabl e frequency for the power to energi ze th e eq uipm ent un der test,
different rated frequ encies withi n the rated frequ ency ran ge should be taken into accou nt (for exam ple, 50 H z and
60 H z) but consi deration of the tolerance on a rated frequ ency (for exam ple, 50 H z ± 0, 5 H z) is not norm ally
necessary.
5.1 .6
Compliance
Compliance with this standard shall be verified by carrying out the appropriate tests specified
in this Clause 5.
Com pliance m ay only be claim ed if all relevant tests have been passed .
Compliance with construction requirements and information to be provided by the
manufacturer shall be verified by suitable examination, visual inspection, and/or
measurement.
Whenever design or component changes have potential impact upon compliance, new type
shall be performed to confirm compliance. It is desirable that the modified product
testing
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 97 –
should be identified, for example by using a suitable date code or serial number as described
in 6. 2.
5. 1 . 7
T e s t o v e rv i e w
Table 22 provides an overview of the type,
5. 1 . 7 . 1 0 1
U PS
ro u t i n e
Te s t
T yp e
Ro u ti n e
22
te s ti n g
.
– T e s t o v e rv i e w
Sam pl e
Re q u i r e m e n t ( s )
IEC
i n s p e c ti o n
M ech an i cal
sample
t e s t o v e rv i e w
Tabl e
Vi s u a l
and
X
6 2 0 40 -1
IEC
6 2 4 7 7 -1
S p e c i fi c a t i o n ( s )
IEC
6 2 0 4 0 -1
X
IEC
6 2 4 7 7 -1
5. 2. 1
te s ts
Clearance and
creepag e distances
test
X
N on -accessibility
test, includin g en ergy
hazard test after
disconn ection
X
I ngress protecti on
test (I P
)
4. 4. 7. 1 ,
4. 4. 7. 5
5. 2. 2. 1
4. 5. 1 . 1
5. 2. 2. 2
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 3
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 4
Deflection test
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 4. 2
Stead y force test,
30 N
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 4. 2. 2
Stead y force test,
250 N
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 4. 2. 3
I m pact test
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 4. 3
Drop test
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 4. 4
Stress relief test
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 4. 5
Stability test
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 5
Wall or ceiling
m ounted eq uipm ent
test
X
4. 1 2. 1
5. 2. 2. 6
Rack m ounted
equi pm ent test
X
H an dles and m anual
control secu rem ent
test
X
Cord g uard test
X
4. 4. 3. 3
ra t i n g
i ntegrity
E n c l o s u re
test
E l e c t ri c a l
Annex GG
5. 2. 2. 6. 1 02
4. 1 2. 1
4. 1 1 . 1 01
5. 2. 2. 7
5. 2. 2. 1 01
te s ts
I m pulse voltage test
AC or DC voltage
test (diel ectric
strength test)
X a, c, f
Xf
Xb
Xe
4. 4. 3. 2,
4. 4. 5. 4,
4. 4. 7. 1 ,
4. 4. 7. 1 0. 1 ,
4. 4. 7. 1 0. 2,
4. 4. 7. 8. 3
5. 2. 3. 2
4. 4. 3. 2,
4. 4. 5. 4,
4. 4. 7. 1 ,
4. 4. 7. 1 0. 1 ,
4. 4. 7. 1 0. 2,
4. 4. 7. 8. 4. 2
5. 2. 3. 4
– 98 –
Te s t
T yp e
Ro u ti n e
Sam pl e
Re q u i r e m e n t ( s )
IEC
Partial discharge test
X a, f
Protective im pedance
test
X
Touch current
m easurem ent test
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
6 2 0 40 -1
Xb
IEC
6 2 4 7 7 -1
S p e c i fi c a t i o n ( s )
IEC
6 2 0 4 0 -1
IEC
6 2 4 7 7 -1
4. 4. 7. 1 ,
4. 4. 7. 1 0. 2,
4. 4. 7. 8. 3
5. 2. 3. 5
4. 4. 5. 4
5. 2. 3. 6
X
4. 4. 4. 3. 3
5. 2. 3. 7
Capacitor discharge
test
X
4. 4. 9
5. 2. 3. 8
Lim ited power
source, test incl u din g
energ y h azards test
X
4. 5. 1 . 2,
4. 6. 5
5. 2. 3. 9
Tem peratu re rise test
X
4. 6. 4
5. 2. 3. 1 0
Backfeed protection
test
X
Protective
equi potential bondi ng
X
I nput current
X
4. 3. 1 01
5. 2. 3. 1 02
Transform er
protection
X
4. 3. 1 02
5. 2. 3. 1 04
S t o re d
e n e rg y
s o u rc e
te s ts
Case insu lation test
X
X
4. 8. 1 02
X
X
5. 2. 3. 1 01
4. 4. 4. 2. 2
5. 2. 3. 1 1 ,
5. 2. 4. 3
4. 1 02. 4
5. 2. 3. 4
Ventilati on and
X
4. 1 02. 6
Annex CC
hyd rogen
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
concentration
Chargi ng voltages
X
4. 1 02. 7
Wiring test
X
4. 1 1 . 1 01
Ab n o rm a l
Annex CC
4. 1 1
5. 2. 3. 1 0
4. 3. 2. 3
5. 2. 4. 4
o p e ra ti o n
te s ts
Output short-ci rcuit
test
X
Short-tim e withstand
current
X
4. 3. 1 03
5. 2. 3. 1 03
U nsynchronised load
transfer test
X
4. 3. 1 05
5. 2. 3. 1 05
Output overl oad test
X
4. 3
5. 2. 4. 5
Breakd own of
com ponents test
X
4. 2
5. 2. 4. 6
PWB short-circuit
test
X
4. 4. 7. 7
5. 2. 4. 7
Loss of phase test
X
4. 2
5. 2. 4. 8
Cool ing failu re tests
X
4. 2,
4. 7. 2. 3. 6
5. 2. 4. 9
I noperati ve blower
test
X
4. 2
5. 2. 4. 9. 2
Clog ged filter test
X
4. 2
5. 2. 4. 9. 3
Loss of coolant test
X
4. 7. 2. 3. 6
5. 2. 4. 9. 4
H igh cu rrent arcin g
igniti on test
Xa
4. 4. 7. 8. 2
5. 2. 5. 2
Glow-wi re test
Xa
4. 4. 7. 8. 2
5. 2. 5. 3
M a t e ri a l
te s t s
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Te s t
T yp e
Ro u ti n e
– 99 –
Sam pl e
Re q u i r e m e n t ( s )
IEC
6 2 0 40 -1
IEC
S p e c i fi c a t i o n ( s )
6 2 4 7 7 -1
IEC
6 2 0 4 0 -1
IEC
6 2 4 7 7 -1
H ot wi re i gniti on test
Xa
4. 4. 7. 8. 2
5. 2. 5. 4
Flamm ability test
Xa
4. 6. 3
5. 2. 5. 5
Flam ing oil test
X
4. 6. 3. 3. 3
5. 2. 5. 6
Cem ented j oints test
X
4. 4. 7. 9
5. 2. 5. 7
Dry heat test
Xd
4. 9
5. 2. 6. 3. 1
Dam p heat test
Xd
4. 9
5. 2. 6. 3. 2
4. 7. 2. 3. 3
5. 2. 7
E n v i ro n m e n t a l
te s ts
X
H yd ro s t a t i c
p re s s u re
X
te s t
a
of a com ponent is not requi red when such
rel evant com ponent (5. 1 . 5. 2).
b
of a com ponent onl y applies when requi red by th e rel evant com pon ent standard or where a
com ponent stand ard d oes not exist.
T yp e
te s ti n g
Sam pl e
Sam pl e
te s ti n g
is not requi red when such
Com pliance with I m pulse voltag e
I EC 62040-2: 2005 imm unity
t yp e
d
te s ti n g
is perform ed by th e suppli er of the
te s ti n g
com ponent.
c
t yp e
te s ti n g
is perform ed by the su ppl i er of the relevant
requ irem ents m ay be satisfied in conjuncti on
(provi ded that the rel evant safety criteria are observed).
t yp e
te s t s
sam pl e
Com pliance with d ry an d d am p heat
I EC 62040-3: 201 1 dry and d am p heat
te s t
t yp e
t yp e
te s t s
requi rem ents is also satisfied in conjunction with
(provi ded that the rel evant safety criteria are observed ).
tes t
e
Precon ditionin g as descri bed i n 5. 2. 3. 1 , is n ot requi red.
f
Multi ple test are perm itted foll owing on e singl e precon ditionin g as described i n 5. 2. 3. 1 .
5. 2
with
T e s t s p e c i fi c a t i o n s
5. 2 . 1
Vi s u a l
i n s p e cti on s
( typ e
t e s t,
sam pl e
test an d
ro u t i n e
te s t)
Visu al inspections shall be m ade:
–
–
as routine tests, to check features such as ad equ acy of labelling, warnings and other
safety aspects;
as acceptance criteria of individu al type tests, sample tests or routine tests, to verify that
the requ irements of this standard have been m et.
Routine inspections may be part of the prod uction or assem bl y process.
d elivered for the test is as expected
Before
, a check shall be made that the
with respect to suppl y voltage, input and output ranges, etc.
t yp e
5. 2 . 2
5. 2 . 2 . 1
U PS
te s ti n g
M ech an i ca l
t e s ts
C l e a ra n c e s
and
c re e p a g e
d i s tan ce s
t e s t ( t yp e
te s t)
I t shall be verified by m easurement or visu al inspection that the clearance and creepage
distances comply with 4. 4. 7. 4 and 4. 4. 7. 5. See Annex D for m easurement exam ples. Where
this verification is im possible to perform , an impulse voltage test (see 5.2.3. 2) shall be
perform ed between the considered circuits.
5. 2 . 2 . 2
N o n -acces s i b i l i ty
te s t ( t yp e
te s t)
This test is intend ed to show that
compliance with 4. 4.3. 3 are not accessible.
l i ve
p a rt s
protected by m eans of
e n c l o s u re s
or barriers in
– 1 00 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
This test shall be performed as a
of the
of a
as specified in
I EC 60529 for the
classification for protection against access to hazardous parts.
Except for openings preventing vertical access as noted below:
typ e
te s t
e n c l o s u re
U PS
e n c l o s u re
A test probe for I P2X (1 2, 5 mm Ø) shall not penetrate the top surface of the
when probed from the vertical direction ± 5° onl y.
•
e n c l o s u re
Further, for
with a height not exceed ing 1 , 8 m , such openings shall not exceed 5 mm in
an y direction as per 4.4. 3.3.
U PS
Compliance is checked by inspection and test as above
5. 2 . 2 . 3
I n g re s s
The claimed I P
of the
classification.
p ro t e c t i o n
ra t i n g
t yp e
test
5. 2 . 2 . 4
(I P
ra t i n g )
e n c l o s u re
e n c l o s u re
E n c l o s u re
5. 2 . 2 . 4. 1
of the
te s t
i n t e g ri t y
of a
( typ e
t e s t)
shall be verified. This test shall be perform ed as a
as specified in I EC 60529 for the
U PS
te s t ( typ e
e n c l o s u re
t e s t)
G e n e ra l
, and also where
are intended for operation without a
The integrity tests appl y to
further
in
s . After completion of the integrity test, the
shall pass the tests of 5. 2. 3. 2 and 5. 2. 3.4 and shall be inspected to confirm that:
U PS
e n c l o s u re
–
–
–
–
–
–
re s t ri c t e d
U PS
a cce s s
U PS
a re a
no degradation of an y safety-relevant component of the
has occured ;
have not becom e accessible (see 4. 4. 3. 3);
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
show no cracks or openings which could cause a hazard ;
clearances are not less than their m inim um permitted values and other insulation is
undam aged ;
barriers have not been d amaged or loosened;
no m oving parts which cou ld cause a hazard are exposed.
UPS
h a z a rd o u s
l i v e p a rt s
e n c l o s u re s
The integrity tests shall be perform ed at the worst case point on representative accessible
face(s) of the
.
e n c l o s u re
is not required to be operational after testing and the
The
such an extent that its original I P
is not maintained.
U PS
e n c l o s u re
m ay be deform ed to
ra t i n g
5. 2. 2 . 4. 2
D e fl e c t i o n
5. 2 . 2 . 4. 2 . 1
G e n e ra l
te s t ( typ e
te s t)
I f requested by 4. 1 2. 1 the test in 5. 2. 2. 4. 2.2 and 5. 2. 2.4.2. 3 applies, for m etallic
as applicable.
The
shall be held firml y against a rigid support.
e n c l o s u re
,
e n c l o s u re
The tests are not applied to handles, levers, knobs or to transparent or translucent covers of
indicating or measuring devices, u nless parts at
are accessible by means
of the test finger (Figure 2, test probe B of I EC 61 032: 1 997) if the handle, lever, knob or cover
is rem oved.
During the tests of 5. 2. 2. 4.2. 2 and 5. 2. 2.4.2. 3, earthed or u nearthed conductive
shall not reduce clearance and creepage distances requ ired for
or withstand
the impulse voltage test in 5. 2.3.2.
h a z a rd o u s
vo l tag e
e n c l o s u re s
basi c
i n su l ati on
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
5. 2 . 2 . 4. 2 . 2
S t e a d y fo rc e
te s t ,
30
– 1 01 –
N
Parts of an
located in an
, which are protected by a cover
or d oor meeting the req uirements of 5. 2. 2. 4. 2. 3, are subjected to a stead y force of 30 N ± 3 N
for a period of 5 s, applied by means of a straight unjointed version of the test finger (Figure
2, test probe B of I EC 61 032: 1 997), to the part on or within the equ ipment.
e n c l o s u re
5. 2 . 2 . 4. 2 . 3
re s t ri c t e d
S t e a d y fo rc e
te s t ,
2 50
access
a re a
N
External
are subj ected to a stead y force of 250 N ± 1 0 N for a period of 5 s,
applied in turn to the top, bottom and sides of the
fitted to the equ ipm ent, by
means of a su itable test tool provid ing contact over a circular plane surface 30 mm in
diam eter. H owever, this test is not applied to the bottom of an
of equipment having
a mass of m ore than 1 8 kg or to surfaces that are mounted to a wall.
e n c l o s u re s
e n c l o s u re
e n c l o s u re
For surfaces neither horizontal nor vertical, test shall be performed by tilting the equ ipment in
a suitable way so that the surface is either horizontal or vertical.
5. 2 . 2 . 4. 3
I m p a ct
te s t ( t yp e
te s t)
External polym eric su rfaces of
hazardous parts, are tested as follows.
e n c l o s u re s
, the failure of which would give access to
A sam ple consisting of the complete
, or a portion thereof representing the largest
unreinforced area, is su pported in its normal position. A solid smooth steel ball, approxim atel y
50 mm in d iam eter and with a m ass of 500 g ± 25 g, is perm itted to fall freely from rest
through a vertical d istance ( H) of 1 , 3 m (see Figure 9) onto the sample. Vertical surfaces are
exempt from this test.
e n c l o s u re
In ad dition, the steel ball is suspend ed by a cord and swung as a pendulum in order to appl y a
horizontal impact, dropping through a vertical d istance ( H) of 1 , 3 m (see Figu re 9) onto the
sam ple. H orizontal surfaces are exem pt from this test. Alternativel y, the sam ple is rotated 90°
about each of its horizontal axes and the ball dropped as in the vertical impact test.
The test is not applied to flat panel displays or to the platen glass of equ ipment.
Steel ball
start position
H
Test
sample
Rigid supporting surface
Steel ball
impact position
Steel ball
start position
Rigid supporting surface
H
Test
sample
Steel ball
impact position
Rigid supporting surface
IEC 1213/12
F i g u re
9 – I m p a ct
te s t u s i n g
a steel
bal l
– 1 02 –
5.2.2.4.4
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Drop test
UPS with mass of 1 8 kg or less is subj ected to the following test.
A sam ple of the com plete eq uipment is subj ected to three impacts that result from being
dropped onto a horizontal surface in positions likely to produce the most ad verse results.
The horizontal surface shall consist of hard wood at least 1 3 mm thick, mounted on two layers
of pl ywood each 1 9 mm to 20 mm thick, all su pported on a concrete or equ ivalent nonresilient floor.
The height of the drop shall be 750 m m.
Compliance is verified in accordance with the requirements in 5. 2. 2.4. 1.
5.2.2.4.5
Stress relief test
En closures of mould ed or formed thermoplastic m aterials shall be so constructed that an y
shrinkage or distortion of the material due to release of internal stresses caused by the
moulding or form ing operation does not resu lt i n the exposure of hazardous parts or in the
reduction of creepage distances or clearances below the m inim um req uired .
Compliance shall be checked by the test procedure described below or by the inspection of
the construction and the available data where appropriate.
One sam ple consisting of the complete equipment, or of the com plete enclosu re together
with an y supporting framework, is placed in a circu lating air oven (accord ing to I EC 6021 6-41 ) at a temperature
0 K higher
than the
axim um temperature
of the
re during the
Get more 1FREE
standards
frommStandard
Sharing Group
andenclosu
our chats
test of 5. 2. 3.1 0, but not less than 70 °C, for a period of 7 h, then permitted to cool at room
tem perature.
With the concurrence of the manufacturer, it is perm itted to increase the above time duration.
For large eq uipment where it is im practical to condition a com plete enclosure , it is perm itted
to use a portion of the enclosu re representative of the com plete assem bly with regard to
thickness and shape, includ ing an y mechanical su pport mem bers.
5.2.2.5
Stability test
To prove the stability of the equipm ent the following tests shall be carried ou t, where relevant.
Each test is carried out separatel y. During the tests, reservoirs are to contain the amount of
liq uid within their rated capacity prod ucing the m ost disadvantageous cond ition. All castors
and jacks, if used in norm al operation, are placed in their most unfavourable position, with
wheels and the like locked or blocked. H owever, if the castors are intended onl y to transport
the unit, and if the installation instructions req uire jacks to be lowered after installation, then
the jacks (and not the castors) are used in this test; the jacks are placed in their most
unfavourable position, consistent with reasonable leveling of the unit.
A unit having a m ass of 7 kg or m ore shall not fall over when tilted to an angle of 1 0° from its
normal u pright position. Doors, drawers, etc. , are closed during this test. A u nit provided with
multi-positional features shall be tested in the least favourable position permitted by the
construction.
A floor-standing unit having a m ass of 25 kg or more shall not fall over when a force equal to
20 % of the weight of the unit, but not more than 250 N , is applied in an y direction except
upwards, at a height not exceeding 2 m from the floor. Doors, drawers, etc. , which m ay be
moved for servicing by the operator or by a service person, are placed in their m ost
unfavourable position, consistent with the installation instructions.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 03 –
A floor-standing u nit shall not fall over when a constant downward force of 800 N is applied at
the point of maximum m om ent to an y horizontal surface of at least 1 2, 5 cm by at least 20 cm ,
at a height up to 1 m from the floor. Doors, drawers, etc. , are closed during this test. The
800 N force is applied by means of a suitable test tool having a flat surface of approxim ately
1 2, 5 cm by 20 cm. The downward force is applied with the com plete flat surface of the test
tool in contact with the equ ipm ent under test; the test tool need not be in full contact with
uneven surfaces (for exam ple, corrugated or curved surfaces).
5.2.2.6
Wall, ceiling or rack mounted equipment test
5.2.2.6.1 01
Wall and ceilin g mounted equipment test
The eq uipment is mounted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A force in
addition to the weight of the equipm ent is appli ed downwards through the geometric centre of
the eq uipment, for 1 min. The add itional force shall be equ al to three tim es the weight of the
equipm ent but not less than 50 N . The eq uipment and its associated m ounting means shall
remain secure during the test.
5.2.2.6.1 02 Rack mounted equipment test
Requirem ents for rack-mounted equ ipment are listed in Annex GG .
5.2.2.7
Han dles and manual controls securement test
Handles and m anu al controls shall be tested by manual test and by trying to rem ove the
handle, knob, grip or lever by applying for 1 m in an axial force as shown in Table 23.
Table 23 – Pull values for handles and manual control securement
Axial pull u nlikel y
Axial pull likely
N
N
I ntented for operati on
by
Fingers
1 hand
2 hands
Fingers
1 hand
2 hands
Operatin g m eans of
com ponents a
15
1 00
200
30
1 50
300
Other
20
1 50
300
50
200
450
a Han dles, knobs, grips l evers and the l ike intented to operate com ponents, such as val ve controls,
electrical switch handl es etc.
Und er the tests above the handles, knobs, grips levers and the like shall remain fixed to the
equipm ent as intended.
5.2.2.1 01
Cord guard test
The equ ipment is so placed that the axis of the cord guard, where the cord leaves it, proj ects
at an angle of 45° when the cord is free from stress. A m ass equal to 1 0 D 2 g is then attached
to the free end of the cord, where D is the overall diameter of, or for flat cords, the m inor
overall dimension of the cord, in m illim eters. I f the cord guard is of temperature-sensitive
material, the test is m ade at 23 °C ± 2 °C. Flat cords are bent in the plane of least resistance.
I mmediately after the mass has been attached, the radius of curvature of the cord shall
nowhere be less than 1 , 5 D .
Compliance is checked by inspection, by measurement and, where necessary, by the test
above with the cord as delivered with the equipment.
5.2.3
Electrical tests
– 1 04 –
5. 2 . 3 . 1
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
G e n e ra l
The electrical tests described in 5. 2. 3. 2 to 5.2. 3. 5 are applicable to basic , supplementary and
. Before performing these tests, preconditioning accord ing to 5.2.6. 3. 1
and 5.2. 6. 3. 2 is req uired.
re i n fo rc e d
i n s u l a ti o n
When performing electrical and preconditioning tests, the preferred proced ure is to test the
entire equ ipm ent; however it is acceptable to test the com ponents or sub-assemblies
providing the basic and
. When components or sub-assemblies are
tested, test conditions shall sim ulate the least favourable conditions occurring insid e the
eq uipment at the place of
.
re i n fo rc e d
i n s u l ati on
i n stal l ati on
5. 2 . 3 . 2
Im pu l se
vo l tag e
t e s t ( t yp e
test an d
sam pl e
test)
The impulse voltage test is perform ed with a voltage having a 1 , 2/50 µ s waveform (see 6.1
and 6.2 of I EC 61 1 80-1 : 1 992) and is intended to simulate overvoltages of atm ospheric origin.
It also covers overvoltages d ue to switching of eq uipment. See Table 24 for cond itions of the
impu lse voltage test.
Tests on clearances smaller than requ ired by 4.4. 7. 4 and test on solid insulation required by
4. 4. 7.8 are performed as
using appropriate voltages from Table 25.
t yp e t e s t s
Tests on com ponents and devices for
and a
before they are assembled into the
voltages listed in colum n 3 or column 5 of Table 25.
p ro t e c t i v e
s am pl e
tes t
s e p a ra t i o n
U PS
are performed as a
, using the impu lse withstand
typ e
te s t
To ensure that
(see 4. 4. 7. 2.2, 4.4.7. 2. 3, 4. 4. 7. 3) are able to reduce
Get more
FREE standards
Standard
Group
our chats
as a
the overvoltage,
the values
of column from
2 or column
4 inSharing
Table 25,
are and
applied
to the
. The measured peak voltage shall not exceed the next lower voltage value of the
sam e colum n of that table.
s u rg e
p ro t e c t i v e
d evi ces
UPS
t yp e
tes t
If it is necessary to test a clearance that has been d esigned according to 4.4.7. 4. 1 for
altitudes between 2 000 m and 20 000 m (using Table A. 2 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007, which is
reproduced as Table E. 1 ) or test a clearance designed accord ing to 4. 4. 7. 1 1 for frequ encies
above 30 kH z, the appropriate test voltage m ay be determ ined from the clearance distance,
using Table 1 0 in reverse.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Tabl e
– 1 05 –
24 – I mpu lse
vol tag e
S u b j e ct
Te s t
test
co n d i ti o n s
Test reference
I EC 61 1 80-1 : 1 992, 6. 1 . and 6. 2; I EC 60664-1 : 2007: 6. 1 . 3. 3 1
Req uirement reference
According to 4. 4. 3. 2, 4. 4. 5. 4 and 4. 4. 7
Precon ditionin g
Precondition according to 5. 2. 3. 1
bel ong ing to the sam e circuit shall be con nected together.
m ay be d isconn ected unl ess req uired to be tested. I m pulse voltage to
be appli ed: 1 ) between circuit und er test and the su rrou ndi ng s; and 2) between
circuits to be tested. Power is not appl ied to circuits u nder test.
L i ve
p a rts
P ro t e c t i v e
i m p ed an ce s
, com ponent, or d evice.
I nitial m easurem ent
According to specification of
Test equi pm ent
I m pulse generator 1 , 2/50 µ s wi th an output im ped ance n ot hi g her th an:
– 2 Ω for surge
;
U PS
p ro t e c t i v e
–
Measurem ent and
verification
d e vi c e s
2 Ω for testing clearances, solid insulation an d com pon ents. A hi gh er
im pedance, but n ot m ore than 500 Ω , m ay be chosen, if the i m pulse voltag e
is verifi ed at the object un der test.
a)
b)
Clearances sm aller than requi red by
Table 1 0
Clearances reduced by
or by ci rcuit characteristics
s u rg e
basi c
or
p ro t e c t i v e
p ro t e c t i v e
d e vi c e
Solid
Com ponents and devices for
s e p a ra t i o n
Solid
re i n fo r c e d
i n s u l a ti o n
s u p p l e m e n ta ry
i n s u l a ti o n
Three pulses 1 , 2/50 µ s of each polarity i n ≥ 1 s interval,
peak voltage ( ± 5 %) accordin g to:
Test voltage
Colum n 2 or colum n 4 of Table 25
Colum n 3 or col um n 5 of Table 25
Altitude correcti on
When the test is carried out on a clearance at an altitud e less than 2 000 m , the test
voltage sh all be increased accord ing to Tabl e F. 5, 6. 1 . 2. 2. 1 . 1 , of I EC 60664-1 : 2007,
which is reprod uced as Tabl e E. 2 in this standard.
The altitude correction factor d oes not appl y to im pulse voltag e testing on solid
accordi ng to 6. 1 . 3. 3. 1 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
insulation
The im pulse voltage test is successfu ll y passed if no puncture of insulation , flashover, or
sparkover occurs. I n the case of com ponents and d evices which use solid insulation for
, a subsequent partial d ischarge test (see 5. 2.3.5) shall also be
passed.
p ro t e c t i v e
s e p a ra t i o n
– 1 06 –
Tabl e
Col u m n
1
2
I m pu l se
System voltage
(see
25 – I mpu lse
m ai n s
4. 4. 7 . 1 . 6 )
vo l ta g e
c i rc u i t s
su ppl y an d
a c c o rd i n g
Basi c
te s t
vo l tag e
3
wi th s ta n d
b e twe e n
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
to
fo r
4
insulation
co n n e c te d
to
or
c ateg o ry
c i rc u i t s
su ppl y an d
to
II
Re i n fo rc e d
vo l ta g e
fo r
co n n e c te d
insulation
to
t h e i r s u rro u n d i n g s
o v e rv o l t a g e
Basi c
s u p p l e m en tary
V
wi th s ta n d
b e twe e n
n on -
t h e i r s u rro u n d i n g s
o v e rv o l t a g e
I m pu l se
5
c a te g o ry
or
m ai n s
a c c o rd i n g
III
R e i n fo rc e d
s u p p l em en tary
V
V
V
< 50
500
800
800
1 500
1 00
800
1 500
1 500
2 500
1 50
1 500
2 500
2 500
4 000
300
2 500
4 000
4 000
6 000
600
4 000
6 000
6 000
8 000
1 000
6 000
8 000
8 000
1 2 000
NOTE 1
I nterpol ati on i s perm itted
V
I nterpol ati on i s n ot perm itted
Test voltag es for overvoltag e categ ories I and I I I can be d eri ved in a sim ilar way from Table 9.
NOTE 2 Test voltag es for overvoltag e categ ories I I and I V can be deri ved i n a sim ilar way from Table 9.
5. 2 . 3 . 3
Al t e rn a t i v e
to i m p u l s e
v o l ta g e
te s t ( typ e
tes t an d
sam pl e
te s t)
An a. c. or d.c. voltage test according to 5.2. 3. 4 may be used as an alternative method to the
Get more
FREE
from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
im pulse voltage
test of
5. 2. 3.standards
2.
For an a.c. voltage test the peak value of the a.c. test voltage shall be equal to the impulse
test voltage of Table 25 and applied for three cycles of the a. c. test voltage.
For a d.c. voltage test the average value of the d. c. test voltage shall be equal to the im pulse
test voltage of Table 25 and applied three tim es for 1 0 m s in each polarity.
See I EC 60664-1 : 2007, 6.1 . 2. 2. 2, for further inform ation.
5. 2 . 3 . 4
AC
5. 2 . 3 . 4. 1
or d . c.
vo l tag e
P u rp o s e
t e s t ( t yp e
test an d
ro u t i n e
te s t)
o f te st
The test is used to verify that the clearances and solid insulation of components and
assembled
have adeq uate dielectric strength to resist
conditions.
U PS
5. 2 . 3 . 4. 2
Va l u e
t e m p o ra ry
an d
t yp e
o v e rv o l t a g e
o f te s t v o l ta g e
The valu es of the test voltage for circuits connected to
colum n 2 or 3 of Table 26.
main s
The test voltage from column 2 is used for testing circuits with
su ppl y
basi c
are determ ined from
i n s u l a ti o n
.
Between circuits with
(
or
), the test
voltage of colum n 3 shall be applied for
. For
between circu its with
the values from column 2 shall be applied to prevent d amage to the
solid insulation by partial d ischarge.
p ro t e c t i v e
s e p a ra t i o n
t yp e
p ro t e c t i v e
s e p a ra t i o n
d ou bl e
t e s ts
re i n fo rc e d
ro u t i n e
te s ts
i n su l ati on
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 07 –
The values of column 3 shall appl y to
For circu its connected to
For
U PS
n o n -m a i n s
with
su ppl y
en h an ced
according to 4. 4. 3.
p ro t e c t i o n
the test voltage shall be:
circu its with
, and for all
: the
(a.c. r. m. s. or d.c.) as d etermined in 4. 4. 7. 2.3.
For
circu its with
, and between circuits and accessible
surfaces (non-conductive or conductive but not connected to protective earth,
accord ing to 4. 4. 6. 3): twice the
(a.c. r. m. s. or d.c. ) as
determ ined in 4. 4. 7. 2. 3.
–
t yp e
t e s ti n g
t e m p o ra ry
–
t yp e
simple
s e p a ra t i o n
ro u t i n e
t e s ti n g
o v e rv o l t a g e
te s ti n g
p ro t e c t i v e
s e p a ra t i o n
p ro t e c t i v e
cl a s s
II
t e m p o ra ry
For non-mains circu its, where
determ ined from Table 27, based on the
t e m p o ra ry
o v e rv o l t a g e s
w o rk i n g
o v e rv o l t a g e
are not present, the test voltages are
.
vo l tag e
The test is performed between circuits and accessible surfaces of
conductive or which are conductive but not connected to the
PE
U PS
c o n d u cto r
.
, which are non-
The voltage test shall be perform ed with a sinusoidal voltage at 50 H z or 60 H z. I f the circu it
contains capacitors the test m ay be perform ed with a d.c. voltage of a valu e equ al to the peak
value of the specified a.c. voltage.
Tabl e
2 6 – AC
or d . c.
te s t vo l ta g e
d i re c t l y
to m ai n s
fo r c i rc u i t s
con n ected
su ppl y
b
Col u m n
System voltage
(see
2
1
4. 4. 7. 1 . 6 )
Vo l ta g e
si m pl e
fo r t yp e
3
te s ti n g
s e p a ra t i o n ,
an d
testing
c i rc u i ts
fo r a l l
wi th
routine
Vo l ta g e
fo r t yp e
p ro t e c t i v e
c i rc u i t s
an d
a cces s i b l e
co n d u c ti ve
co n n e c te d
to
cl as s
II
te s ti n g
s e p a ra ti o n ,
c i rc u i ts
and
s u r fa c e s
o r co n d u c ti ve
p ro t e c t i v e
a c c o rd i n g
wi th
b e twe e n
bu t
e a rt h ,
to
(n on n ot
p ro t e c t i v e
4. 4. 6. 3 )
a
a. c.
r. m . s .
d . c.
a. c.
r. m . s .
d . c.
V
V
V
V
V
≤ 50
1 250
1 770
2 500
3 540
1 00
1 300
1 840
2 600
3 680
1 50
1 350
1 91 0
2 700
3 820
300
1 500
2 1 20
3 000
4 240
600
1 800
2 550
3 600
5 090
1 000
2 200
3 110
4 400
6 220
I nterpol ati on i s perm itted.
a
Correspon din g to 1 200 V +
b
A voltag e sou rce with a sh ort circuit current of at l east 0, 1 A accordin g to 5. 2. 2. 2 of I EC 61 1 80-1 : 1 992 is used
for this test.
s ys te m
vo l ta g e
.
– 1 08 –
Tabl e
27
– A. c .
or d . c.
n o n -m a i n s
tes t vol tag e
s u p p l y wi th o u t
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
fo r c i rc u i t s
t e m p o ra ry
co n n e cted
a
Col u m n
W o rk i n g
a
2
vo l ta g e
( re c u rri n g
(see
1
p eak)
Vo l ta g e
si m pl e
fo r t yp e
3
te s ti n g
s e p a ra t i o n ,
an d
testing
4. 4. 7. 1 . 6. 2 )
c i rc u i ts
fo r a l l
wi th
Vo l ta g e
fo r t yp e
c i rc u i t s
an d
co n n e c te d
to
cl as s
r. m . s .
te s ti n g
protective separati on ,
routine
a cces s i b l e
co n d u c ti ve
a. c.
to
o v e rv o l t a g e s
d . c.
a. c.
II
c i rc u i ts
an d
s u r fa c e s
o r c o n d u c ti v e
p ro t e c t i v e
a c c o rd i n g
wi th
b e twe en
bu t
e a rt h ,
to
r. m . s .
(n on n ot
p ro t e c t i v e
4. 4. 6. 3 )
d . c.
V
V
V
V
V
80
1
1
0
1
60
220
≤ 71
1 41
1 60
225
320
450
21 2
240
340
480
680
330
380
530
760
1 1 00
440
500
700
1 000
1 400
600
680
960
1 400
1 900
1 000
1 1 00
1 600
2 200
3 200
1 600
1 800
2 600
2 900
4 200
2 300
2 600
3 700
4 200
5 900
3 000
3 400
4 800
5 400
7 700
4 600
5 200
7 400
8 300
1 1 800
7 600
8 500
1 2 000
1 4 000
1 9 000
1 6 000
1 8 000
26 000
29 000
42 000
23 000
26 000
37 000
42 000
59 000
30 000
34 000
48 000
54 000
77 000
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
38 000
43 000
61 000
69 000
98 000
50 000
57 000
80 000
91 000
1 30 000
60 000
70 000
99 000
1 09 000
1 54 000
I nterpolati on is perm itted.
N OTE Test voltag es in this tabl e are based upon 80 % of the withstan d voltag e for the correspondi ng clearance of
Table 1 0 as provi ded by Tabl e A. 1 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
a
A voltage source with a short circuit current of at l east 0, 1 A accordi ng to 5. 2. 2. 2 of I EC 61 1 80-1 : 1 992 is used
for this test.
are performed to verify that clearances have not been reduced during the
manufacturing operations. Protective devices designed to reduce im pulse voltages on the
circuits under test (see 4. 4. 7. 2. 2 and 4. 4. 7. 2. 3), and circuits belonging to monitoring or
protection circu its, not designed to sustain the test overvoltage for the duration of the test,
shall be d isconnected in ord er to avoid dam age and to ensure that the test voltage can be
applied without a false indication of failure.
Ro u t i n e
5. 2 . 3 . 4. 3
te s ts
P e rfo rm i n g
th e
vo l tag e
te s t
The test shall be applied as follows, according to Figure 1 0:
a) Test (1 ) between accessible cond uctive part (connected to earth) and
seq uentiall y (except DVC As circuits). Test voltage according to Table 26,
colum n 2, correspond ing to voltage of considered circuit under test.
Test (2) between accessible surface (non conductive or cond uctive but not
earth) and each circuit sequentiall y (except DVC As circu its). Test voltage
Table 26 or Table 27, column 3 (for
) or colum n 2 (for
correspond ing to voltage of considered circu it under test.
t yp e
te s t
each circu it
or Table 27,
connected to
accord ing to
),
ro u t i n e
test
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 09 –
b) Test between each considered circu it sequentiall y and the other adjacent circuits
connected together. Test voltage accord ing to Table 26 or Table 27, column 2,
correspond ing to voltage of considered circu it under test. c
c) Test between DVC As circuit and each adjacent circuit sequ entiall y. Test voltage
accord ing to Table 26 or Table 27, colum n 3 (for type test ) or colum n 2 (for routine test ),
correspond ing to the circu it with the higher voltage. Either the adjacent circuit or the
DVC As circuit may be earthed for this test. I t is necessary to test basic insulation
between PELV and SELV circuits, bu t it is not necessary to test functional insulation
between adjacent PELV or adjacent SELV circuits.
Because PELV / SELV circuits and circu its of DVC C are typicall y separated from chassis
(earth) by basic insu lation , it is typicall y impossible to test double or reinforced
insulation separating low-voltage circu its from high-voltage circuits in a full y-assem bled
UPS without overstressing the basic insulation . Because of this, it m ay be necessary to
d isassem ble the U PS , or it may not be possible to perform type tests of protective
insulation at voltages accord ing to colum n 3 of Table 26 to Table 27. I n these cases the
type test of insulation used for protective separation shall be performed at voltages
accord ing to colum n 2 of the appropriate table.
Accessible surface
Adjacent circuit
Adjacent circuit
Adjacent circuit
Adjacent circuit
Considered circuit
under test
Considered
adjacent
circuit under test
Test
voltage
(2)
Considered circuit
under test
Test
voltage
(1 )
Test
voltage
Test
voltage
PELV or SELV
DVC A
circuit under test
Exposed conductive part
a)
b)
c)
IEC 1214/12
Figu re 1 0 – Voltage test procedures
The tests shall be perform ed with the doors of the enclosu re closed.
When the circu it is electricall y connected to accessible conductive parts, the voltage test is
not relevant, and m ay be om itted.
– 110 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
To create a continuous circuit for the voltage test on the U PS , term inals, open contacts on
switches and sem iconductor devices, etc. shall be bridged where necessary. Before testing,
sem icond uctor d evices and other vulnerable components within a circuit m ay be d isconnected
and/or their terminals bridged to avoid dam age occurring to them during the test.
Wherever practicable, individual components form ing part of the insulation under test, for
exam ple interference suppression capacitors, should not be d isconnected or bridged before
the test. I n this case, it is recomm ended to use the d.c. test voltage according to 5.2. 3. 4. 2.
Where the U PS is covered totall y or partl y by a non-conductive accessible su rface, a
cond uctive foil to which the test voltage is applied shall be wrapped around this surface for
testing. I n this case, the insulation test between a circuit and non-conductive accessible
surface m ay be perform ed as a sam pl e test instead of a rou ti n e test .
Rou ti n e testi n g
–
–
–
of the assembled U PS is not required if:
rou ti n e testi n g of all sub-assemblies related to the insulation system of the U PS is
performed; and
it can be demonstrated that final assembly will not compromise the insulation system ;
and
type testi n g of the full y-assembled U PS was perform ed successfu ll y.
Protecti ve i m ped an ces according to 4.4. 5. 4 shall either be inclu ded in the testing or the
connection to the protectivel y separated part of the circu it shall be opened before testing. I n
the latter case, the connection shall be carefu lly restored after the voltage test in order to
avoid an y dam age to the insulation . Protective screens accord ing to 4. 4. 4. 7 shall rem ain
connected to accessible cond uctive parts during the voltage test.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
5. 2. 3. 4. 4
Du rati on of th e a. c. or d . c. vol tag e test
The d uration of the test shall be at least 60 s for the type test and 1 s for the rou ti n e test .
The test voltage may be applied with increasing and /or decreasing ram p voltage but the full
voltage shall be m aintained for 60 s and 1 s respectivel y for type and rou ti n e tests .
5. 2. 3. 4. 5
Veri fi cati on of th e a. c. or d . c. vol tag e test
The test is successfu ll y passed if no el ectri cal breakd own occurs during the test .
5. 2. 3. 5
Parti al d i sch arg e test ( type test, sample test)
The partial discharge test shall confirm that the solid insulation (see 4. 4. 7. 8) used in
components and sub-assem blies for protecti ve separati on of electrical circuits rem ains
partial-discharge-free within the specified voltage range (see Table 28).
This test shall be performed as a type test and a sam pl e test . I t may be om itted for
insulating m aterials which are not d egraded by partial d ischarge, for exam ple ceramics.
The partial discharge inception and extinction voltage are influenced by clim atic factors (e. g.
temperature and m oisture), eq uipment self heating, and m anufacturing tolerance. These
influencing variables can be significant under certain conditions and shall therefore be taken
into accou nt during type testi n g .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 111 –
Table 28 – Parti al d i sch arg e test
Su bj ect
Test con d i ti on s
Test reference
6. 1 . 3. 5 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007
Req uirem ent reference
4. 4. 7. 8
Precon ditionin g
Precondition according to 5. 2. 3. 1
Li ve parts bel ong ing to the sam e circuit shall be con nected together.
I t is recomm ended th at the partial discharge test is perform ed after the im pulse
voltage test (see 5. 2. 3. 1 ) i n order th at an y d am age caused by the im pulse voltage
test is apparent.
I t is advisable that th e partial d ischarg e test is perform ed before insertin g the
com ponents or devices into th e equi pm ent because partial discharg e testing is
not norm ally possible when the equi pm ent is assem bled.
I nitial m easurem ent
According to specification of com ponent or d evice.
Test equi pment
Cali brated ch arge m easuri ng d evice or radi o interference m eter without wei ghti ng
filters.
Test circuit
C. 1 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
Test voltage
The peak valu e of a. c. 50 H z or 60 H z.
Test m ethod
6. 1 . 3. 5 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007:
I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
Cali bration of test equi pm ent
C. 4 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
Measurem ent
Starting from a voltage bel ow the rated partial disch arge test voltage UPD a , th e
voltage sh all be lin early i ncreased to 1 , 875 tim es UPD and hel d for a m axim um
ti m e of 5 s.
Verification
F
1
= 1 , 2;
F
2,
F
3
= 1 , 25. Test procedure 6. 1 . 3. 5. 3 of
The vol tage shall then be li nearly decreased to 1 , 5 tim es UPD ( ± 5 %) an d h eld for
a m axim um tim e of 1 5 s, duri n g which the parti al discharg e is m easured.
The test shall be consid ered to have been successfull y passed if the partial
discharge is less than 1 0 pC d uri ng the m easu rem ent period
U
1 ,875 UPD
1 ,5 UPD
≤5 s
≤1 5 s
t
IEC 1215/12
N OTE Parti al di scharge testin g of solid insulation with a d. c. worki n g vol tag e accord ing to A. 6. 3 can be om itted
a
The rated partial d ischarge test voltage
5. 2. 3. 6
U
PD
is the recurrin g peak voltag e m easured across the insulation .
Protecti ve i m ped an ce test (type test an d rou ti n e test)
A type test shall be perform ed to verify that the current through a protecti ve i m ped an ce
und er norm al operating or single-fault conditions d oes not exceed the valu es given in 4. 4. 3.4.
The test shall be perform ed using the circuit of I EC 60990: 1 999, Figure 4.
The test circu it of I EC 60990: 1 999, Figure 4, is reproduced in Annex L.
– 112 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
NOTE I EC 60990 states that the use of a sin gle network for the m easurem ent of a. c. combined wi th d. c. has not
been in vestigated, but no su gg estion is m ade for m easurem ent in such cases.
The valu e of the protective impedan ce shall be verified as a routine test .
5.2.3.7
Touch current measurement test (type test)
The touch current shall be m easured to determine if the m easures of protection need not be
taken (see 4. 4. 4. 3. 3). The U PS shall be set up in an insulated state withou t an y connection to
the earth and shall be operated at rated voltage . U nder these conditions, the tou ch current
shall be measured between the means of connection for the PE conductor and the PE
conductor itself with the test circu it of Figure 4 of I EC 60990: 1 999.
–
–
–
–
–
For a U PS to be connected to an earthed neutral system , the neu tral of the mains of the
test site shall be directl y connected to the PE con ductor .
For a UPS to be connected to an isolated system or impedance system , the neutral shall
be connected through a resistance of 1 k Ω to the PE conductor which shall be connected
to each inpu t phase in tu rn. The highest value will be taken as the definitive result.
For a U PS to be connected to a corner earthed system , the PE conductor shall be
connected to each input phase in turn. The highest val ue will be taken as the definitive
result.
For a U PS with a particu lar system earthing, this system shall operate as intended during
the test.
I f a U PS is intend ed to be connected to more than one system network, each of these
different system networks (or the worst-case, if that can be determ ined) shall be used to
m ake the touch cu rrent m easurement.
This is perform ed as a type test .
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Product stand ard committees shou ld consider the applicable effects of potential hazards as a
result of high frequency touch current , and consider appropriate test requ irements.
5.2.3.8
Capacitor discharge test (type test)
The capacitor d ischarge tim e as requ ired by 4. 4. 3.4 may be verified by a type test and/or by
calculation taking into account the relevant tolerances.
5.2.3.9
Limited power source test (type test)
When required by 4. 6. 5, a lim ited power circuit shall be tested as below, with the equipm ent
operating under normal operating conditions.
I n case the lim ited power sou rce requ irement depends on overcurrent protective device(s) in
Table 1 7, the device(s) shall be short-circuited.
With the limited power source in norm al operating condition, and with a variable resistive load
being the onl y load connected to the lim ited power source, the restive load shall be adjusted
to obtain the m axim um apparent power . Further adjustment is made, if necessary, to
maintain the maximum apparent power for the time period ind icated in Table 1 6 or Table 1 7,
as applicable.
With the lim ited power source in norm al operating cond ition, and with a variable resistive load
being the onl y load connected to the lim ited power source, the restive load shall be adjusted
to obtain the m axim um current. Further adj ustm ent is m ade, if necessary, to m aintain the
maxim um current for the tim e period indicated in Table 1 6 or Table 1 7, as applicable.
Simulated fau lts in a regu lating network, required according to 4. 6. 5, c), are applied u nder the
above m aximum m easured values.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 113 –
The test is passed, if after the test period the m aximum available apparen t power and
maxim um available current d o not exceed th e limits ind icated in Table 1 6 or Table 1 7, as
applicable.
5. 2. 3. 1 0
Tem peratu re ri se test (type test)
The test is intended to ensure that parts and accessible surfaces of the U PS do not exceed
the temperature lim its specified in 4. 6. 4 and the manufacturer’s temperature lim its of safetyrelevant parts.
Where possible, the U PS shall be tested at worst-case conditions of rated power and U PS
output current, taking derating and cooling control characteristic into account.
For equipm ent where the am ount of heating or cooling is d esigned to be d ependent on
tem perature (for example, the equ ipment contains a fan that has a higher speed at a higher
tem perature), the tem perature m easurem ent shall be perform ed at the worst case ambi ent
tem perature condition within the manufacturer's specified operating range.
I f this is not possible, it is perm itted to sim ulate the temperature rise, if the validity of the
simulation can be dem onstrated by tests at lower power levels.
The U PS shall be tested with at least 1 , 2 m of wire attached to each fi el d wi ri n g term i n al .
The wire shall be of the smallest size intended to be connected to the U PS as specified by the
manufacturer for installation. When there is onl y provision for the connection of bus-bars to
the U PS , they shall be of the m inim um size intended to be connected to the U PS as specified
by the m anufacturer, and they shall be at least 1 , 2 m in length.
The test shall be maintained until thermal stabilization has been reached . That is, when three
successive readings, taken at intervals of 1 0 % of the previousl y elapsed duration of the test
and not less than 1 0 m in intervals, indicate no change in temperature, defined as ± 1 °C
between an y of the three successive readings, with respect to the am bient temperature.
The tem perature of an electrical insulation (other than that of windings) is m easured on the
surface of the insulation at a point close to the heat source, if a failure of this insulation could
cause a hazard. I f temperatures of windings are m easured by the therm ocouple m ethod, the
thermocouple shall be located on the surface of the winding assum ing the hottest part due to
surrounding heat emitting com ponents. See also notes in Table 1 4.
The maxim um temperature attained shall be corrected to the rated ambient tem perature of the
U PS by adding the d ifference between the ambient temperature during the test and the
equipm ent’s m axim um rated ambient tem perature.
No corrected tem peratu re of the material or com ponent shall exceed the tem perature in
Table 1 4 or Table 1 03 as applicable.
During the test, therm al cutout, overload detection functions and d evices shall not operate.
5. 2. 3. 1 1
5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 1
Protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g tests (type tests an d rou ti n e test)
G en eral
Each conductive accessible part under consideration shall be tested separatel y, to d etermine
if the protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g path for that part is adequate to withstand the test
current that the bond ing path m ay be su bj ected to u nder fault conditions.
The circuit under consideration shall be selected from am ongst those circuits adjacent to the
accessible part under consid eration and separated from it by onl y basic or fu n cti on al
i n su l ati on .
– 114 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
All of these selected circu its have to be anal yzed regard ing prospective short circuit
current and the associated protective elem ent(s):
–
I f the circu it under consideration exceeds the 5 s disconnection time requ irement of
I EC 60364-4-41 , the protective equipotential bonding im pedance test of 5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 2 and
the protective equipotential bonding short circuit test of 5.2. 3. 1 1 . 3 have to be
perform ed.
N OTE 1 Exam ples for circuits with disconnection tim es of m ore than 5 s: non m ains circuits where the short
circuit current is lim ited by in tern al im ped ances or cu rrent lim i ters or by the load ch aracteristics like solar
pan els.
–
I f the circuit under consid eration m eets the 5 s d isconnection time requirement of
I EC 60364-4-41 , the protective equipotential bonding short circu it test of 5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 3 has
to be performed .
N OTE 2 Exam ples for circui ts with disconn ection tim es of not exceed ing 5 s: m ains circuits where the
prospective short ci rcuit current is lim ited by the im ped ance of the m ain.
–
I f the circuit under consideration m eets the disconnection tim e requirem ent of I EC 603644-41 : 2005, Table 41 .1 , as applicable, depending on the earthing system of the
installation , no type test is req uired.
For pluggable equ ipment type A only the the protective equipotential bonding im pedance
test of 5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 2 have to be perform ed .
The testing shall includ e an individu al test of the protective equipotential bonding path for
each conductive accessible part unless anal ysis shows that the short circuit withstand
capability of the path is adequate, or that the results of one combination are representative of
the anticipated results of another combination.
more FREEequipotential
standards from
Standard
Sharing
5.2.3.1 1 .2 Get Protective
bonding
impedan
ce Group
test and our chats
5.2.3.1 1 .2.1
Test con ditions
Where req uired by 4. 4. 4. 2. 2 and 5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 2. 1 , the im ped ance of protective equipotential
bonding m eans shall be checked by passing a test current through the bond for a period of
tim e. The test current is based on the ratin g of the overcurrent protection for the eq uipment
or part of the equipm ent under consid eration, as follows:
–
–
–
for pluggable equipment type A, the overcurrent protective d evice is that provided
external to the equipm ent (for example, in the building wiring, in the mains plug or in an
eq uipment rack);
for pluggable equipment type B and permanently connected equipment, the m axim um
ratin g of the overcurrent protective device specified in the equ ipment installation
instructions to be provid ed external to the equ ipment;
the rating of the provid ed overcurrent device for a circuit or part of the eq uipment for
which an overcurrent protective d evice is provid ed as part of the equ ipm ent.
Voltages are measured from the protective earth ing terminal to all the parts whose
protective equipotential bonding m eans are being considered. The im ped ance of the PE
conductor is not includ ed in the measurem ent. However, if the PE conductor is supplied
with the equipm ent, it is perm itted to inclu de the conductor in the test circuit, but the
m easurem ent of the voltage drop is mad e onl y from the m ain protective earthing term inal to
the accessible part required to be earthed .
On eq uipment where the protective earth connection to a sub-assem bl y or to a separate unit
is part of a cable that also supplies power to that sub-assem bl y or u nit, the resistance of the
protective equipotential bonding conductor in that cable is not included in the protective
equipotential bonding im pedance m easurements for the sub-assem bl y or separate u nit as in
Figure 1 1 . H owever, this option is only perm itted if the cable is protected by a su itabl y rated
protective device that takes into accou nt the size of the conductor. Otherwise the im ped ance
of the protective equipotential bonding cond uctor between the separate units is to be
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 115 –
inclu ded , by measuring to the protective earthing terminal where the power source enters
the first u nit in the system , as in Figure 1 2.
Separate unit
UPS
Sub-assembly
1
6
5
Protection
2
3
Accessible
part
Accessible
part
4
Voltage
m eter
7
Voltage
m eter
IEC 1 21 6/1 2
Key
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
protecti ve equipoten ti al bondi ng
PE conductor for th e separate unit
PE conductor for th e UPS
energ y suppl y from the m ains
energ y suppl y from the UPS to the separate un it
term inal point of th e external PE conductor
term inal point of th e PE con ductor for th e separate unit
Figure 1 1 – Protective equipotential bonding impedan ce test for separate u nit
with power fed from the U PS with protection for the power cable
– 116 –
UPS
Accessible
part
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Sub-assembly
Accessible
part
Sub-assembly
Voltage
meter
5
1
6
7
3
2
4
Voltage
meter
IEC 1 21 7/1 2
Key
1 =
2 =
3 =
4 =
5 =
6 =
7 =
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
protecti ve equipoten ti al bondi ng
protecti ve equipoten ti al bondi ng for the su b-assem bly
PE conductor for th e UPS
energy suppl y from the m ains
energ y suppl y from the UPS to the sub-assem bly
term inal point of th e external PE conductor
connecti on point of th e bondi ng to the su b-assem bly (m ay be m ore than 1 )
Figure 1 2 – Protective equipotential bon ding impedance test for su b-assembly
with accessible parts and with power fed from the U PS
The test current is derived from an a.c or d. c suppl y source, the ou tpu t of which is not
earthed.
NOTE For protection of the person perform ing the test, the source sh oul d h ave a m axim u m no-load voltage bel ow
the lim its for DVC A .
5.2.3.1 1 .2.2
Test cu rrent, du ration and acceptance criteria
The test current, duration of the test and acceptance criteria are as follows.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 117 –
Tabl e 29 – Test d u rati on for protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g test
Overcu rren t p rotecti ve d evi ce rati n g
Du rati on of th e tes t
A
min
up to 32
2
33 to 63
4
64 to 1 00
6
1 01 to 200
8
201 to 460
10
a) For U PS with an overcu rrent protective device rati n g of 1 6 A or less, this test may be
omitted, if an impedance not exceeding 0, 1 Ω can be dem onstrated.
b) As an alternative to Table 29, where the time-current characteristic of the overcurrent
protective device that limits the fault current in the protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g
m eans is known because the d evice is either provided in the eq uipment or fu ll y specified
in the installation instructions, the test d uration m ay be based on that specific device’s
tim e-current characteristic. The tests are cond ucted for a duration corresponding to the
200 % current value on the tim e-current characteristic.
c) For U PS with an overcurrent protective device rati n g of m ore than 460 A, calcu lations or
simulations accord ing to I EC 60949 shall be used to show the ability of the prospecti ve
sh ort ci rcu i t cu rren t to fulfill the req uirem ents. The protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g
continu ity rou ti n e test of 5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 4 shall be performed to show that the im pedance of the
protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g m eans d uring and at the end of the test shall not
exceed the expected value.
Acceptance criteria:
The test current is 200 % of the overcurrent protective device rati n g and the duration of the
test is as shown in Table 29. The voltage drop in the protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g
means, during and at the end of the test, shall not exceed DVC As , as determ ined from
Table 2 and Table 5 with respect to the accessible surface of the en cl osu re .
After the tests, visual inspection shall show no dam age to the protecti ve eq u i poten ti al
m eans.
bon d i n g
5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 3
Protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g sh ort ci rcu i t wi th stan d test (type test)
As required by 5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 2. 1 the short circuit test in 5. 2. 4.3 shall be performed to ensure that
protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g has the ability to withstand the prospecti ve sh ort ci rcu i t
cu rren t that it m ay be subjected to u nder fault cond itions.
The testing shall include an ind ividual test of the protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g path for
each conductive accessible part unless anal ysis shows that the short circuit withstand
capability of the path is adeq uate, or that the results of one combination are representative of
the anticipated results of another combination.
5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 4
Protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g con ti n u i ty test ( routine test )
The protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g continu ity routine test shall be cond ucted when:
–
–
–
the continuity of the protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g i s achieved by a single means
onl y (for example a single conductor or a single fastener); or
the U PS is assem bled at the i n stal l ati on location; or
if requ ired by 5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 2. 2 c).
– 118 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
The test current m ay be an y convenient value sufficient to allow measurem ent or calcu lation
of the resistance of the protecti ve eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g means.
NOTE Larger cu rrents used for th e conti nuity test increases the accuracy of the test result, especi ally with low
im pedance valu es, i. e. l arger cross sectional areas and/or l ower cond uctor len gth. I n gen eral 25 A is considered
sufficient for m ost prod ucts.
The expected value of the resistance is the resu lt of calculation or simu lation according to
5. 2. 3. 1 1 . 2.2 consid ering the length, the cross sectional area and the m aterial of the related
protective bonding condu ctor(s).
Acceptance criteria: the resistance m easured shall be within 90 % upto 1 1 0 % of the expected
value.
5. 2. 3. 1 01
5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 1
Backfeed protecti on test (type test)
G en eral
A U PS shall not allow excessive tou ch cu rren t s to be available between an y pairs of inpu t
suppl y terminals of the U PS during its stored en erg y m od e of operation. Where the
measured open-circuit voltage d oes not exceed 30 V RMS (42, 4 V peak, 60 V DC), the tou ch
cu rren t m easurem ent need not be taken.
Compliance is checked by tests as described in 5.2. 3. 101.2, 5.2.3. 101.3 and 5. 2.3.101. 5, if
applicable. The single-fault condition shall be determined by applying a short-circuit across
any components where failure could adversely affect the backfeed protection , or by
disconnecting such components.
5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 2Get
Test
forFREE
pl u g gstandards
abl e U PS from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
more
The U PS shall initiall y operate in norm al m ode. The AC input term inals or plu g(s) shall then
be disconnected . This shall cause the U PS to operate in stored en erg y m od e . When tested
under no-load, under full-load and under load-induced change of reference potential
cond itions as d escribed in 5. 2.3.1 01 . 4, the following com pl ying perform ance shall be verified:
a) the current shall not exceed 3, 5 m A when measured between an y two input terminals or
parts accessible by an ord i n ary person , using the m easurement instru ments shown in
Annex L;
b) the protection shall operate within 1 s for pl u g g abl e type A and within 5 s for pl u g g abl e
type B U PS of the d isconnection of the inpu t term inals.
A single-fault cond ition shall then be applied. The test above shall be repeated and the
com pliance shall again be verified.
5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 3
Test for perm an en tl y con n ected U PS
The U PS shall initiall y operate in norm al m ode. The AC input term inals, except for the
protective earth conductor, shall then be disconnected from the AC supply. This shall cause
the U PS to operate in stored en erg y m od e . When tested under no-load and u nder full-load
conditions, the following com pl ying perform ance shall be verified.
a) the current shall not exceed 3, 5 m A when m easured between an y two input term inals,
using the measurem ent instruments shown in Annex L;
b) the protection shall operate within 1 5 s of the disconnection of the input term inals.
A single-fault condition shall then be applied. The test above shall be repeated and the
com pliance shall again be verified .
Where a backfeed protecti on isolation device is provided externall y, compliance shall be
determined by relevant circu it diagram inspection and by dem onstrating that the m eans
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 119 –
required to operate the external backfeed isolating device is within the U PS m anufacturer’s
specifications for such circu it to operate.
5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 4
M eth od to si m u l ate th e l oad -i n d u ced ch an g e of referen ce poten ti al for
pl u g g abl e U PS
The m ethod detailed in 5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 4 is used to create the change of reference poten tial
requ ired in 5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 2. Change of reference potential can be caused by summation of
otherwise com pl ying load-ind uced earth currents and may arise when a U PS operate in
stored en erg y m od e . This cond ition is sim ulated by appl ying the test circu its of Figures 1 02
or 1 03. Figure 1 03 applies for 3-phase system s and simu lates also the effect of asym metrical
single-phase loads.
NOTE 1
Som e countries req uire th e i nput n eutral to be open ed tog ether with the phases eith er in the build ing
or i n the transm ission system . I n this case, the U PS voltag e potenti al of neutral i nput is of concern
unless it is clearl y stated in th e installation g uid e that the U PS is for use with symm etrical 3-phase loads on ly.
i n stal l ati on
NOTE 2
5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 4 applies to plu ggable U PS (see 5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 2).
NOTE 3 C sim ulates the capacitance of concern. Th e valu e of C is fixed as shown i n Figu res 1 02 and 1 03.
L1
•
o
R
UPS
L2
N o
•
C
PE
•
o
C = 22 nF
C
•
IEC
Fi g u re 1 02 – Test ci rcu i t for l oad -i n d u ced
ch an g e of referen ce poten ti al – Si n g l e-ph ase ou tpu t
•
L1 o
L2 o
UPS
L3 o
N o
P
E o
•
3xR
•
•
C = 22 n F
•
IEC
Fi g u re 1 03 – Test ci rcu i t for l oad -i n d u ced ch an g e
of referen ce poten ti al – Th ree-ph ase ou tpu t
The valu e of resistive load R shall be equal to that specified as the maximum load at u nity
power factor by the manu facturer.
5. 2. 3. 1 01 . 5
Sol i d -state backfeed protecti on
I n add ition to 5. 2. 3.1 01 . 2 and 5. 2. 3.1 01 . 3 req uirem ents, when backfeed protecti on relies on
solid-state power isolation d evice(s), and if the isolation devices are not red und ant, the
com ponents necessary to ensure backfeed protecti on shall withstand the effects of im munity
– 1 20 –
requirements
5. 2. 6.
5. 2 . 3 . 1 0 2
of
I EC 62040-2: 2005,
I n p u t c u rre n t
Clause
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
7,
and
of
environmental
testing
in
te s t
At rated input voltage in accord ance with 6. 2 a) and with the energ y storage d evice
disconnected (or full y charged), measure the stead y state input current of the
when
suppl ying its
.
U PS
ra t e d
l oad
Under the same
and inpu t voltage conditions, m easure or alternativel y extrapolate
the rated input current due to the com bined effects resul ting from battery recharge current at
rated input voltage(s)
ra t e d
a) For
b) For
U PS
U PS
l oad
with separate
input, the
rated input current shall be evaluated .
with other inpu ts, the other rated inpu t current shall be evaluated by test.
b yp a s s
b yp a s s
NOTE the m anufactu rer is al erted to the possible infl uence of input voltage tol erance on the input current bein g
drawn.
Where the
has more than one rated input voltage, the input current is m easured at each
rated input voltage.
U PS
5. 2 . 3 . 1 0 3
S h o rt - t i m e
5. 2 . 3 . 1 0 3. 1
G e n e ra l
w i th s ta n d
c u rre n t t e s t ( t y p e
te s t)
p ro c e d u re
The
AC inpu t shall be connected to a supply capable of delivering the prospective test
current in accordance with Table 1 04. The
shall be in the appropriate mode of operation
(see 4.3.1 03. 2) and otherwise operating without load and at rated input voltage and
more FREE
standards
Standard
Group
and our
freq uency. Get
A short-circu
it shall
then be from
applied
acrossSharing
the output
terminals
of chats
the
.A
rated for m ultiple inputs may be tested at an y of its rated input voltages, provided that
applicable interrupting com ponents have been certified or tested to interrupt the prospective
test current at the highest rated input voltage. Each
AC inpu t
shall be tested
ind ividuall y.
U PS
U PS
U PS
U PS
NOTE 1
The m anufacturer can opt to perform additi onal tests at other
ra t e d
U PS
p o rt
vo l ta g e s
and currents.
NOTE 2 For consid eration in a future edition of this d ocum ent, the m aking capability of the short-ci rcuit current
into the
can be verifi ed for safety pu rposes. Such verificati on coul d involve tests or anal ysis
of com ponent docum entati on. Exam ples include a
that, in norm al m ode of operation, does not suppl y the
output term inals th rough a
, but that, upon applicati on of a sh ort-circuit across the output
term inals, autom aticall y transfers into a
.
l ow
i m ped an ce
p a th
U PS
low
i m p ed an ce
p a th
l ow i m ped an ce
pa th
NOTE 3 For consi deration i n a future edition of this docum ent it will be evaluated whether tests would be
perm itted at voltages lower th an rated and, su bject to the phase current flowing th roug hout the m inim um duration
listed in Tabl e 1 04, wh eth er th e m anufacturer could th en declare the Icw to be the phase current record ed d uri ng
the test.
that provid e single phase ou tpu t shall be tested by appl ying a short-circu it across the
ou tpu t phase to neu tral conductors.
U PS
that provid e m ulti-phase output shall be tested by applying a short-circuit across all
ou tpu t phase cond uctors. A single test with all phase cond uctors shorted together is an
acceptable means of conducting the test.
U PS
that provid e mu lti-phase and a neutral output shall also be tested by placing a shortcircuit across the neutral conductor and the phase conductor closest to the neutral term inal
when the latter is provided . H owever, the phase-to-neu tral test is not req uired when the
neu tral construction is at least as robust as that of the phase cond uctors in terms of crosssectional area, m echanical support and clearance.
U PS
I n the case where a
AC input
does not have a
between the
input
and ou tput port, the short-circuit shall be applied by means of a shorting cable or
U PS
p o rt
p o rt
l ow
i m ped an ce
p ath
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 21 –
busbar of cross sectional area not less than the cross sectional area of the m anufacturers
recom mended input wiring for one phase conductor. The length and installation of the shorting
cable or busbar shall be selected so as to present negligible im ped ance.
The
shall be in the appropriate m odes of operation (see 4. 3.1 01 . 2) and otherwise
operating without load and at rated input voltage and frequency.
U PS
A new
sam ple or a repaired
U PS
U PS
may be used for each short-circuit test.
Exception: I t is acceptable to perform the test on an un-energized
anal ysis that test results will not be affected.
if it can be shown by
U PS
NOTE 4 Exam ples of this exem ption includ e testing of:
– a m ai ntenance
path, and
– a
desig n that req uires application of an i nternal short-circuit.
b yp a s s
U PS
I f the m anufacturer declares a
Table 1 04, the declared valu e applies for test purposes.
ra t e d
s h o rt - t i m e
wi th s tan d
c u rre n t
higher than shown in
The test setup is considered su itable when the prospective test current has been m ade
available for the m inim um duration listed in Table 1 04.
Tabl e
1 0 4 – S h o rt - t i m e
P ro s p e c t i v e
Ra t e d
o u tp u t
I
te s t
c u rr e n t
wi th s ta n d
c u rre n t
a
UPS
Minimum
I
c u rr e n t
I n i ti a l
cp
( RM S )
T yp i c a l
( RM S )
A
peak
p o w e r fa c t o r
Ab
1 000
cd
e
a s ym m e t ri c
c u rr e n t
(I
pk
0, 95
/
I
cw
ra ti o
e
)
d u ra t i o n
o f p ro s p e c t i v e
c u rre n t
1 ,5
0, 7
1 , 53
1 ,5
1 0 000
0, 5
1 , 70
1 ,5
400 < I ≤ 500
1 0 000
0, 5
1 , 70
3, 0
500 <
20 × I or 50 kA
which ever is the l ower
0, 5–0, 3 × ( Icp / 20 –
500)/2000
or 0, 2, which ever is th e
high er
(0, 5 Icp /20 + 31 50) /
2000 or 2, 2,
whichever is the
lower
3, 0
≤ 16
3 000
0, 9
1 6 < I ≤ 75
6 000
75 < I ≤ 400
I
N OTE 1 Dependi ng on th e characteristics of the
different from those listed in thi s table.
U PS
N OTE 2 Refer to 6. 4. 3. 1 02 for con ditions appl yin g if the
table.
te s t
(cycles 50/60 H z)
1 , 42
I
f
, the actu al valu es observed d uri ng th e test can be
Icp
valu e decl ared is hi gh er than that specified i n this
NOTE 3 The m inim um duration of prospecti ve test current can be i ncreased when requi red by n ational d eviation.
a
Prospecti ve test current, in th e context of this docum ent, shall be und erstood as
( I ), see 3. 1 22.
c u rre n t
p ro s p e c t i v e
s h o r t - c i rc u i t
cp
b
Values com patible with I EC 60947-6-1 : 2005/I EC 60947-6-1 : 2005/AM D1 : 201 3, Tabl e 4.
c
Plugg abl e
d
The typical fault current of pu blic suppl y networks rated 75 A and bel ow and intend ed to suppl y eq uipm ent
wi th a
of 1 6 A or bel ow can be calculated from the reference im pedances in
I EC TR 60725: 2005: ph ase conductor 0, 24 + j0, 1 5 Ω and neutral conductor 0, 1 6 + j0, 1 0 Ω . For 230 V/400 V
suppli es, this results in typical fault currents of 0, 5 kA (230 V) and 0, 7 kA (400 V).
U PS
ra t e d
onl y.
c u rr e n t
e
From I EC 60947-1 : 2007, Table 1 6.
f
From I EC 60947-6-1 : 2005/I EC 60947-6-1 : 2005/AMD1 : 201 3, 5. 3. 6. 1 .
– 1 22 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Where a
has an AC input with no
between the AC input and the AC
output, a short-circuit shall be applied imm ediatel y before the point where the input path no
longer presents negligible impedance.
U PS
l ow i m ped an ce
p ath
Compliance is checked when, at the conclusion of the test, the following criteria are satisfied.
a) The UPS shall not have emitted flames, molten metal or burning particles, other than, for
example, metal particles normally emitted from a circuit breaker when it clears a fault.
NOTE 5 Further guidance, if applicable, is found in 4. 6.
b) There shall have been no arcing from live parts to the UPS chassis or enclosure .
An intact enclosure test fuse as described in Annex EE indicates compliance.
The use of an enclosure test fuse is not applicable for UPS with non conductive chassis
or enclosure (e.g. plastic case).
c) Components, for example busbar supports, used for the mounting of live parts shall not
break away from their initial position.
d) Any enclosure door shall not open rapidly (so as to cause injury) when protected only by
its normal latch.
e) No conductor shall get pulled out of its terminal connector and there shall be no damage
to the conductor or conductor insulation.
f) The UPS shall successfully pass the AC or DC voltage test (dielectric strength test) as
specified in 5.2.3. 4.
5. 2 . 3 . 1 0 3. 2
I n p u t p o rt ra t e d
con d i ti on al
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
I f the manufacturer declares a
, the
)
shall
be
determ
ined
in
accordance
with
Table
1 04.
(
I
cp
Get more FREE standards
from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
ra t e d
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
con d i ti on al
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
p ro s p e c t i v e
t e s t c u rre n t
I f the m anufacturer declares a rated
shown in Table 1 04, the declared value shall be used as the
( Icp ).
co n d i ti o n a l
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
p ro s p e c t i v e
ra t i n g
higher than
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
test
c u rre n t
All
s shall be installed within the
and, if applicable,
external to the
in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions. I f internal or external
alternate
s are specified by the manufacturer, testing shall be
performed with each alternate
.
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
p ro t e c t i v e
d evi ce
U PS
U PS
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
p ro t e c t i v e
d evi ce
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
NOTE 1
c i rc u i t
p ro t e c t i v e
d evi ce
M ultipl e m anufacturers or part num bers of m olded case circuit breakers are exam ples of alternate
p ro t e c t i v e
d e vi c e s
.
s h o rt -
After the short-circu it test current is m ad e available at the
input port, the test is
considered com plete wh en the minimum duration of the prospective test current listed in
Table 1 04 has elapsed . This is irrespective of whether the current has ceased to flow u pon
opening of an internal or external protective d evice or mechanism, or due to the occurrence of
a com ponent failure.
U PS
The shorting switch SW or an y installed shorting cables or busbars shall remain closed until
the minimum d uration of the prospective test current listed in Table 1 04 has elapsed.
Compliance is checked when, at the completion of the test, the following criteria are satisfied.
a) The UPS shall not have emitted flames, molten metal or burning particles, other than, for
example, metal particles normally emitted from a circuit breaker when it clears a fault.
NOTE 2 Further guidance, if applicable, is found in 4. 6.
b) There shall have been no arcing from live parts to the UPS chassis or enclosure .
An intact enclosure test fuse as described in Annex EE indicates compliance.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
c)
d)
e)
f)
– 1 23 –
The use of an enclosure test fuse is not applicable for UPS with non conductive chassis
or enclosure (e.g. plastic case).
Components, for example busbar supports, used for the mounting of live parts shall not
break away from their initial position.
Any enclosure door shall not open rapidly (so as to cause injury) when protected only by
its normal latch.
No conductor shall get pulled out of its terminal connector and there shall be no damage
to the conductor or conductor insulation.
The UPS shall successfully pass the AC or DC voltage test (dielectric strength test) as
specified in 5.2.3. 4.
After testing the
5. 2 . 3 . 1 0 3. 3
U PS
is not req uired to be operational.
I n p u t p o rt
s h o rt - t i m e
wi th s tan d
c u rre n t
ra t i n g
I f the manufacturer declares a short-time withstand current
, the prospective shortcircuit test current ( Icp ) shall be determ ined in accordance with Table 1 04.
ra t i n g
I f the manufacturer declares a short-tim e withstand current
higher than shown in
Table 1 04, the declared value shall be used as the prospective short-circuit test current ( Icp ).
ra t i n g
The test is considered com plete when the prospective test current has been m ade available
for the minimum duration of the prospective test current listed in Table 1 04. Although the
actual current flowing m ay be different from the prospective short-circuit test current ( Icp ), the
prospective short-circu it test current shall be the d eclared short-time withstand current
.
ra t i n g
Compliance is checked when, at the completion of the test, the following criteria are satisfied.
a) The UPS shall not have emitted flames, molten metal or burning particles, other than, for
example, metal particles normally emitted from a circuit breaker when it clears a fault;
NOTE 1 Further guidance, if applicable, is found in 4. 6.
b) There shall have been no arcing from live parts to the UPS chassis or enclosure ;
An intact enclosure test fuse as described in Annex EE indicates compliance.
The use of an enclosure test fuse is not applicable for UPS with non conductive chassis
or enclosure (e.g. plastic case)
c) Components, e. g. busbar supports, used for the mounting of live parts shall not break
away from their initial position;
d) Any enclosure door shall not open rapidly (so as to cause injury) when protected only by
its normal latch;
e) No conductor shall get pulled out of its terminal connector and there shall be no damage
to the conductor or conductor insulation;
f) The UPS shall successfully pass the AC or DC voltage test (dielectric strength test) as
specified 5.2.3. 4.
After testing the
5. 2 . 3 . 1 0 3. 4
U PS
is not requ ired to be operational.
E xe m p t i o n
fro m
t e s ti n g
Exemption from short-tim e withstand cu rrent testing applies to:
a)
b)
with declared I and/or I neither of which exceed ing 1 0 kA;
protected by current-lim iting devices having a cut-off current not exceeding 1 7 kA
with the maxim um allowable
at the terminals of the
incoming circuit of the
;
U PS
cw
cc
U PS
p ro s p e c t i v e
U PS
s h o rt - c i rc u i t
c u rre n t
– 1 24 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
c) UPS intended to be supplied from transformers whose rated power does not exceed
1 0 kVA per phase for a rated secondary voltage of not less than 1 1 0 V, or 1 , 6 kVA per
phase for a rated secondary voltage less than 1 1 0 V, and whose short-circu it impedance
is not less than 4 %;
d) UPS variants of a reference design UPS tested compliant with the test req uirem ents
prescribed in 5. 2. 3. 1 03. 1 .
For gu idance on how to determine when a UPS is a variant of a reference d esign UPS , refer
to I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 1 0. 1 1 . 3 and Table 1 3, or 1 0. 1 1 . 4.
NOTE The exem ption conditi ons above ali gn this d ocum ent with I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 1 0. 1 1 . 2.
Compliance is checked by satisfying at least one of the exemption conditions.
5.2.3.1 04 Transformer protection test
Transform ers shall be tested in the UPS for overload , and abnormal tests.
The following conditions appl y:
I f the tests in 5. 2. 3. 1 04 are cond ucted u nder sim ulated conditions on the bench, these
conditions shall includ e an y protective device that wou ld protect the transform er in the
com plete equ ipment. Transformers for switch m ode power suppl y units are tested in the
com plete power suppl y unit or in the complete equ ipment. Test loads are applied to the output
of the power suppl y u nit. A linear transformer or a ferro-resonant transform er has each
secondary wind ing loaded in turn, with an y other secondaries loaded between zero and their
specified m axim a to resu lt in the m axim um heating effect. The output of a switch m ode power
suppl y unit is loaded to result in the maximum heating effect in the transformer.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
NOTE For exam ples of l oad in g to gi ve th e m axim um heating effect, see Annex FF.
Table 1 05 – Temperature limits for transformer windings
Maximum temperature°C
Thermal class
Method of protection
(a)
1 05
1 20
1 30
1 55
1 80
200
220
250
(A)
(E)
(B)
(F)
(H )
(N )
(R)
(-)
Protection by i nh erent or external im pedance
1 50
1 65
1 75
200
225
245
265
295
Protection by protective device that operates
during th e first hour
200
21 5
225
250
275
295
31 5
345
1 75
1 90
200
225
250
270
290
320
1 50
1 65
1 75
200
225
245
265
295
Protection by an y protecti ve d evice:
– m axim um after first hou r
–
(a)
ari thm etic average du rin g the 2 n d hou r
and during the 72 n d h ou r
Th e desi gn ations A to R, form ely assigned in I EC 60085 to therm al classes 1 05 to 220, are given i n parentheses.
The test is lim ited to transform ers th at bridge basic, supplem entary or reinforced insulation ;
or that provide power external to the product.
The text in 5. 2.3.1 04 referencing transformer also applies to magnetic components in general.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 25 –
Compliance is verified when the maximum temperature of the transformer does not exceed
the values in Table 105 and determined as specified below:
– with external overcurrent protection: at the moment of operation, for determination of the
time until the overcurrent protection operates, it is permitted to refer to a data sheet of the
overcurrent protective device showing the trip time versus the current characteristics;
– with an automatic reset thermal cut-out and after a test duration of 400 h.
– with a manual reset thermal cut-out: at the moment of operation or after temperature has
stabilized;
– for current-limiting transformers: after temperature has stabilized.
5. 2. 3. 1 05
5. 2. 3. 1 05. 1
U n syn ch ron i sed l oad tran sfer test
G en eral
The unsynchronised load transfer requirement specified in 4. 3.1 05 shall be simulated with the
operating in normal mode and in stored en erg y m od e while suppl ying its rated
reference load.
U PS
The test in n orm al m od e is waived for U PS wherein the load is norm ally supplied from the
bypass source, for example for stand-by topolog y U PS .
The bypass source shall be set to its m ost unfavorable level of rated vol tag e if this creates a
m ore onerous condition.
5. 2. 3. 1 05. 2
Ph ase d i spl acem en t
The bypass source is to be displaced 1 20 electrical degrees with respect to the normal phase
rotation for a 3-phase suppl y or 1 80 electrical degrees for a single phase suppl y. The solid
state or m anual switch is to be subj ected to one operation of switching the load from the
output of the U PS to the bypass source.
Compliance is determined by 5.2.4.2.
5. 2. 4
Abn orm al operati on an d si m u l ated fau l ts tests
5. 2. 4. 1 G en eral
Protection against risk of therm al, electric shock and energ y hazards in case of abnormal
operating cond ition of a U PS in combination with its i n stal l ati on shall be evaluated by:
a) tests d efined in this section; or
b) calculation or simu lation based on tests as defined in 5. 2. 4. 4 and 5. 2. 4. 6 on a
representative model of U PS , where no dam age other than opening of overcurrent
protective devices has occurred to the test sample.
NOTE A representati ve m odel m eans a U PS with si m ilar power elem ents (for exam ple, power
fuses, ci rcuit breakers, capacitors, overcurrent detection and output in ductances)
and circuit topolog ies as the U PS under consid eration.
sem i con d u ctor d evi ces ,
Before all abnormal tests, the test sam ple shall be m ounted, connected , and operated as
described in the temperature rise test.
Simulated faults or abnormal operating cond itions shall be applied one at a time. Fau lts that
are the d irect consequ ence of a sim ulated fault or abnormal operating conditions are
considered to be part of that simulated fau lt or abnorm al operating condition.
– 1 26 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
I n the case of a U PS supplied without an enclosure , a wire m esh cage which is 1 , 5 tim es the
ind ividual linear dimensions of the U PS part under stu d y shall be used to sim ulate the
intend ed enclosure .
The U PS , and the wire m esh cage (if used), shall be earthed accord ing to the requirem ents of
4. 4. 4. 2.2.
Cheese cloth or surgical cotton shall be placed at all openings, hand les, flanges, j oints and
similar locations on the outside of the enclosu re and the wire mesh cage (if used), in a
manner which will not significantl y affect the cooling.
Where the U PS u nder test is specified in its installation m anual to req uire external m eans of
protection against faults, these specific m eans shall be provided for the test.
The voltages of accessible SELV , PELV and DVC As circuits as well as accessible earthed
and unearthed cond uctive parts shall be m onitored.
The su ppl y shall be capable of d elivering the specified prospective short circuit current
(see 4. 3. 1 ) at the connection to the U PS , unless the circu it anal ysis of 4. 2 d em onstrates that
a lesser value may be used.
Examples in which the lesser prospective short-circuit current available from the test
suppl y may be used include situations wherein:
–
–
–
the fault path of concern is not a low impedance path ; or
the resulting let-through current from the suppl y is equal or less than 1 0 kA; or
the result
ind ependent
of the prospective
current
available
Getismore
FREE standards
from Standardshort-circuit
Sharing Group
and our
chats from the
suppl y
The individ ual tests shall be performed until terminated by activation of a protective device or
m echanism (internal or external), a component failure occurs that interrupts the fau lt
condition, or the tem peratures stabilize.
5.2.4.2
Pass criteria
As a result of the abnormal operation tests, the UPS shall comply with the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
there shall be no emission of flame, burning particles or molten metal;
the cheese cloth or surgical cotton indicator shall not have ignited;
the earth connection and protective equipotential bonding of the UPS shall not have
opened;
doors and covers shall remain in place;
during and after the test, accessible DVC As, SELV and PELV circuits and accessible
conductive parts shall not exhibit voltages greater than the time dependent voltages of
Figure 1, Figure 2 or Figure 3, as appropriate and shall be separated from live parts at
voltages greater than DVC As with at least basic insulation . Compliance shall be
checked by the a.c. or d. c. insulation test of 5. 2. 3. 4 for basic insulation ;
during and after the test, live parts at voltages greater than DVC As shall not become
accessible.
The UPS is not required to be operational after testing and it is possible that the enclosure
can become deformed. Overcurrent protection integral to the UPS , or required to be used with
the UPS , is allowed to open .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
5.2.4.3
5.2.4.3.1
– 1 27 –
Protective equipotential bonding short circuit withstand test (type test)
General
When req uired by 5.2. 3. 1 1 . 2. 1 , a protective equipotential bonding path shall be subj ected
to the following short circuit withstand test.
5.2.4.3.2
Test condition s
The equipment under test shall be supplied with power and the ou tpu t port shall be operating
as intended in 5.2. 4. 1 prior to closing the switching means that applies the short circuit,
unless energizing the eq uipment with the short circuit alread y applied will be more severe.
The protective equipotential bonding short circuit test shall be perform ed with the UPS
working with light load , unless anal ysis shows that higher short circuit currents are available
under higher loading conditions.
A new sam ple m ay be used for each short circu it test.
5.2.4.3.3
Protective equipotential bonding short circuit test method
The test current is applied by connecting the accessible part u nder consideration to one of the
cond uctors of the the test source circuit through a switching means that will not lim it the short
circuit current. The switch shall be located such that the source is short circuited through the
accessible part and its protective equipotential bon din g path back to the protective
earthing terminal for the source circuit under consideration. The connections to the shorting
switch shall be through cables having the same cross-section as specified for the PE
conductor in the installation and the length of the cables shall be limited to 2 m . I f the size
of the U PS requires a greater length, the length shall be as short as practical to perform the
test and the short circu it current shall be calibrated at the entrance of the product.
5.2.4.3.4
Pass criteria
During and after the test, accessible DVC As , SELV and PELV circuits and accessible
conductive parts shall not exhibit voltages greater than the time dependent voltages of
Figure 1 , Figure 2 or Figure 3 of 4.4.2. 2. 3, and shall rem ain separated from live parts at
voltages greater than DVC As by at least basic insu lation . Compliance shall be checked by
the a. c. or d.c. voltage test of 5. 2. 3. 4 for basic in sulation .
At the conclusion of the test, there shall be no d amage to the protective equipotential
bonding means under test. Compliance shall be checked by inspection, and if necessary, by
the protective
5.2.4.4
5.2.4.4.1
equipotential bonding
continuity test (routine test) of 5. 2. 3. 11. 4.
Output short-circuit test (type test)
Load conditions
The short-circuit test shall be perform ed with the U PS at full load or light load whichever
creates the more severe condition.
5.2.4.4.2
Short-circuit test method
Power ou tput port term inals shall be provided with cable of a cross-section as specified for
the installation connected to an appropriate switching m eans that will not limit the short
circuit current. The complete length of the cable (forth and back) shall be approximatel y 2 m,
unless the size of the U PS requ ires a greater length, in which case the length shall be as
short as practical to perform the test.
– 1 28 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
The eq uipment under test shall be supplied with power and the ou tput port shall be operating
as intend ed prior to closing the switching means that applies to the short circu it, unless
energizing the equipm ent with the short circu it alread y applied will be more severe.
The testing shall include ind ivid ual tests of each output port where combinations of two or
more term inals, including earth, on each ind ividual port are subjected to short circuit tests on
those term inals. Analysis may be used to reduce the number of tests if it is shown that the
resu lts of one combination are representative of the anticipated resu lts of another
com bination.
A new sam ple m ay be used for each short circui t test.
I n addition to determ ining com pliance with the criteria of 5. 2. 4. 2, this test is used to d etermine
the ou tpu t sh ort ci rcu i t cu rren t rati n g of the port u nder consideration, in accordance with
4. 3. 2. 3. An oscilloscope or other su itable instrum ent shall be used to measure the peak
current d uring the test, and to m easure or calculate the r.m .s. value of the current.
The value(s) to be recorded and to be provid ed with the U PS instructions, in accordance with
6. 2, are the peak current, and the highest of the r.m. s. current valu es m easured or calcu lated
over a time period as follows:
a) for a. c. signals, three cycles of the nominal a. c. freq uency for the port under
consideration, in which case the value is to be stated as the 3-cycle r. m.s. valu e;
b) for all signals, the duration of the short circuit from the time the short circu it is applied ,
until the tim e the short circuit current is interrupted by a protective d evice or other
m echanism , in which case the value stated is to inclu de the r.m .s. value and the tim e
period in seconds;
more
FREE
standards
Standard Sharing
chats
c) for shortGet
circu
it tests
that
result infrom
a continuous
non-zeroGroup
valu e,and
theour
stead
y-state r.m. s.
value, in which case the value is to be stated as a continuous r.m .s value.
For U PS with internal short circuit protection according to 4.3. 2. 3, which protects the output
port within som e few µ s, the requirements in a), b) and c) are not applicable.
5. 2. 4. 5
Ou tpu t overl oad test (type test)
The overload test shall be performed after operating the U PS at full load until norm al
operating temperatures are attained. Each output of the U PS , and each section of a tapped
output, shall be overload ed in turn, one at a tim e. The other outputs and windings are loaded
or not load ed whichever load condition of norm al use is less favorable.
Overload ing is carried out by connecting a variable load across the output or winding. The
load is adj usted as quickly as possible and read justed, if necessary, after 1 min to maintain
the applicable overload. No further readjustments are then permitted.
I f overcurrent protection is provided by a current-sensitive d evice or circuit, the overload test
current is the m axim um current which the overcurrent protection d evice is j ust capable of
passing for 1 h. Before the test, the overcurrent protection device is made in operative or
replaced by a link with negligible impedance.
For eq uipment in which the output voltage is d esigned to collapse when a specified overload
current is reached, the overload is slowl y increased to the point of m aximum outpu t power
before the point which causes the output voltage to collapse.
I n all other cases, the load ing is the m axim um power outpu t obtainable from the output.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
5.2.4.6
5.2.4.6.1
– 1 29 –
Breakdown of components test (type test)
Load conditions
The breakdown of a component, identified as a resu lt of the circuit analysis of 4. 2, shall be
tested with the UPS at full load or light load whichever creates the m ore severe condition.
5.2.4.6.2
Application of short circuit or open-circuit
The short circuit shall be applied with cable of a cross-section appropriate for the current that
norm all y flows throu gh the com ponent, bu t not less than 2, 5 mm 2 . The length of the loop shall
be as short as practical to perform the test. Short circuits and open circu its are applied using
an appropriate switching device.
Each identified com ponent shall be subj ected to onl y one breakdown of components test
unless both open- and short circuit failure mod es are likel y in that com ponent.
5.2.4.6.3
Test sequence
For the breakdown of com ponents test, identified components shall be short circuited or open circuited, whichever creates the worst hazard , one at a time.
5.2.4.7
PWB short circuit test (type test)
On PWBs, functional insulation provided by spacings which are less than those specified in
Table 1 0 and Table 1 1 (see 4. 4. 7. 7) shall be type tested as described below.
The decreased spacings shall be short circu ited one at a tim e, on representative sam ples,
and the short circuit shall be m aintained until no further damage occurs.
5.2.4.8
Loss of phase test (type test)
A m ulti-phase UPS shall be operated with each line (including neutral, if used) disconnected
in turn at the input. The test shall be performed by disconnecting one line with the power
conversion eq uipment operating at its m aximum norm al load and shall be repeated by initiall y
energizing the UPS with one lead disconnected.
The test shall continue until terminated by a protective mechanism , a component failure
occurs, or the temperature stabilizes.
For UPS with rated input current greater than 500 A, com pliance can be shown throu gh
simulation.
5.2.4.9
5.2.4.9.1
Cooling failure tests (type tests)
General and pass criteria
For UPS having a combination of cooling m echanisms, all relevant tests shall be perform ed. I t
is not necessary to perform the tests simultaneousl y.
The test shall continue:
–
–
until the temperature stabilizes, in which case the tem perature lim its of 4. 6.4.2 appl y;
or
until terminated by a protective mechanism or a component failure occurs, in which case
the temperature lim its of accessible parts in 4. 6. 4. 2 may be exceed ed by not m ore than
5 °C. I f this is not possible a warning statem ent shall be provided in the user
docum entation.
– 1 30 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
NOTE The tem peratu re increase of 5 °C with regard to th e stead y state lim its reflect the spread of the burn
thresh ol d given i n I EC Gui de 1 1 7.
5. 2 . 4. 9 . 2
I n o p e ra t i v e
b l o we r m o t o r te s t
having forced ventilation shall be operated at
with fan or blower motor or
A
motors m ade inoperative, single or in com bination from a single fault, by physicall y preventing
their rotation.
U PS
ra t e d
5. 2 . 4. 9 . 3
Cl og g ed
l oad
fi l t e r t e s t
Enclosed
having filtered ventilation openings shall be operated at
with the
openings blocked to represent clogged filters. The test shall be perform ed initially with 50 %
of the ventilation openings surface blocked. The test shall be repeated under a full blocked
condition.
U PS
5. 2 . 4. 9 . 4
ra t e d
Los s
l oad
of coo l a n t tes t
shall be operated at
. Loss of coolant shall be sim ulated by
A liqu id cooled
draining the coolant, blocking the flow or d isabling the system coolant pum p.
U PS
ra t e d
l oad
I f the
is shut d own due to the operation of a thermal device located insid e the coolant,
then the test shall be repeated with the coolant drained ou t of the system .
U PS
NOTE I t is presum ed that th e therm al device will be in operati ve if n ot surrou nd ed by cool ant liqui d.
5. 2 . 5
5. 2 . 5. 1
M a t e ri a l
te s ts
G e n e ra l
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
When requested by 4. 4. 7. 8. 2, the m anufacturer shall test the flamm ability properties of the
materials used for insulating purposes, as defined in 5. 2. 5. 2, 5. 2.5.3 and 5. 2. 5. 4.
When requ ested by 4.6. 3. 2 the manufacturer shall test the flam mability properties of the
materials used for
, as defined in 5. 2. 5. 5.
fi re
5. 2 . 5. 2
High
e n c l o s u re
c u rre n t
a rc i n g
i g n i ti o n
te s t ( t yp e
te s t)
Five samples of each insu lating m aterial (Figure 1 3) to be tested are used. The samples shall
have minimum 1 30 mm length and 1 3 mm width and of uniform thickness representing the
thinnest section of the part. Ed ges shall be free from burrs, fins, etc.
Each test is mad e with a pair of test electrod es and a variable inductive impedance load
connected in series to a source of 220 V to 240 V a.c, 50 H z or 60 H z (see Figure 1 3).
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Movable electrode
– 1 31 –
Stationary electrode
Test sample
≈7Ω
with 0,5
power factor
Z
220 V-240 V a.c.
I=
33 A
IEC 1218/12
Figure 1 3 – Circuit for high-current arcing test
I t is permitted to use an equ ivalent circuit.
One electrode is stationary and the second m ovable. The stationary electrode consists of a
3, 5 mm diam eter solid copper conductor having a 30 ° chisel point. The movable electrode is a
3 m m diameter stainless steel rod with a sym metrical conical point having a total angle of 60 °
and is capable of being moved along its own axis. The rad ius of curvature for the electrode
tips d oes not exceed 0, 1 mm at the start of a given test. The electrod es are located opposing
each other, in the same plane, at an angle of 45 ° to the horizontal. With the electrodes short
circuited, the variable inductive impedance load is adj usted u ntil the current is 33 A at a
power factor of 0, 5.
The sam ple u nder test is supported horizontall y in air or on a non-conductive surface so that
the electrodes, when touching each other, are in contact with the surface of the sam ple. The
m ovable electrod e is manuall y or otherwise controlled so that it can be withdrawn from
contact with the stationary electrode to break the circuit and lowered to remake the circuit, so
as to produce a series of arcs at a rate of approxim atel y 40 arcs/min, with a separation speed
of 250 m m/s ± 25 m m/s.
The test is continued until ignition of the sample occurs, a hole is burned through the sam ple
or a total of 200 arcs have elapsed.
The average number of arcs to ignition of the specimens tested shall be not less than 1 5 for
V-0 class materials and not less than 30 for other m aterials.
5.2.5.3
Glow-wire test (type test)
The glow-wire test shall be made under the cond itions specified in 4. 4.7.8. 2 according to
I EC 60695-2-1 0 and I EC 60695-2-1 3.
5.2.5.4
Hot wire ignition test (type test – alternative to glow-wire test)
Five samples of each insu lating m aterial (see Figure 1 4) are tested. The samples shall have
m inim um 1 30 m m length and 1 3 mm wid th and of a u niform thickness representing the
thinnest section of the part. Edges shall be free from burrs, fins, etc.
– 1 32 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A 250 m m ± 5 mm length of nichrome wire (nominal com position 80 % nickel, 20 % chrom ium,
iron-free) approxim atel y 0, 5 m m diameter and having a cold resistance of approxim atel y
5 Ω /m is used. The wire is connected in a straight length to a variable source of power which
is adjusted to generate 0, 25 W/mm ± 0, 01 W/mm in the wire for a period of 8 s to 1 2 s. After
cooling, the wire is wrapped around a sample to form five complete turns spaced 6 mm apart.
The wrapped sam ple is supported in a horizontal position (see Figure 1 4) and the ends of the
wire connected to the variable power source, which is again adj usted to generate
0, 25 W/mm ± 0, 01 W/mm in the wire.
Heating wire
Test sample
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
IEC 1219/12
Fi g u re 1 4 – Test fi xtu re for h ot-wi re i g n i ti on test
The test is continu ed until the test specimen ignites or until 1 20 s have passed . When ignition
occurs or 1 20 s have passed, the test is discontinued and the test tim e recorded . For
specimens which melt through the wire without ignition, the test is d iscontinu ed when the
specimen is no longer in intim ate contact with all five turns of the heater wire.
The test is repeated on the rem aining samples.
The average ignition time of the specimens tested shall not be less than 1 5 s.
5. 2. 5. 5
Fl am m abi l i ty test (type test)
Three sam ples of the com plete equ ipment or three test specimens of the en cl osu re thereof
(see 4. 6. 3) shall be su bjected to this test. Consideration shall be given to leaving in place
com ponents and other parts that m ight influence the performance. The test samples shall be
conditioned in a fu ll draft circu lating air oven for seven d ays at 1 0 °C greater than the
maxim um use tem peratu re, as determ ined by the temperature rise test 5. 2. 3. 1 0, but not less
than 70 °C in an y case. Prior to testing, the sam ples shall be cond itioned for a m inimum of 4 h
at 23 °C ± 2 °C and 50 % ± 5 % relative hum idity. The flam e shall be applied to an insid e
surface of the sam ple at a location jud ged to be likel y to becom e ignited because of its
proximity to a source of ignition including surfaces provided with ventilation holes. I f more
than one part is near a source of ignition, each sample shall be tested with the flame applied
to a different location.
The three test samples shall resu lt in the acceptable performance described below. I f one
sample does not com pl y, the test shall be repeated on a set of three new samples with the
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 33 –
flame applied und er the sam e cond itions as for the u nsuccessful sample. I f all the new
specimens com pl y with the req uirem ents described below the material is acceptable.
The laboratory bu rner, adj ustment and calibration shall be identical to that described in
IEC 60695-1 1 -20.
When a com plete en closu re is used to conduct the flame test, the sam ple shall be m ounted
as intended in service, if it does not im pair the flam e testing, in a draft-free test chamber,
en closu re , or laboratory hood. A layer of absorbent 1 00 % cotton shall be located 305 mm
below the point of application of the test flame. The 1 27 mm flame shall be applied to an y
portion of the interior of the part judged as likel y to be ignited (by its proxim ity to live or arcing
parts, coils, wiring, and the like) at an angle of approximatel y 20 ° insofar as possible from the
vertical so that the tip of the blue cone touches the specim en. The test flam e shall be applied
to three different locations on each of the three sam ples tested . A su pply of technical-grad e
methane gas shall be used with a regu lator and meter for uniform gas flow. N atural gas
having a heat content of approxim atel y 37 MJ /m 3 at 23 °C has been found to provide similar
results and may be used.
The flam e shall be applied for 5 s and removed for 5 s. The operation shall be repeated until
the specimen has been subj ected to five applications of the test flam e.
The following cond itions shall be met as a result of this test:
–
–
the material shall not continue to burn for more than 1 m in after the fifth 5 s application of
the test flame, with an interval of 5 s between applications of the flam e;
and
flam ing drops or flaming or glowing particles that ignite surgical cotton 305 mm below the
test specim en shall not be emitted by the test sample at an y time during the test.
After the test, eq uipment shall meet the requirem ents for basi c protection by m eans of
en cl osu res or barriers in 4. 4. 3. 3.
5. 2. 5. 6
Fl am i n g oi l test (type test)
When requ ired by 4.6. 3. 3. 3 com pliance is shown by the flam e oil test as follows.
A sample of the complete finished bottom of the fire en closu re is securel y su pported in a
horizontal position. Bleached cheesecloth of approxim atel y 40 g/m2 is placed in one layer
over a shallow, flat-bottomed pan approximatel y 50 mm below the sam ple, and is of sufficient
size to cover com pletel y the pattern of openings in the sam ple, bu t not large enough to catch
an y of the oil that runs over the edge of the sample or otherwise does not pass through the
openings.
NOTE U se of a m etal screen or a wired -gl ass partiti on surroundi ng th e test area is recommend ed.
A sm all metal ladle (preferabl y no m ore than 65 mm in diameter), with a pouring lip and a long
hand le whose longitu dinal axis remains horizontal during pouring, is partially filled with 1 0 m l
of a distillate fuel oil that is a m edium volatile distillate having a m ass per unit volume
between 0, 845 g/m l and 0, 865 g/ml, a flash point between 43, 5 °C and 93, 5 °C and an
average calorific value of 38 MJ /l. The ladle contai ning the oil is heated and the oil ignited and
perm itted to bu rn for 1 min, at which time all of the hot flam ing oil is poured at the rate of
approxim atel y 1 ml/s in a stead y stream onto the centre of the pattern of openings, from a
position approxim ately 1 00 mm above the openings.
The test is repeated twice at 5 m in intervals, using clean cheesecloth.
During the test the cheesecloth shall not ignite.
– 1 34 –
5.2.5.7
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Cemented joints test (type test)
When required by 4. 4. 7. 9 representative samples of cem ented joints providing protection of
type 1 or type 2 as defined in I EC 60664-3: 2003 shall be tested as a type test as follows.
The samples shall be subj ected to the conditioning procedure specified in 5. 7 of
I EC 60664-3: 2003, using the following parameters: for the cold test (5.7. 1 ), a tem perature of
-25 °C shall be used, and for the rapid change of tem perature test (5. 7.3): –25 °C to +1 25 °C.
After the conditioning the sam ples shall pass the following tests in the prescribed ord er:
a) The mechanical strength of the joint shall be evalu ated by load ing the j oint using the
forces anticipated to be present under norm al conditions. There shall be no separation of
the parts.
b) The insulation resistance between the conductive parts separated by the joint shall be
m easured according to 5. 8. 3 of I EC 60664-3: 2003.
c) Cem ented j oints shall be treated as to be thin sheet m aterial and shall be tested according
4. 4. 7.8.3.
d) The sectioning of the j oint shall not show an y cracks, voids or separation.
5.2.6
5.2.6.1
Environmental tests (type tests)
General
Environm ental testing is req uired to establish the safety of the UPS at the extremes of the
environmental classification to which it will be subj ected.
I f size or power
consid
erations
preventfrom
the Standard
perform ance
of these
tests
thechats
com plete U PS ,
Get more
FREE
standards
Sharing
Group
andonour
it is permitted to test individu al parts that are considered to be relevant to the safety of the
UPS .
When testing components or sub-assemblies separatel y, the tem perature during the dry-heat
test shall be chosen as to simu late actual use in the end-product. The com ponent or subassembl y shall be energized sim ulating the sam e cond itions as in the end -product.
Table 30 shows the standard tests to be performed for the different environm ental cond itions.
Compliance is shown by conducting test of 5.2.6.3, 5.2. 6.4, 5. 2. 6.5 and 5.2.6. 6 according to
Table 30 as applicable for the environmental conditions specified by the manufacture.
Where the U PS is required to operate in cond itions outside the range of values given in this
standard, then the test conditions shall be agreed on between the supplier and the customer,
as defined in the particu lar individu al enqu iry or purchasing specification. I n an y case the test
requirem ents shall not be less dem and ing than the operating conditions specified.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Tabl e
Te s t
c o n d i ti o n
30
– E n v i ro n m e n t a l
I n d o o r co n d i ti o n e d
IEC
C l i m a ti c
– 1 35 –
te s ts
I n d o o r u n co n d i ti o n e d
6 0 7 2 1 -3 -3
IEC
6 0 7 2 1 -3 -3
IEC
u n c o n d i ti o n e d
6 0 7 2 1 -3 -4
Dry heat (see 5. 2. 6. 3. 1 )
Dry heat (see 5. 2. 6. 3. 1 )
Dry heat (see 5. 2. 6. 3. 1 )
Dam p heat (see 5. 2. 6. 3. 2)
Dam p heat (see 5. 2. 6. 3. 2)
Dam p heat (see 5. 2. 6. 3. 2)
No
C h em i cal l y
te s t re q u i re m e n t
No
te s t re q u i re m e n t
Te s t
Kb
of I EC
6 0 0 6 8 -2 -5 2
a
a cti ve
Salt m ist (see 5. 2. 6. 5)
s u bs tan ces
M ech an i cal l y
No
te s t re q u i re m e n t
No
te s t re q u i re m e n t
a c ti ve
M ech an i cal
Te s t L c o f I E C
6 0 0 6 8 -2 -6 8
Dust an d sand (see 5. 2. 6. 6)
su bs tan ces
Te s t F c o f I E C
6 0 0 6 8 -2 -6
Te s t F c o f I E C
Vibrati on (see 5. 2. 6. 4)
Bi ol og i cal
a
O u td o o r
No
te s t re q u i re m e n t
6 0 0 6 8 -2 -6
Vibrati on (see 5. 2. 6. 4)
No
te s t re q u i re m e n t
Te s t F c o f I E C
6 0 0 6 8 -2 -6
Vibrati on (see 5. 2. 6. 4)
No
te s t re q u i re m e n t
Refer to Footnote a in Table 1 8.
When special environmental conditions are specified, add itional tests (e. g. for chem icall y
active su bstances) shall be considered.
5. 2 . 6. 2
Ac c e p t a n c e
c ri t e ri a
The following acceptance criteria shall be satisfied:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
;
no degradation of an y safety-relevant component of the
during the test;
no potentiall y hazardous behaviour of the
no sign of com ponent overheating;
no
greater than As shall become accessible;
no cracks in the
and no d amaged or loose insulators;
pass routine a. c. or d.c. voltage test 5. 2. 3. 4;
pass
im ped ance test 5. 2.3. 1 1 . 2;
no potentiall y hazardous behaviour when the
is operated following the test.
UPS
U PS
h a z a rd o u s
5. 2 . 6 . 3
5. 2 . 6 . 3 . 1
l i ve
p a rt
e n c l o s u re
p ro t e c t i v e
e q u i p o te n ti a l
bon d i n g
U PS
C l i m a ti c
te sts
D ry h e a t t e s t ( s t e a d y
s t ate )
To prove the ability of components and equipm ent to be operated, transported or stored at
high tem peratures the dry heat (stead y state) test shall be perform ed accord ing to the
conditions specified in Table 31 .
– 1 36 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Tabl e 31 – Dry h eat test (stead y state)
Su bj ect
Test con d i ti on s
Test reference
Test Bd of I EC 60068-2-2
Req uirem ent reference
4. 9
Precon ditionin g
According to 5. 1 . 2 and 5. 2. 1
Operatin g con ditions
Operatin g at rated conditi ons
Tem peratu re
Tem peratu re classification accord ing to Tabl e 1 8 or, for separate testing of
com ponents an d sub-assem blies, accordin g to 5. 2. 3. 1 or m anufacturer’s specified
m axi m um tem peratu re, whichever is hig her
Accuracy
± 2 °C (see I EC 60068-2-2)
H um idity
According to I EC 60068-2-2, Test Bd
Duration of exposure
(1 6 ± 1 ) h
Recovery procedu re
– Tim e
1 h m inim um
– Clim atic conditions
– Tem peratu re
1 5 °C to 35 °C
– Relati ve hum i dity
25 % to 75 %
– Barom etric pressure
86 kPa to 1 06 kPa
– Power supply
5. 2. 6. 3. 2
Power supply u ncon nected
Dam p h eat test (stead y state)
Getresistance
more FREE
standards
from
Standard
Group
chatstest (stead y
To prove the
to hum
idity, the
U PS
shall beSharing
subj ected
to aand
damour
p heat
state) accord ing to the cond itions specified in Table 32.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 37 –
Tabl e 32 – Dam p h eat test (stead y state)
Su bj ect
Test con d i ti on s
Test reference
Test Cab of I EC 60068-2-78: 2001
Req uirem ent reference
4. 9
Preconditionin g
According to 5. 1 . 2 and 5. 2. 1
Operatin g con ditions
Power supply d isconn ected
Special precautions
I ntern al voltage sources m ay rem ain connected if the h eat produced by them i n the
specim en is negli gibl e
Tem perature
Manufactu rer’s specified m axi m um tem peratu re or, for separate testing of
com ponents an d sub-assem blies, accordin g to 5. 2. 3. 1 , whichever is h igh er
Accuracy
± 2 °C (see Clause 5 of I EC 60068-2-78: 2001 )
H um idity
Manufactu rer’s speci fied m axi m um hum idity
Accuracy
± 3 % (see Clause 5 of I EC 60068-2-78: 2001 )
Duration of exposure
4 days
Recovery procedu re
– Tim e
1 h m i nim um
– Clim atic conditions
– Tem peratu re
1 5 °C to 35 °C
– Relati ve hum idity
25 % to 75 %
– Barometric pressure
86 kPa to 1 06 kPa
– Power supply
Power suppl y d isconnected
– Condensation
All extern al an d internal con densation sh all be rem oved by ai r flow pri or to
perform ing th e a. c. or d. c. voltage test or re-connectin g the PEC to a power supply
5. 2. 6. 4
Vi bration test (type test)
The default environmental conditions appl ying to U PS within the scope of this docum ent do
not require com pliance with vibration tests.
A vibration test is nevertheless to be considered if a different environm ental service condition
applies.
5. 2. 6. 5
Salt m ist test (type test)
The default environm ental conditions appl ying to U PS within the scope of this docum ent do
not require com pliance with salt-mist tests.
A salt m ist test is nevertheless to be consid ered if a different environm ental service condition
applies.
5. 2. 6. 6
Du st an d san d test (type test)
The default environm ental conditions appl ying to U PS within the scope of this docum ent do
not require com pliance with dust and sand tests.
A dust and sand test is nevertheless to be considered if a d ifferent environmental service
condition applies .
5. 2. 7
H yd rostati c pressu re test (type test an d rou tin e test)
For type tests , the pressure inside the cooling system of a liq uid cooled U PS (see 4. 7. 2. 3. 3)
shall be increased at a g radu al rate until a pressure relief m echanism (if provided) operates,
– 1 38 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
or until a pressure of twice the operating value or 1 , 5 tim es the m aximum pressu re
the system is achieved, whichever is the greater.
ra t i n g
of
NOTE For th e pu rpose of this test the coolant pum p m ay be disabl ed.
For
ro u t i n e
system .
te s ts
, the pressure shall be increased to the m aximum pressure
ra t i n g
of the
The pressure shall be maintained for at least one m inute.
There shall be no therm al, shock, or other hazard resulting from the test. There shall be no
leakage of coolant or loss of pressure during the test, other than from a pressure relief
mechanism d uring a
.
typ e
te s t
After the h ydrostatic pressure
5. 2. 3. 4.
6
6. 1
I n fo rm a t i o n
an d
typ e
m a rk i n g
te s t
the
U PS
shall pass the a. c. or d.c. voltage test in
re q u i re m e n t s
G e n e ra l
6. 1 . 1 01
D u ra b i l i t y
An y m arking requ ired by this d ocument shall be durable and legible. I n considering the
durability of the marking, the effect of norm al use shall be taken into account.
Compliance is checked by inspection and by rubbing the marking by hand for 15 s with a
Getsoaked
more FREE
standards
Group
and our
chatssoaked with
piece of cloth
with water
and from
againStandard
either forSharing
15 s with
a piece
of cloth
petroleum spirit or for 30 s with a piece of cloth soaked with 70 % isopropyl alcohol. After this
test, the marking shall be legible; it shall not be possible to remove marking plates easily and
they shall show no curling.
The petroleum spirit to be used for the test is aliphatic solvent hexane having a maximum
aromatics content of 0, 1 % by volume, a kauributenol value of 29, an initial boiling point of
approximately 65 °C, a dry point of approximately 69 °C and a mass per unit volume of
approximately 0,7 kg/l.
As an alternative, it is permitted to use a reagent grade hexane with a minimum of 85 % as
n-hexane.
NOTE The desig nati on "n -h exane" is chem ical n om enclatu re for a "norm al" or strai ght chain h yd rocarbon. This
petroleum spirit is furth er id en tified as a certifi ed ACS (Am erican Ch em ical Society) reag ent g rad e hexane (CAS
No. 1 1 0-54-3).
6. 1 . 1 02
Rem o vab l e
p a rt s
Marking requ ired by this d ocument shall not be placed on rem ovable parts that can be
replaced in such a way that the m arking wou ld becom e mislead ing.
6. 2
I n fo rm a t i o n
fo r s e l e c t i o n
Each
that is supplied as a separate prod uct shall be provid ed with information relating to
its function, electrical characteristics, and intended environm ent, so that its fitness for purpose
and compatibility with other parts of the system can be determ ined.
U PS
This information includ es, but is not lim ited to:
a) on the
plate:
•
the name or tradem ark of the manufacturer, su pplier or im porter;
ra t i n g
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
•
•
•
•
– 1 39 –
catalogue number or equivalent;
electrical ra t e d va l u e s for each power port, as applicable:
– input voltage(s) or input voltage range(s);
– input current(s) or inpu t current range(s) (see 5.2. 3. 1 02);
– ou tpu t voltage(s);
– output current(s);
– output a p p a re n t p o we r :
– output a cti ve p o we r or output power factor;
– frequency(ies) or freq uency range(s);
– Icc and/or Icw (see 6.4.3. 1 02).
num ber of phases and neutral (e. g. 3 Ph + N );
protective class (I , I I , I I I );
b) on the ra ti n g plate or in
•
the type of electrical
•
the type of electrical
•
the type of electrical
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
the user m anual:
suppl y system (e.g. TN , I T, ) to which the U P S m ay be connected ;
suppl y system (e.g. TN , I T) supplied to the load ;
suppl y system (e.g. TN , I T) supplied to the stored energ y device;
o u tp u t s h o rt-c i rc u i t c u rre n t in accordance with 4. 3. 2.3 and 5. 2.4.4;
protective device characteristics, in accordance with 4. 3. 2 and 5. 2. 4. 4;
liquid coolant type and d esign pressure for liq uid cooled U P S ;
I P ra t i n g for e n cl o s u re ;
operating and storage environm ent;
am bient operating tem perature range (if other than 1 5 °C to 30 °C);
reference(s) to relevant standard(s) for m anufactu re, test, or use;
reference to instructions for installation, use and m aintenance.
The range shall have a h yphen (-) between the m inimum and m axim um ra te d
when multiple values or ranges are given, they shall be separated by a solidus (/);
val u es
Equipm ent with a ra t e d vo l ta g e range shall be marked with either the maximum
or with the current range.
and
ra te d
cu rre n t
EXAMPLE
1 00-240 V; 2, 8 A
or
1 00-240 V; 2, 8-1 , 2 A
For equ ipment with multiple ra te d vo l ta g e s , the corresponding ra te d cu rre n t s shall be
marked such that the different current ratings are separated by a solidus (/) and the relation
between ra t e d vo l ta g e and associated ra te d cu rre n t appears d istinctl y.
EXAMPLE
1 00-1 20 V; 2, 8 A / 200-240 V; 1 , 4 A
or
1 00-1 20 V; 2, 8-2, 4 A / 200-240 V; 1 , 4-1 , 2 A
– 1 40 –
6. 3
I n fo rm a t i o n
6. 3. 1
G e n e ra l
fo r i n s t a l l a t i o n
an d
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
co m m i s s i o n i n g
Safe and reliable installation is the responsibility of the installer, machine bu ilder, and /or user.
shall provid e information to support this task. This
The manufacturer of an y part of the
information shall be unambiguous, and may be in diagramm atic form.
U PS
6. 3. 2
M ech an i ca l
c o n s i d e ra t i o n s
The following drawings shall be prepared by the manufacturer:
–
–
dim ensional drawing, includ ing m ass inform ation;
m ounting drawing.
Dimensions, m ass, etc. , shall be in SI units.
6. 3. 3
E n v i ro n m e n t
I n accordance with 4. 9 the following environmental conditions shall be specified, for
operation, transportation and storage:
–
–
–
climatic (temperature, hu midity, altitud e, pollution, u ltra-violet light, etc. );
m echanical (vibration, shock, drop, topple, etc. );
electrical (overvoltage category).
NOTE Envi ronm ental categ ori es as specified in I EC 60721 m ay be used wh ere appropriate.
6. 3. 4
H an d l i n g
and
m o u n ti n g
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I n order to prevent inj ury or d amage, the installation docum ents shall include warnings of an y
hazards which can be experienced d uring installation. Where necessary, instructions shall be
provid ed for:
–
–
–
–
–
–
packing and unpacking;
m oving;
lifting;
strength and rigidity of mounting surface;
fastening;
provision of adeq uate access for operation, adjustment and maintenance.
6. 3. 5
E n c l o s u re
t e m p e ra t u re
close to m ounting surfaces, exceed the limit of
When surface tem peratures of the
4. 6. 4. 2 , the installation manual shall contain a warning to consider the combustibility of the
mounting surface.
U PS,
Where req uired by 4.6. 3. 1 , the following m arking shall appear on the
and in the
installation instructions: “suitable for mounting on concrete or other non-combustible surfaces
onl y”.
U PS
6. 3. 6
6. 3. 6. 1
C o n n e cti o n s
G e n e ra l
I nform ation shall be provided to enable the installer to m ake safe electrical connection to the
. This shall includ e inform ation for protection against hazards (for exam ple, electric shock
or availability of energ y) that may be encountered during installation, operation or
maintenance.
UPS
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
6. 3. 6. 2
I n t e rc o n n e c t i o n
an d
– 1 41 –
w i ri n g
d i a g ra m s
The installation and maintenance manuals shall inclu de details of all necessary connections,
together with a su ggested interconnection diagram .
6. 3. 6. 3
C o n d u cto r
( cab l e)
s e l e c ti o n
The installation manual shall define the voltage and current levels for all connections to the
, together with cable insulation requ irem ents. These shall be worst-case values, taking
into account short circuit and overload conditions and the possible effects of non-sinusoid al
currents.
UPS
6. 3. 6. 4
T e rm i n a l
cap aci ty
an d
i d e n t i fi c a t i o n
The installation and m aintenance m anuals shall indicate the range of acceptable conductor
sizes and types (solid or stranded) for all term inals, and also the maxim um num ber of
cond uctors which can sim ultaneousl y be connected.
For
, the m anu als shall specify the requirem ents for tightening torq ue
values and also the insulation temperature
requirements for the conductor or cable.
fi e l d
w i ri n g
t e rm i n a l s
ra t i n g
The identification of all
by a label attached close to the terminals.
fi e l d
w i ri n g
t e rm i n a l s
shall be m arked on the
U PS
, either directl y or
The installation and maintenance m anuals shall id en tify all external terminals relating to
circuits protected by one of the methods of 4. 4. 6.4.
6. 3. 7
P ro t e c t i o n
6. 3. 7. 1
re q u i re m e n t s
Ac c e s s i b l e
p a rt s
an d
c i rc u i t s
The installation and m aintenance m anuals shall identify an y accessible parts at voltages
greater than DVC As , and shall describe the insulation and separation provisions requ ired for
protection.
The manuals shall also indicate the precau tions to be taken to ensure that the safety of
DVC As connections is maintained during installation.
Where a hazard is present after the rem oval of a cover, a warning label shall be placed on the
eq uipment. The label shall be visible before the cover is rem oved.
The m anu al of a
U PS
shall state the m axim um voltage allowed to be connected to each port .
The manuals shall provide instructions for the use of
.
eq u i poten ti al
6. 3. 7. 2
PELV
circuits within a
zon e
of
bon d i n g
T yp e
o f e l e c t ri c a l
su ppl y
system
The installation manual of the
shall specify requirements for safe earthing includ ing the
perm itted earthing system of the installation (see 4. 4. 7.1 .4).
U PS
The unacceptable earthing system s shall be ind icated as:
–
–
not perm itted; or
with m odification of valu es and/or safety levels which shall be quantified through
te s t
.
typ e
– 1 42 –
6. 3. 7. 3
P ro t e c t i v e
6. 3. 7. 3 . 1
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
cl as s
G e n e ra l
The installation manual of the
shall d eclare the protective class specified for the
and the product shall be marked according to the requirement of 6. 3. 7. 3. 2, 6. 3.7.3. 3, and
6. 3. 7. 3.4.
U PS
6. 3. 7. 3. 2
P ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
Term inals for connection of the
or more of the following:
–
–
–
I
U PS
eq u i pm en t
PE
con d u ctor
shall be clearl y and ind elibly marked with one
the sym bol I EC 6041 7-501 9 (201 1 -01 ) (see Annex C); or
with the letters PE; or
the colour cod ing green or green-yellow.
6. 3. 7 . 3. 3
P ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
II
eq u i pm en t
Equipm ent of
shall be m arked with sym bol I EC 6041 7-51 72 (201 1 -01 )
(see Annex C). Where such equ ipm ent has provision for the connection of an earthing
conductor for functional reasons (see 4. 4. 6. 3) it shall be marked with sym bol I EC 6041 7-501 8
(201 1 -01 ) (see Annex C).
6. 3. 7. 3. 4
p ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
II
P ro t e c t i v e
cl as s
III
eq u i pm en t
No marking is requ ired on the product.
6. 3. 7. 4
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
T ou ch
c u rre n t
m a rk i n g
Where the
in the
exceeds the lim its given in 4. 4. 4. 3.3., this
shall be stated in the installation and maintenance m anu als. I n add ition, a warning sym bol
I SO 701 0-W001 (201 1 -06) (see Annex C) shall be placed on the product, and a notice shall
be provid ed in the installation manual to instruct the user that the minimum size of the
shall comply with the local safety regulations for high
current
eq uipment.
to u ch
c u rre n t
PE
co n d u cto r
PE
co n d u ctor
6. 3. 7 . 5
PE
C om p ati bi l i ty
wi th
RC D
co n d u ctor
m a rk i n g
The installation and maintenance manu als shall indicate compatibility with RCDs (see 4.4. 8).
When 4. 4.8 b) applies, a caution notice and the sym bol I SO 701 0-W001 (201 1 -06) (see
Annex C) shall be provided in the user m anu al, and the sym bol shall be placed on the
product. The cau tion notice shall be the following or equ ivalent: “This product can cause a
d.c. current in the
. Where a residual current-operated protective device (RCD)
is used for protection against electrical shock, only an RCD of Type B is allowed on the
supply side of this product. ” (See 6.4.3 for general requ irements for labels, signs and signals.)
PE
6. 3. 7. 6
C ab l e
an d
co n d u ctor
c o n n e cti o n
An y particular cable and connection req uirem ents shall be identified in the installation and
m aintenance manuals.
6. 3. 7. 7
E x t e rn a l
p ro t e c t i o n
d evi ces
Where external protective d evices are necessary to protect against hazards, the installation
and maintenance manual shall specify the required characteristics (see also 5. 2.4 and
4. 3. 2. 1 ).
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
6. 3. 8
– 1 43 –
Com m i ssi on i n g
If
are necessary to ensure the electrical and thermal safety of a
,
. This inform ation
inform ation to su pport these tests shall be provided for each part of the
can depend on the specific
, and close cooperation between manufacturer,
installer, and user can be required.
com m i s s i on i n g
tes ts
U PS
U PS
i n stal l ati on
Com missioning information shall include references to hazards that might be encountered
during comm issioning, for exam ple those m entioned in 6. 4 and 6. 5.
6. 3. 1 01
G u i d an ce
on
U PS
i n stal l ati on
The manufacturer shall provid e guidance on the level of competence necessary for
installation. Where appropriate, installation instructions should include reference to national
wiring rules. Distinct instructions appl y for:
–
d esigned for location in a
onl y: the installation instructions
shall clearl y state that the
m ay onl y be installed in accordance with the applicable
requ irem ents includ ing those in I EC 60364-4-42. Such
may not m eet the
requ irem ents for a
as specified in 4. 6. 3 .
designed for perm anent connection by fixed wiring to the AC suppl y or to the load or
to a separate energ y storage d evice, for exam ple batteries that are not installed when
delivered : the installation instructions shall clearl y state that onl y a
may
install the
and that, when the disconnect d evice for isolation of m ains power is not
incorporated in the equipm ent (see 4. 1 01 . 2), an appropriate and readil y accessible
disconnect d evice shall be incorporated in the fixed wiring.
or
with energ y storage d evice, for example a
battery, alread y installed by the supplier: the installation instructions shall be m ad e
available, for exam ple in the user manual that shall state whether a
is
requ ired for installation. When the disconnect d evice for isolation of m ains power is not
incorporated in the equ ipment (see 4. 1 01 .2), or when the plu g on the
is intended to
serve as the disconnect device, th e installation instructions shall state that the mains
socket outlet that supplies the
shall be installed near the
and shall be easil y
accessible. When the
shall be connected to an earthed mains socket outlet for
safety reasons, the
marking or installation instructions shall so state. The same
req uirem ent for m arking applies to an y special equipotential earth bonding to other
connected
equipm ent or to class I loads.
UPS
re s t ri c t e d
acces s
a re a
U PS
U PS
fi re
–
e n c l o s u re
UPS
s ki l l ed
p e rs o n
U PS
–
pl u g g ab l e
typ e
A
pl u g g abl e
t yp e
B
U PS
s ki l l ed
p e rs o n
c o rd
U PS
U PS
U PS
c o rd
U PS
U PS
NOTE Plugg abl e
6. 4
6. 4. 1
c o rd s
I n fo rm a t i o n
are n orm ally 2 m in len gth or less.
fo r u s e
G e n e ra l
. It
The user's manual shall inclu de all inform ation regarding the safe operation of the
shall id entify an y hazardous materials and risks of electric shock, overheating, explosion,
excessive acoustic noise, etc.
U PS
The manual shou ld also indicate an y hazards which can result from reasonabl y foreseeable
misuse of the
.
U PS
6. 4. 2
Ad j u s t m e n t
The user's m anu al shall give details of all safety-relevant adjustm ents intended for the user.
The identification or function of each control or indicating device and overcurrent protective
devices shall be marked adj acent to the item. Where it is not possible to do this on the
product, the information shall be provid ed pictoriall y in the m anu al.
Maintenance adjustm ents may also be described in this m anual, but it shall be made clear
that they should onl y be m ade by qu alified personnel.
– 1 44 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Clear warnings shall be provid ed where excessive adjustm ent cou ld lead to a hazard ous state
.
of the
U PS
An y special equipm ent necessary for making adjustments shall be specified and described .
6. 4. 3
Label s ,
6. 4. 3 . 1
sig n s
an d
si g n al s
G e n e ra l
Labelling shall be in accordance with good ergonomic principles so that notices, controls,
ind ications, test facilities, overcurrent protective devices, etc. , are sensibl y placed and
logicall y grou ped to facilitate correct and unam biguous identification.
All safety related equipm ent labels shall be located so as to be visible after installation or
read il y visible by opening a door or removing a cover.
Where a sym bol is used, the inform ation provided with the
of the sym bol and its meaning.
U PS
shall contain an explanation
Labels shall:
–
–
–
–
–
wherever possible, use international symbols as given by I SO 3864-1 , I SO 7000 or
I EC 6041 7;
if no international sym bol is available, be worded in an appropriate language or in a
language associated with a particular technical field;
be conspicu ous, legible and durable;
be concise
and unambiguous;
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
state the hazards involved and give ways in which risks can be reduced .
When instructing the person(s) concerned as to
–
–
–
–
what to avoid: the wording should includ e “no”, “d o not”, or “prohibited”;
what to d o: the word ing should include “shall”, or “m ust”;
the nature of the hazard: the wording should includ e “caution”, “warning”, or “d anger”, as
appropriate;
the nature of safe conditions: the wording should inclu de the noun appropriate to the
safety device.
Safety signs shall compl y with I SO 3864-1 .
The signal words indicated hereinafter shall be used and the following hierarch y respected:
–
–
–
DANGER to call attention to a high risk, for example: “H igh voltage”.
WARNI NG to call attention to a med ium risk, for example: “This surface can be hot. ”
CAUTI ON to call attention to a low risk, for exam ple: “Some of the tests specified in this
standard involve the use of processes im posing risks on persons concerned. ”
shall be prefixed with the word “DAN GER”,
Danger, warning and cau tion markings on the
“WARNI N G”, or “CAUTI ON ” as appropriate in letters not less than 3, 2 mm high. The
remaining letters of such m arkings shall be not less than 1 , 6 mm high.
U PS
6. 4. 3 . 2
I s o l a t o rs
Where an isolating device is not intended to interrupt load current, a warning shall state:
DO NOT OPEN U NDER LOAD.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 45 –
The following requirem ents appl y to an y su ppl y isolating device which does not d isconnect all
sources of power to the UPS .
–
–
I f the isolating d evice is m ounted in an equipm ent enclosure with the operating handle
externall y operable, a warning label shall be provided adj acent to the operating hand le
stating that it does not disconnect all power to the UPS .
Where a control circuit disconnector can be confused with power circuit d isconnectors du e
to size or location, a warning label shall be provided adjacent to the operating handle of
the control circuit d isconnector stating that it does not disconnect all power to the UPS .
6.4.3.3
Visual and audible signals
Visual signals such as flashing lights, and audible signals such as sirens, m ay be used to
warn of an impend ing hazardous event such as the driven equipm ent start-up and shall be
identified.
I t is essential that these signals:
–
–
–
–
are unam biguous;
can be clearl y perceived and differentiated from all other signals used;
can be clearl y recognized by the user;
are em itted before the occurrence of the hazard ous event.
I t is recom mended that higher frequ ency flashing lights be used for higher priority inform ation.
NOTE I EC 60073 provi des gu idance on recom m ended flashi ng rates an d on/off rati os.
6.4.3.4
Hot surfaces
Where required by 4. 6. 4. 2 the warning sym bol I SO 701 0-W01 7 (201 1 -06) (see Annex C) shall
be m arked on or adjacent to parts exceeding the touch tem perature li mits of Table 1 5.
6.4.3.5
Control and device marking
The identification of each control or ind icating device and overcurrent protective d evices shall
be marked adj acent to the item. Replaceable overcu rrent protective devices shall be marked
with their rating and time characteristics. Where it is not possible to do this on the product,
the information shall be provid ed pictoriall y in the m anual.
Appropriate identification shall be marked on or adjacent to each movable connector.
Test points shall be ind ividu all y marked with the circu it diagram reference.
The polarity of an y polarized devices shall be marked adj acent to the device.
The diagram reference and if possible the function shall be marked adjacent to each pre-set
control in a position where it is clearl y visible while the adj ustment is being made.
6.4.3.1 01 Distribution-related backfeed
A label shall be requ ired for the purpose of warning the electrical service person, which shall
be a skilled person , against backfeed situ ations not caused by the UPS . A backfeed
situation can arise when a particular load fau lt is present while the UPS operates in stored
energy mode or while unbalanced loads are supplied through a particular power distribution
system, for example an im pedance grou nded I T system.
The installation instructions for permanently connected UPS shall req uire the placem ent of a
warning label
– 1 46 –
–
–
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
by the U PS su pplier, at the U PS input terminals, and
by the installer , that shall be a ski l l ed person , on all pri m ary power isolators installed
remote from the U PS area and on external access points, if an y, between such isolators
and the U PS
when
a) the autom atic backfeed isolation (see 4.8.1 02) is provid ed external to the equ ipment, or
b) the U PS input is connected throu gh external isolators that, when opened, isolate the
neutral, or
c) the U PS is connected to an I T power distribution system (4. 4. 7. 1 . 6. 1 ).
The warning label shall carry the wording showed in Figu re 1 04, or equivalent:
Before workin g on th i s ci rcu it
- I solate uninterruptible power system (UPS)
- Then check for hazardous voltage between all terminals
includ ing the protective earth
Ri sk of voltag e backfeed
IEC
Fig u re 1 04 – Vol tag e backfeed warn in g l abel
NOTE Backfeed protecti on agai nst faults occurrin g in th e U PS is described in 4. 8. 1 02.
more FREE
from
Sharing Group and our chats
6. 4. 3. 1 02 Get
Protection
i n bustandards
i ld i n g in stal
latiStandard
on
6. 4. 3. 1 02. 1
G en eral
The U PS m anufacturer shall state, as applicable, the rated sh ort-tim e with stan d cu rren t
( Icw ) and/or rated con d i tion al sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t ( Icc ). This current shall be equal to or
higher than the prospecti ve sh ort-circu it cu rren t ( Icp ) stated in Table 1 04.
The req uirem ent above does not appl y to U PS for which
than 1 0 kA.
6. 4. 3.1 02. 2
Icc
and /or
Icw
is rated equal or less
Rated con d iti on al sh ort-circu it cu rren t ( Icc )
U PS with rated con d iti on al sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t ( Icc ) that was verified using over-current
protection device(s) not supplied with the U PS shall inclu de information describing the overcurrent protective device as follows:
a) if the sh ort-ci rcu it protective d evi ce is specified in accordance with an I EC product
standard, the following information shall be provided on the U PS or within the user
manual:
Rated con d iti on al sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t ( Icc ) requ ires the following installer supplied
short-circuit protection device to be installed upstream the a. c input port(s) of the U PS :
•
for exam ple m iniature circuit breaker (MCB) I EC 60947-2, trip curve C:
– characteristic or type of sh ort-ci rcu it protective d evi ce (e.g. three-pole, 40 A,
1 0 kA fault current interrupting capacity at 1 25 V/pole).
b) for all other sh ort-ci rcu i t protective d evi ces , the following information shall be provid ed
on the U PS or within the user manual:
Rated con d iti on al sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t ( Icc ) requ ires the following installer supplied
short-circuit protection device to be installed before the a.c input port(s) of the U PS :
•
nam e of short-circuit protection device manufacturer(s);
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
•
•
characteristic or type of sh ort-circu it protecti ve d evi ce ;
m anufacturer part number(s) of short-circu it protection d evice.
6. 4. 3.1 02. 3
I f an
– 1 47 –
Icp
Prospecti ve sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t ( Icp )
valu e higher than that specified in Table 1 04 is stated, the following applies:
a) if higher Icp stated ≤ 1 0 kA: the values corresponding to the next higher applicable line of
Table 1 04 apply;
b) if higher Icp stated > 1 0 kA: values 1 6 kA, 20 kA, 25 kA, 35 kA, 50 kA, 65 kA, 85 kA,
1 00 kA are preferred , and the values corresponding to line 500 < I of Table 1 04 apply.
EXAMPLE When a hi gher
Icp
is stated:
1)
if a 50 A U PS is declared to sustain
are used;
2)
if a 1 000 A U PS is declared to sustain
Table 1 04 are used.
Icp
= 8 kA (instead of 6 kA), the valu es of line 75
Icp
= 85 kA (i nstead of 20
×
< I<
400 in Table 1 04
1 000 = 20 kA), the val ues of line 500
< I
in
The installer can then verify that the prospective sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t resulting at the AC
input terminals of the unit is eq ual to or less than the value declared by the U PS
manufacturer. Otherwise, subject to an agreem ent between the m anufacturer and the
purchaser, a solution shall be procured. Such a solution m ay consist in employing external
current-limiting overcurrent protectors or customizi ng the U PS accord ingl y.
I rrespective of the U PS being a single unit or a unit in a paralleled system, the prospecti ve
sh ort-ci rcu i t cu rren t of the AC input to be verified is that available at the relevant connection
point of each unit.
6. 4. 3. 1 02. 4
Requ i rem en t for bu i l d i n g i n stal l ati on
I f plu g g able equ i pm en t type B or perm an en tl y con n ected equipm ent relies on the bu ilding
installation for the protection of internal wiring of the eq uipment, the equipm ent installation
instructions shall so state and shall also specify the necessary requirements for short-circuit
protection or overcurrent protection or, where necessary, for both.
I f the protection against electric shock of the U PS relies on residual current d evices in the
building installation circuit and the design of the U PS is such that, in an y normal or abnormal
operating condition, a fault current to earth with DC com ponent is possible, the installation
instructions shall d efine the bu ilding resid ual current devices as type B accord ing to
I EC 60755 for three-phase U PS and as type A according to I EC 61 008-1 or I EC 61 009-1 for
single-phase U PS .
NOTE N ati onal wi rin g rules, if an y, are g en erally to be considered regardi ng requi rem ents for public networks
protection.
6. 4. 3. 1 03
Batteri es in stal l ed with in th e U PS en cl osu re
Batteries installed within the U PS en cl osu re shall be so arranged as to minimize risk of
electric shock from inadvertent contact with terminals, and the interconnection m ethod shall
be such as to minimize risk of short-circu iting and electric shock d uring servicing and
replacement.
The user manual shall inform to what extent, if any, battery m aintenance can be perform ed by
an ord in ary person . The U PS construction shall then compl y with 4. 1 1 . , and short-circuit
shall be prevented (e. g. prevention from term inals short-circuit when put on a cond uctive
surface).
Further, the following instructions or similar warning shall be included:
CAUTI ON :
– 1 48 –
•
•
•
•
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. The batteries may explode.
Do not open or mutilate batteries. Released electrol yte is harmful to the skin and eyes.
I t may be toxic.
A battery can present a risk of electric shock and burns by high short-circu it current.
Failed batteries can reach tem peratu res that exceed the burn thresholds for touchable
surfaces
The following precautions should be observed wh en working on batteries:
a) disconnect the charging source prior to connecting or disconnecting battery term inals;
b) do not wear an y m etal objects including watches and rings;
c) do not lay tools or metal parts on top of batteries;
and in addition, when the battery m aintenance cannot be perform ed by an
the following applies
o rd i n a ry
p e rs o n
,
d) use tools with insulated handles;
e) wear ru bber gloves and boots;
f) determine if battery is either intentionall y or inadvertentl y grounded. Contact with an y part
of a grounded battery can resu lt in electric shock and burns by high short-circu it current.
The risk of such hazard s can be red uced if grou nds are removed during installation and
m aintenance by a
.
s ki l l e d
p e rs o n
Compliance is checked by inspection.
6. 5
I n fo rm a t i o n
fo r m a i n t e n a n c e
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
6. 5. 1
G e n e ra l
shall be m arked with the d ate code, or serial num ber from which the date of
The
manufacture can be determ ined.
U PS
Safety inform ation shall be provided in the installation and maintenance manu als i nclu ding, as
appropriate, the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
preventive m aintenance procedures and schedu les;
safety precautions during m aintenance;
location of
that can be accessible during maintenance (for example, when
covers are rem oved);
adj ustm ent proced ures;
sub-assem bl y and component repair and replacem ent procedures;
an y other relevant information.
NOTE 1
l i ve
p a rt s
These can best be presented as diagram s.
NOTE 2 A list of special tool s can be provid ed, when appropriate.
6. 5. 2
C a p a c i t o r d i s c h a rg e
When the requirements in 4. 4. 3. 4 are not met, the warning symbol I SO 701 0-W01 2 (201 1 -06)
(see Annex C) and an indication of the minimum discharge time required for d ischarge under
worst conditions (for exam ple, d ischarge tim e 5 m in) shall be placed in a clearl y visible
position on the
, the capacitor protective barrier, or at a point close to the
capacitor(s) concern ed (depend ing on the construction). The sym bol shall be explained and
the tim e requ ired for the capacitors to discharge after the rem oval of power from the
shall be stated in the installation and m aintenance manuals.
e n c l o s u re
U PS
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 49 –
NOTE The val ue of the d ischarge tim e declared by the m anufacturer m ay cover a rang e of
.
the relevant tolerances for the com plete ran ge of
U PS
taking into accou nt
U PS
6. 5. 3
Au t o
re s t a rt /b y p a s s
co n n e cti o n
If a
can be configu red to provide autom atic restart or bypass connection, the instal lation,
user and maintenance m anu als shall contain appropriate warning statem ents.
U PS
which is set to provide automatic restart or bypass connection, after the removal of
A
power, shall be clearly identified at the
.
U PS
i n s t a l l ati o n
6. 5. 4
O t h e r h a z a rd s
The manufacturer shall identify, on the product, in the installation and maintenance m anu als,
as applicable, an y components and m aterials of a
which require special procedures to
prevent hazards on the product.
U PS
6. 5. 5
Eq u i p m en t
wi th
m u l ti p l e
s o u rc e s
of su ppl y
,
I n accord ance with 4. 8, where there is more than one source of su ppl y energizing the
inform ation shall be provided to indicate which disconnect d evice or devices are requ ired to
be operated in ord er to completel y isolate the equ ipment.
U PS
6. 5. 1 01
B a t t e ry i n fo rm a t i o n
6. 5. 1 0 1 . 1
Lab el l i n g
on
fo r m a i n t e n a n c e
b a t t e ry
External battery cabinets or battery compartm ents within the
shall be provided with the
following, clearl y legible inform ation in such a position as to be imm ediatel y seen by a
when servicing the
:
U PS
s ki l l ed
p e rs o n
a)
b)
c)
d)
U PS
battery type (lead-acid, N iCd, etc. ) and num ber of blocks or cells;
nominal voltage of total battery;
nominal capacity of total battery (optional);
warning label d enoting an energ y or electrical shock and chemical hazard , and reference
to the m aintenance, hand ling and disposal requ irements detailed in the user m anual.
Exception:
, supplied with internal batteries or with
separate battery cabinets, intend ed for location either u nder or over or alongside the
,
connected by plugs and sockets for installation by an
need onl y be fitted
with the warning label (see item d above) on the outside of the unit.
Pl u g g ab l e
eq u ipm en t
t yp e
A
U PS
U PS
o rd i n a ry
6. 5. 1 0 1 . 2
6. 5. 1 0 1 . 2 . 1
I n fo rm a t i o n
in
i n s t ru c t i o n
p e rs o n
m an u al (s)
G e n e ra l
The following instructions shall be provided d epending on whether the battery is internall y or
externall y mounted and whether the battery is provid ed by the
manufacturer or by others.
The instructions shall be provided in the user m anual or as otherwise described in this
subclause.
U PS
a) I nternall y mounted battery:
– instructions shall carry sufficient information to enable the replacem ent of the battery
with a suitable recom mend ed type;
– safety instructions to allow access by a
shall be stated in the
installation/service handbook;
– if batteries are to be installed by a
instructions for interconnections
includ ing term inal torques shall be provided .
The user’s manual shall include the following instructions:
s ki l l e d
s ki l l ed
p e rs o n ,
p e rs o n
– 1 50 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– servicing of batteries should be performed or su pervised by personnel knowledgeable
about batteries and required precautions.
– when replacing batteries, replace with the same type and number of batteries or
battery packs.
b) Externall y m ou nted batteries:
– installation instructions shall state voltage, am pere-hour
, charging regime and
m ethod of protection required on
to coordinate with
protective
devices, where the battery is not provid ed by the
manufacturer;
– instructions for the battery cells shall be provided by the battery m anufactu rer.
c) External battery cabinets:
– External battery cabinet(s) supplied with the
shall have ad equate installation
instructions to define cable sizes for connection to the
if the cabling is not
supplied by the
manufacturer. Where the battery cells or blocks are not su pplied
pre-installed and wired, installation instructions for the battery cells or blocks shall be
provided by the battery manufacturer, if not d etailed in the
manufacturer's
installation instructions. Protection against energy hazards shall compl y with 4.5.
ra t i n g
i n s ta l l ati o n
U PS
U PS
U PS
U PS
UPS
U PS
6. 5. 1 0 1 . 2 . 2
I n s t ru c t i o n s
fo r b a t t e ry
re p l a c e m e n t
The user manual shall inform to what extent, if any, battery maintenance can be perform ed by
an
. The
construction shall then comply with 4. 1 1 . 5 and short-circuit
shall be prevented (e. g. prevention from terminals short-circu it when put on a cond uctive
surface).
o rd i n a ry
p e rs o n
U PS
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 51 –
An n e x
A
( normative )
Ad d i ti o n a l
A. 1
i n fo rm a ti o n
fo r p ro te c ti o n
a g a i n s t e l e c tri c
s h ock
G e n e ra l
Figure A.1 to Figure A. 3 show examples of the methods used for protection against electric
shock in
equ ipm ent and circuits (see 4. 4. 6. 4).
p ro t e c t i v e
cl a s s
III
Basi c
p ro t e c t i o n
P ro t e c t i v e
A. 2
P ro t e c t i o n
by m ean s
of
s e p a ra t i o n
from circuits req uiring
b a s i c p ro t e c t i o n
DVC As
(see 4. 4. 2. 2)
U1
U2
IEC 1220/12
Ke y
U1 :
h a z a rd o u s
vo l t a g e
U2 : ≤ DVC As from
, earthed or u nearthed
Table 5
F i g u re
A. 1
– P ro t e c t i o n
by
DVC As
wi th
p ro t e c t i v e
s e p a ra t i o n
– 1 52 –
A. 3
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Protecti on by m eans of protecti ve i mpedan ce
(see 4. 4. 5. 4)
Z
Z
I
U1
Z
Z
I
IEC 1221/12
Ke y
Z
resistor
U1
h azard ou s vol tag e ,
I
earth ed or unearth ed
≤ 3, 5 m A a. c. , 1 0 m A d. c.
N OTE To provid e protection i n single-fault cond itions, use the foll owi ng equ ation
I
=
U1
Z
Get more
FREE
from
andan
our
Fi g u re
A. 2 –standards
Protecti on
byStandard
m ean s ofSharing
protectiGroup
ve i m ped
cechats
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A.4
– 1 53 –
Protection by using limited voltages
(see 4. 4. 5. 4)
Z1
Z1
U1
I
Z2
Z2
U2
I
IEC 1222/12
Key
Z:
resistor
U1 :
hazardous voltage , earth ed
U2
≤
DVC As from Table 5.
N OTE To provid e protection i n single-fault cond itions, use equati ons:
U2
=
U1 Z2
2 Z1 + Z2
or.
U2
=
U1 Z2
2( Z1 + Z2 2 )
Figu re A.3 – Protection by using limited voltages
Evaluation of working voltage and selection of DVC for touch voltage,
PELV and SELV circuits
A.5
A.5.1
General
I n A. 4, the selection of DVC for touch voltage and for PELV and SELV circuit is possible
depending on the different bod y reactions:
–
–
–
Ventricu lar fibrillation
M uscular reaction (inability to let go )
Startle reaction
(AC4 / DC4 of I EC 60479-1 )
(AC3 / DC3 of I EC 60479-1 )
(AC2 / DC2 of I EC 60479-1 )
NOTE Both “in ability to let go reaction” or “m uscular reaction” from I EC/TR 60479-5 are related to th e sam e bod y
reaction.
in combination with the following hum id ity bod y skin cond itions:
–
dry;
– 1 54 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
water wet;
saltwater wet;
–
–
and in com bination with the following surface areas for contact of the touch voltages:
part of the bod y (nearl y 500 cm 2 );
hand (nearl y 80 cm 2 );
finger tip (nearl y 1 cm 2 );
–
–
–
The DVC for touch voltage, as suggested in the Tables A. 1 , A. 2 and A. 3, depends on:
the bod y reaction (one table for each bod y reaction);
the bod y contact area;
the skin condition.
–
–
–
Data are given for the design of equ ipment which possibl y includes more than one circuit.
Conditions for selection of DVC for PELV & SELV circuits are given in 4. 4. 6.4.2.
For a d ed icated bod y reaction, the DVC decreases:
coming from a small contact area to a large contact area;
coming from the dry skin cond ition to the saltwater wet skin condition.
–
–
Under a dedicated bod y contact area and a d edicated bod y skin hum id ity condition, the DVC
decreases coming from a strong bod y reaction ( ventricular fibrillation ) to a light bod y
reaction ( startle reaction ).
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Some combinations of a bod y contact area and a bod y skin hum id ity cond ition do not allow
defining an y possible DVC for the prevention of a ded icated bod y reaction. For these
combinations, basic protection is required.
A.5.2
Selection of DVC for touch voltage sets to protect against ventricular
fibrillation
Table A.1 – Selection of tou ch voltage sets to protect again st ventricular fibrillation
Bod y ski n
humidi ty
condi ti on
Dry
Water wet
Saltwater wet
Bod y con tact area
Part of the bod y
Hand
Fi nger tip
DVC A2
DVC A1
DVC A
DVC A2
DVC B
DVC A
Basi c protecti on ag ainst
accessibili ty is requi red
DVC A1
DVC A2
N OTE Tabl e A. 1 is identical to Tabl e 2.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A.5.3
– 1 55 –
Selection of DVC for touch voltage sets to protect against muscular reaction
Table A.2 – Selection of touch voltage sets to protect against muscular reaction
Bod y skin
humidity
condition
Bod y contact area
Part of the bod y
Hand
Finger tip
Dry
Basic protection ag ainst
DVC A2
DVC A
Water wet
Basic protection ag ainst
accessibili ty is requi red
DVC A1
DVC A2
Saltwater wet
Basic protection ag ainst
Basi c protection ag ainst
DVC A1
accessibili ty is requi red
A.5.4
accessibili ty is requi red
accessibility is requi red
Selection of DVC for touch voltage sets to protect against startle reaction
Table A.3 – Selection of touch voltage sets to protect against startle reaction
Bod y skin
humidity
condition
Bod y contact area
Part of the bod y
Hand
Finger tip
Dry
Basic protection ag ainst
Basi c protection ag ainst
DVC A2
Water wet
Basic protection ag ainst
Basi c protection ag ainst
accessibility is requi red
DVC A1
Saltwater wet
Basi c protection ag ainst
Basi c protection ag ainst
Basi c protection ag ai nst
A.5.5
accessibili ty is requi red
accessibili ty is requi red
accessibility is requi red
accessibility is requi red
accessibil ity is requi red
accessibility is requi red
Determination of voltage limits for touch voltage under fault condition
depending on protective equipotential bonding impedance
The evaluation of the protective equipotential bonding im ped ance in 4. 4. 4. 2. 2 shall be
done by using the following figures. The m aximu m touch voltages values under fault allowed
are d epending on reaction of the bod y, en vironm ental condition and part of the bod y in
contact.
The curves are provided with a current path way from hand to the contact area of the bod y
with the person stand ing up.
The short-term non-recurring touch voltage limits are given in A. 5. 6 to A. 5. 8.
A.5.6
Touch time-d.c. voltage zones of ventricular fibrillation
Figu res A. 4, A.5 and A.6 provide information on the short term non-recurring d. c. touch
voltage limits for protection against ventricular fibrillation .
The figures provide inform ation for acceptable level for part of the bod y, hand and finger tip
under dry, water-wet and salt water wet cond itions.
For som e combinations no inform ation for tim e-voltage zone is given and basic protection
against accessibility is requ ired.
– 1 56 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
28 V
1 00 000
60 V
1 20 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Part of the body
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Hand
1 00
575 V 1 000
Finger
IEC 1223/12
Figu re A. 4 – Tou ch ti me- d. c. voltag e zon es for dry ski n con d i tion
22 V
1 00 000
28 V
60 V
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Part of the body
Hand
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
1 00
575 V
Finger
Figu re A. 5 – Tou ch ti me- d. c. vol tag e zon es for water-wet skin con dition
1 000
IEC 1224/12
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 57 –
22 V
1 00 000
28 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
575 V
1 000
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Hand
Finger
IEC 1225/12
Fi g u re A. 6 – Tou ch ti m e- d . c. voltag e for saltwater-wet skin con d ition
NOTE Figu res A. 4 to A. 6 are i dentical to Fig ures 1 to 3.
A. 5. 7
Tou ch tim e- d . c. voltag e zon es of m u scu l ar reaction (i n abi li ty to let g o
reacti on )
Figu res A. 7, A.8 and A.9 provide inform ation on the short term non-recurring d. c. touch
voltage limits for protection against muscular reaction .
The figures provide inform ation for acceptable level for part of the bod y, hand and finger tip
under dry, water-wet and salt water wet cond itions.
For som e combinations no inform ation for tim e-voltage zone is given and basi c protection
against accessibility is requ ired.
– 1 58 –
28 V
1 00 000
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
60 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
350 V
1 000
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Hand
Finger
IEC 1226/12
F i g u re A. 7 – T o u ch ti m e - d . c. vo l ta g e zo n e s o f d ry s ki n c o n d i ti o n
22 V
28 V
1 00 000 Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
350 V
1 000
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Hand
Finger
IEC 1227/12
F i g u re A. 8 – T o u ch ti m e - d . c. vo l ta g e z o n e s o f wa te r-we t s ki n co n d i ti o n
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 59 –
22 V
1 00 000
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
1 00
350 V
Finger
1 000
IEC 1228/12
F i g u re A. 9 – T o u ch ti m e - d . c. vo l ta g e z o n e s o f s a l twa t e r-we t s ki n c o n d i ti o n
A. 5 . 8
T o u ch ti m e - d . c. vo l ta g e z o n e s fo r s ta rtl e re a cti o n
Figu res A. 1 0 and A. 1 1 provid e inform ation on the short term non-recurring d. c. touch voltage
lim its for protection against s ta rtl e re a cti o n .
The figures provide information for acceptable level for part of the bod y, hand and finger tip
under dry, water-wet and salt water wet conditions.
For som e combinations no inform ation for time-voltage zone is given and
against accessibility is requ ired.
b a s i c p ro t e cti o n
– 1 60 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
28 V
1 00 000
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
1 70 V
1 000
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Finger
IEC 1229/12
Fi g u re A. 1 0 – Tou ch ti m e- d . c. vol tag e zon es of d ry ski n con d i ti on
1 00 000
Get more FREE standards from Standard
Sharing Group and our chats
22 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
1 70 V
1 000
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
Finger
IEC 1230/12
Fi g u re A. 1 1 – Tou ch ti m e- d . c. vol tag e zon es of water-wet ski n con d i ti on
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A. 5. 9
– 1 61 –
Tou ch ti m e-a. c. vol tag e zon es of ven tri cu l ar fi bri l l ati on
Figu res A.1 2, A. 1 3 and A.1 4 provide information about the short term non-recurring a.c. touch
voltage limits for protection against ventricu lar fibrilation.
The figures provide inform ation for acceptable level for part of the bod y, hand and finger tip
under dry, water-wet and salt water wet cond itions.
For som e combinations no inform ation for tim e-voltage zone is given and basi c protecti on
against accessibility is requ ired.
12 V
1 00 000
30 V
50 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
575 V
1 000
Touch a.c. voltage (V)
Part of the body
Hand
Finger
IEC 1231/12
Fi g u re A. 1 2 – Tou ch ti m e- a. c. vol tag e zon es for d ry ski n con d i ti on
– 1 62 –
8 V 12 V
1 00 000
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
30 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Part of the body
1 00
575 V
1 000
Touch a.c. voltage (V)
Finger
Hand
IEC 1232/12
Fig u re A. 1 3 – Tou ch tim e- a. c. vol tag e zon es of water-wet ski n con di tion
8V
1 00 000
12 V
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Hand
Touch a.c. voltage (V)
1 00
575 V
1 000
Finger
IEC 1233/12
Fi gu re A. 1 4 – Tou ch tim e- a. c. vol tag e of saltwater-wet skin con d iti on
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A. 5. 1 0
– 1 63 –
Tou ch ti m e- a. c. vol tag e zon es of m u scu l ar reacti on (i n abi l i ty to l et g o
reacti on )
Figures A. 1 5, A. 1 6 and A.1 7 provid e inform ation abou t the short term non-recurring a.c. touch
voltage lim its for protection against muscular reaction .
The figures provid e information for acceptable level for part of the bod y, hand and finger tip
under dry, water-wet and salt water wet conditions.
For some combinations no inform ation for tim e-voltage zone is given and basi c protecti on
against accessibility is required.
12 V
1 00 000
30 V
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
Touch a.c. voltage (V)
Hand
350 V
1 000
Finger
IEC 1234/12
Fi g u re A. 1 5 – Tou ch ti m e- a. c. vol tag e zon es of d ry ski n con d i ti on
– 1 64 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
8 V 12 V
1 00 000
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
1 000
350 V
Touch a.c. voltage (V)
Hand
Finger
IEC 1235/12
Fi g u re A. 1 6 – Tou ch tim e- a. c. vol tag e zon es of water-wet skin con d ition
1 00 000
8V
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
Finger
1 00
350 V
1 000
Touch d.c. voltage (V)
IEC 1236/12
Fig u re A. 1 7 – Tou ch tim e- a. c. vol tag e zon es of saltwater-wet skin con d iti on
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A. 5 . 1 1
– 1 65 –
T o u ch t i m e - a . c . vo l t a g e z o n e s fo r s t a rtl e re a ct i o n
Figu res A.1 8 and A. 1 9 provid e information about the short term non-recurring a.c. touch
voltage lim its for protection against s ta rtl e re a cti o n .
The figures provid e information for acceptable level for part of the bod y, hand and finger tip
under dry, water-wet and salt water wet cond itions.
For some combinations no inform ation for tim e-voltage zone is given and
against accessibility is required.
b a s i c p ro te cti o n
12 V
1 00 000
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
1 70 V
1 000
Touch a.c. voltage (V)
Finger
IEC 1237/12
F i g u re A. 1 8 – T o u ch ti m e - a . c . vo l ta g e z o n e s o f d ry s ki n c o n d i ti o n
– 1 66 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
8V
1 00 000
Time (ms)
1 0 000
1 000
1 00
10
1
10
1 00
1 70 V
1 000
Touch a.c. voltage (V)
Finger
IEC 1238/12
Figure A.1 9 – Touch time- a.c. voltage zones of water-wet skin condition
A.6
Evaluation of the working voltage of circuits
A.6.1
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
General
Determ ination of the working voltage for
–
–
–
a. c. r. m. s. ( UAC );
a. c. recurring peak ( UACP ); and
d. c. (average)
is done with the method set out below. Three cases of waveform s are considered as an
example.
Figures A. 20 to A. 22 show typical waveforms for the evaluation of working voltage .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A.6.2
– 1 67 –
AC working voltage
UACP
UAC
IEC 1239/12
Figure A.20 – Typical waveform for a.c. working voltage
The working voltage has an r. m. s. valu e UAC and a recurring peak valu e
UACP .
The DVC is that of the lowest voltage row of Table 5 for which both of the following conditions
are satisfied:
–
–
UAC ≤ UACL
UACP ≤ UACPL
Exam ple with values:
UAC = 39 V
UACP = 91 V
-- >
-- >
is lower than UACL = 50 V
-- >
is higher than UACPL = 71 V -- >
DVC B
DVC C
The rule for determ ination of DVC of the voltage is to select the highest DVC .
Result:
A.6.3
-- >
this working voltage becomes DVC C.
DC working voltage
UDCPP
UDC
UDCP
IEC 1240/12
Figure A.21 – Typical waveform for d.c. working voltage
The working voltage has a m ean value UDC and a recurring peak valu e
ripple voltage of r.m .s. value not greater than 1 0 % of UDC .
UDCP ,
caused by a
The DVC is that of the lowest voltage row of Table 5 for which both of the following conditions
are satisfied:
–
–
UDC ≤ UDCL
UDCP ≤ 1 , 1 7 × UDCL
– 1 68 –
A.6.4
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Pulsating working voltage
UDC
UACP
UAC
IEC 1241/12
Figure A.22 – Typical waveform for pulsating working voltage
The working voltage has a m ean value UDC and a recurring peak valu e
ripple voltage of r.m .s. value UAC greater than 1 0 % of UDC .
UACP ,
caused by a
The DVC is that of the lowest voltage row of Table 5 for which both of the following cond itions
are satisfied:
UAC UDC
UACL + UDCL ≤ 1
UACP
+
UDC
≤1
Get more FREE standards Ufrom
1,1 7 × UDCL Sharing Group and our chats
ACPL Standard
A.7
Examples of the use of elements of protective measures
Protection against electric shock shall be achieved by m eans of:
–
–
combination of basic protection according to 4.4. 3 and fault protection accord ing to
4. 4. 4; or
Enhanced protection according to 4. 4. 5.
Table A. 4 provides examples of typical com binations of those m easures.
The grade of insulation d epends on:
–
–
–
–
the DVC of the live parts according to Table 5;
the insulation requirem ent between adjacent circuits according to Table 6;
the connection of accessible cond uctive parts to earth by protective equipotential
bonding according to Table 6; and
non conductive accessible parts.
As an alternative to solid insulation , a clearance according to 4. 4. 7. 4, shown by L 1 and L 2 in
Table A. 4 m ay be provided .
I n Table A. 4, three cases are considered :
Case a):
Accessible parts are cond uctive and are connected to earth by protective equ ipotential
bonding .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
–
– 1 69 –
Basic insulation is req uired between accessible parts and the live parts . The relevant
voltage is that of the live parts (see Table A. 4, cells 1 a, 2a, 3a).
Cases b) and c):
Accessible parts are non-conductive (case b) or cond uctive but not connected to earth by
protective equipotential bonding (case c). The required insulation is:
–
–
–
Double or reinforced insulation between accessible parts and live parts of DVC C . The
relevant voltage is that of the live parts (see Table A. 4, cells 1 b), 1 c), 2b) and 2c)).
Supplementary insulation between accessible parts and live parts of circuits of DVC A
or B which are separated by basic insulation from adjacent circuits of DVC C . The
relevant voltage is the highest voltage of the adjacent circuits (see Table A. 4, u pper cells
3b), 3c)).
Basic insulation between accessible parts and live parts of circuits of DVC B which have
protective separation from adjacent circuits of DVC C . The relevant voltage is that of
the live parts (see Table A. 4, lower cells 3b), 3c)).
– 1 70 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Table A.4 – Examples for protection against electrical shock
Insulation confi guration
Type of insulation
a
b
c
Accessi ble
conductive parts
connected to earth
by protecti ve
equi potenti al
bondi ng
Accessi ble parts
not condu ctive
Accessible parts conducti ve, but
NOT conn ected to earth by
protecti ve equi poten tial bon ding
1 . Sol id
A B Z
A B M
A R M
D
D
S
A R
ABM Z
A B Z M
I
I
A R
M
*
S
2. Totall y or
parti al l y by ai r
clearance
A Z
S
A
A
M
A
Z
L1
L1
L1
M Z
L1
M
L1
I
A
S
L2
L2
I
I
A
I
M
L2
Z M
*
I
from CStandard
chats
C RFREE
C A B standards
M S
3. InsulationGet
for more
RC A ZC Sharing Group and our
C RC A Z C M
adjacent ci rcui ts:
I
Ci rcu it A: l ower
voltag e circu it
S
I
S
Ci rcu it C: higher
voltag e circu it;
DVC C
4. Requi rem ents
for apertu res i n
enclosu res
A
L1
M
A
T
F/ L 1 a
A
li ve part
B
basic i nsul ation for circuit A
B C basi c insul ation for circuit C
C
D
I
adj acent ci rcui t
doubl e insulation for circu it A
insulation less than B
Z
L1
AB Z M
T
A
T
L2
M
T
L1
L2
L 1 clearance for basi c insul ati on
L 2 clearance for rei n forced
insulati on
M conducti ve part
R reinforced i n sulation for circu it A
R C rei nforced in sul ati on for circu it C
S surface of equi pm ent
T
test finger (Cl ause 1 2 of
I EC 60529: 1 989)
Z suppl ementary i n sulation for
circuit A
Z C supplementary in su lation for
circuit C
* also applies to plastic screws
F fu ncti onal insulation for circu it
A
N OTE 1 I n col um n c) a plastic screw is treated like a m etal screw because a user coul d replace it with a m etal screw duri ng
the life of th e eq uipm ent.
N OTE 2 I n row 4, th e insertion of the test fing er is consi dered to represent th e first fault.
a
Functi on al insulation is sufficient if the openin g is covered d uri ng norm al operati on. I t sh all not be possibl e to rem ove the
cover without th e use of a tool or key. I f the openi ng is not covered du rin g norm al operati on, basi c insul ation is requi red.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
A.1 01
– 1 71 –
Comparison of limits of working voltage
Table A. 1 01 provid es a com parison of the stead y-state decisive voltage class lim its used in
this docum ent to those d efined in other stand ards.
Table A.1 01 – Comparison of limits of working voltage
Limits of worki ng voltag e
V
AC
vol tag e
(RM S)
UACL
AC
vol tag e
(peak)
UACPL
DC
voltag e
(mean )
Deci si ve vol tag e
classi ficati on
(DVC)
UDCL
(I EC 62477-1 : 201 2)
8
1 1 ,3
22
A1
12
17
28
A2
20
28, 3
48
A3
30
42, 4
60
Aa
50
71
1 20
> 50
> 71
> 1 20
El ectri cal en erg y
sou rce cl assifi cation
(ES)
(I EC 62368-1 : 201 4)
j
Tel ecommuni cation
network vol tag e
classi fi cation e
(TNV)
(I EC 60950-1 : 2005)
ES1
b, h
TN V-1
f
B
ES2
c, i
TN V-2 g , TN V-3
C
ES3
f
d
a
Deci si ve vol tage cl ass DVC A voltage lim its are consid ered for on e circuit on ly. When m ore than on e DVC A
circuit of th e UPS is accessibl e an d the vol tage of the two circuits can, subj ect to evaluation, add together
und er singl e faul t condi ti on , the lim it is 25 V for AC voltag e RMS
b
ES1 or class 1 voltag e lim its for AC voltages at frequ encies n ot exceed ing 1 kH z u nder n orm al conditions, and
abn orm al con ditions, and sin gl e faul t conditi on s of a com ponent, d evice or i nsul ation not servin g as a
safegu ard. At freq uenci es greater th an 1 kH z, the li m its for AC voltag e RMS increase lin earl y as a fu nction of
freq uency to a m axim um of 70 V RMS at frequ encies equ al to or greater than 1 00 kH z.
c
ES2 or class 2 voltag e lim its for AC voltages at frequ encies n ot exceed ing 1 kH z u nder n orm al conditions, and
abn orm al conditi ons, and si n gl e faul t condi ti on s. At frequencies greater than 1 kH z, the lim its for AC
voltage RMS i ncrease lin early as a function of freq uency to a m axim um of 1 40 V RMS at frequenci es eq ual to
or greater than 1 00 kH z.
d
ES3 or class 3 voltag e lim i ts exceed ES2 or class 2 voltage li m its.
e
Voltage l im its of TN V circuits under norm al operati ng conditi ons.
f
Overvol tages from telecom m unications networks and cabl e distribution system s are possi ble on TNV- 1 and
TN V-3 circuits und er norm al operati ng conditi ons.
g
Overvoltages from telecom m unications n etworks are not possible on TN V-2 circui ts un der norm al operatin g
conditions.
h
ES1 or class 1 voltag e lim its for a repetiti ve pulse with an off tim e of less than 3 s is 42, 4 V peak and with an
off tim e of greater than or eq ual to 3 s is 60 V peak.
I
ES2
tim e
l im it
tim e
j
Electrical energ y sou rces d eri ved from a capacitor and sin gle pulses defi ned i n I EC 62368-1 : 201 4 are not
considered here.
or class 2 voltage lim its for a repetiti ve pulse wi th an off tim e of less than 3 s is 70, 7 V peak. For an off
of greater than 3 s the ES2 voltage lim its depend al so on the ti m e period th at th e pulse is on with a lower
of 1 20 V peak for an on ti m e equal to or greater th an 200 m s and an upper l im it of 1 96 V peak for an on
equal to or less than 1 0 m s.
– 1 72 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
An n e x B
( i n fo rm a ti ve )
C o n s i d e ra ti o n s
B. 1
fo r t h e re d u c ti o n
o f th e
p o l l u ti o n
d e g re e
I n t ro d u c t i o n
The objective of this annex is to give an overview of what factors should be considered to
reduce the pollu tion degree for electrical equ ipment in order to allow for a reduction of the
clearance and creepage distances. As the m easures to be taken depend heavil y on the nature
of pollu tion, no com prehensive guid ance can be given on how to achieve the goal of a lower
pollution degree for the equ ipment.
B. 2
F a c t o rs
i n fl u e n c i n g
th e pol l u ti on
d e g re e
The following factors influence the pollu tion degree:
–
Pollution:
•
no pollution;
•
dry non-cond uctive pollution;
•
dry non-cond uctive pollution that can becom e conductive, when moist;
•
cond uctive pollution.
NOTE PollutiGet
on mmore
ay be FREE
extern alstandards
or m ay befrom
internall
y g enerated
or present
y atchats
the conclusion of
Standard
Sharing
Groupintern
andallour
m anufacturin g.
–
Moisture:
•
no or low m oisture without condensation;
•
temporary condensation;
•
permanent m oisture;
•
rain or snow.
B. 3
Re d u c t i o n
o f i n fl u e n c i n g
fa c t o rs
Following are som e measures that may be applied to reduce the influencing factors. The
described measures to meet the requirem ents are onl y illustrative. There m ay be other
possibilities.
–
–
–
Coating (see 4. 4. 7.6);
I P5X (d ust test accord ing to I EC 60529);
I PX4. . I PX8 depending on the environment.
When herm eticall y sealing an electrical equipment, it should be ensured that the moisture
level will be at the required low level when resealing the equipm ent after opening the
(e. g. for service).
e n c l o s u re
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 73 –
Annex C
(informative)
Symbols referred to in this document
Table C.1 – Symbols used
I EC 6041 7–501 9
(201 1 -01 )
PE conductor term inal
4. 4. 4. 3. 2, 6. 3. 7. 2
I SO 701 0–W001
(201 1 -06)
Cauti on, refer to docum entati on
4. 4. 4. 3. 3, 4. 4. 8, 6. 3. 7. 2
I EC 6041 7-501 8
(201 1 -01 )
Functi on al earth ing
term inal
4. 4. 6. 3
I EC 6041 7–51 72
(201 1 -01 )
Class I I (doubl e insul ated )
equi pm ent
4. 4. 6. 3
I EC 6041 7-6042
(201 2-05)
Cauti on, risk of el ectric shock
4. 4. 9, 6. 5. 2
I EC 6041 7-5041
(201 2-05)
Cauti on, h ot surface
4. 6. 4. 2, 6. 4. 3. 4
– 1 74 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Annex D
(normative)
Evaluation of clearance and creepage distances
D.1
Measurement
Clearance and creepage d istances shall be evaluated as illustrated in the exam ples contained
in Examples D. 1 to D. 1 4.
For paths consisting of parts with different pollution degrees, as for exam ple when inclu ding a
cem ented j oint that provides protection type 1 (I EC 60664-3) in a pollution degree 2
environm ent, the clearance and creepage distances are determ ined accord ing to Table 1 0
and Table 1 1 , using the following ru les:
–
–
D.2
I n general a creepage distance m ay be split in several portions of different materials
and/or have different pollution d egrees if one of the creepage distances is dimensioned to
withstand the total voltage or if the total distance is dimensioned according to the material
having the lowest CTI and th e highest pollution degree.
For creepage distances for functional insulation on PWB and components assembled on
PWB, designed for pollution degree 1 and 2, the sum of the determ ining voltages of each
part of the path shall not be less than the d etermining voltage of the circu its involved . The
distances for each portion of the creepage distance und er consideration shall comply with
the m inim um distances according to Table D. 1 .
Get more FREE
standards from
Group and our chats
Relationship
of measurement
toStandard
pollutionSharing
degree
The " X" values are a fu nction of pollution degree and shall be as specified in Table D. 1 . I f the
associated permitted clearance is less than 3 mm, the X value is one third of the clearance.
Table D.1 – Width of grooves by pollution degree
Pol luti on degree
X val ue
1
0, 25
mm
2
1 ,0
3
1 ,5
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
D.3
– 1 75 –
Examples
I n the Examples D. 1 to D. 1 4 below, clearance and creepage distances are denoted as
follows:
Clearance
Creepage d istance
< X mm
IEC 269/03
Condition:
The path under consideration inclu des a parallel, diverging or converging-sided
groove of an y depth with a wid th less than X mm .
Ru le:
Creepage distance and clearance are m easured directl y across the groove as
shown.
Example D.1
> X mm
IEC 270/03
Condition: Path under consideration includes a parallel or diverging-sid ed groove of an y
depth with a width equal to or more than X m m.
Ru le:
Clearance is the “line of sight” d istance. Creepage path follows the contour of the
groove.
Example D.2
– 1 76 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
X mm
IEC 271/03
Condition: Path under consideration includes a V-shaped groove with a width greater than
X mm .
Ru le:
Clearance is the “line of sight” distance. Creepage path follows the contour of the
groove but “short circuits” the bottom of the groove by X mm link.
Example D.3
IEC 272/03
Condition: Path und er consid eration includes a rib.
Ru le:
Clearance is the shortest air path over the top of the rib. Creepage path follows
the more
contour
of the
rib.
Get
FREE
standards
from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Example D.4
< X mm
< X mm
IEC 273/03
Condition: Path und er consideration includes a cemented j oint that provides protection of
type 2 with grooves less than X m m wid e on each side.
Rule:
Clearance is the shortest air path over the top of the joint. Creepage d istance is
m easured d irectl y across the grooves and follows the contour of the j oint.
Example D.5
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 77 –
< X mm
< X mm
IEC 274/03
Condition: Path under consideration includes an uncemented j oint or a cemented joint that
provid es protection of type 1 with grooves less than X mm wide on each side.
Ru le:
Creepage and clearance path is the “line of sight” d istance shown.
Example D.6
> X mm
> X mm
IEC 275/03
Condition: Path under consideration includes an uncemented j oint or a cemented joint that
provid es protection of type 1 with grooves eq ual to or m ore than X m m wide on
each side.
Ru le:
Clearance is the “line of sight” distance. Creepage path follows the contou r of the
grooves.
Example D.7
≥
X mm
< X mm
IEC 276/03
Condition: Path under consideration includes an uncemented j oint or a cemented joint that
provid es protection of type 1 with a groove on one side less than X mm wide an d
the groove on the other side eq ual to or m ore than X mm wid e.
Ru le:
Clearance and creepage paths are as shown.
Example D.8
– 1 78 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
IEC 277/03
Condition: Path under consideration includ es an uncem ented barrier or a cemented joint that
provid es protection of type 1 when path under the barrier is less than the path
over the barrier.
Ru le:
Clearance and creepage paths follow the contour under the barrier.
Example D.9
IEC 278/03
Condition: Path und er consideration includes an uncemented or a cem ented barrier when
path over the barrier is less than the path under the barrier.
Ru le:
Get
more FREE
Standard
our chats
Clearance
is thestandards
shortest from
air path
over Sharing
the top Group
of the and
barrier.
Creepage path
follows the contour of the barrier.
Example D.1 0
> X mm
> X mm
IEC 279/03
Condition: Path under consideration includ es a gap between head of screw and wall of
recess which is equal to or m ore than X mm wide.
Rule:
Clearance is the shortest air path through the gap and over the top surface.
Creepage path follows the contour of the surfaces.
Example D.1 1
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 79 –
X mm
X mm
IEC 280/03
Condition: Path under consideration includes a gap between head of screw and wall of
recess which is less than X m m wide.
Rule:
Clearance is the shortest air path through the gap and over the top surface.
Creepage path follows the contour of the surfaces but “short circuits” the bottom
of the recess by X mm link.
Example D.1 2
d
≥X
D
≥X
IEC 281/03
Condition: Path und er consid eration includes an isolated part of conductive m aterial.
Ru le:
Clearance and creepage paths are the sum of d plus D .
Example D.1 3
– 1 80 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Distance through solid insulation
IEC 1218/07
Condition: Path under consid eration includes inner layer of PWB.
Rule:
For the inner layer(s), the d istance between adj acent tracks on the sam e layer is
treated as creepage d istance for pollution degree 1 and clearance as in air (see
4. 4. 7. 8.4. 1 ).
Example D.1 4
Inside of equipment
Outside of equipment
E NCLOSURE of
inulating material
Part of ELV circuit or part
at HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Test finger
Fictitious layer
of metal foil
A
B
B
Inaccessible to test finger
Point of contact
Point of contact
Accessible to test finger
IEC 1242/12
Point A is used for determin ing the air gap to a part insi de the enclosu re .
Point B is used for measurements of clearance and creepage distance from the outside of an
enclosure of insulating material to a part inside the en closure .
Example D.1 5 – Example of measurements in an enclosure of in sulatin g material
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 81 –
An n e x E
(informative)
Al ti tu d e
c o rre c t i o n
fo r c l e a ra n c e s
Refer to 4. 4. 7. 4. 1 in com bination with the correction factor from Table E. 1 for clearances at
altitudes between 2 000 m and 20 000 m .
Tabl e
E. 1
– C o rre c t i o n
fa c t o r fo r c l e a ra n c e s
Al t i t u d e
m
Tabl e
I m pu l se
( fro m
E. 2
vo l ta g e
Ta b l e
kV
9)
N o rm a l
b a ro m e t ri c
kPa
at al ti tu d e s
p re s s u r e
b e twe e n
M u l ti p l i c a ti o n
80, 0
1 , 00
3 000
70, 0
1 ,1 4
4 000
62, 0
1 , 29
5 000
54, 0
1 , 48
6 000
47, 0
1 , 70
7 000
41 , 0
1 , 95
8 000
35, 5
2, 25
9 000
30, 5
2, 62
1 0 000
26, 5
3, 02
1 5 000
1 2, 0
6, 67
20 000
5, 5
1 4, 50
I m pu l se
fo r v e ri fy i n g
te s t vo l ta g e
sea
l e ve l
kV
at
000
m
an d
20
000
m
fa c t o r
fo r c l e a r a n c e s
2 000
– T es t vo l tag e s
2
c l e a ra n c e s
I m pu l se
200
a t d i ffe re n t
te s t vo l ta g e
m
at
a l ti t u d e s
Impu l se
a l ti tu d e
50 0
te s t vo l ta g e
m
at
a l ti tu d e
kV
kV
0, 33
0, 36
0, 36
0, 35
0, 50
0, 54
0, 54
0, 53
0, 80
0, 93
0, 92
0, 90
1 , 50
1 ,8
1 ,7
1 ,7
2, 50
2, 9
2, 9
2, 8
4, 00
4, 9
4, 8
4, 7
6, 00
7, 4
7, 2
7, 0
8, 00
9, 8
9, 6
9, 4
1 2, 00
15
14
14
N OTE 1 Expl anati ons concerni ng the infl uenci ng factors (ai r pressure, altitude, tem peratu re, hum i dity) with
respect to electric strength of clearances are given i n 6. 1 . 2. 2. 1 . 3 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
N OTE 2 When testing clearances, associated solid insulation will be subj ected to th e test voltage. As the im pulse
test voltag e is i ncreased with respect to the rated im pulse voltag e, soli d insulation will have to be desi gned
accordi ngl y. This results in an i ncreased im pulse withstand capabi lity of th e soli d insulation .
N OTE 3 Valu es given above have been round ed from the calculation in 6. 1 . 2. 2. 1 . 3 of I EC 60664-1 : 2007.
The voltage values of Table E. 2 appl y for the verification of clearances onl y.
– 1 82 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Annex F
(normative)
Clearance and creepage distance determination for
frequencies greater than 30 kHz
F.1
General influence of the frequency on the withstand characteristics
The insulation requirem ent for clearance, creepage and solid insulation as mentioned in 4.4.7
are given for frequ encies up to and inclu ding 30 kHz. For higher frequ encies, a red uction of
the withstand capability of an y type of insulation needs to be expected and taken into account
for dimensioning.
For freq uencies greater than 30 kH z and up to 1 0 MH z, I EC 60664-4 needs to be applied
together with I EC 60664-1 , for the design of clearance and creepage d istances as well as
solid insulation .
This annex provides d etailed inform ation for the design of clearance, creepage and solid
insulation based on the requ irem ent from I EC 60664-4.
The following situ ation needs to be considered for the design:
–
–
–
–
clearance distance for inhomogenous fields (see F. 2. 2);
clearance distance for approximatel y hom ogenous fields (see F. 2. 3);
Getdistance
more FREE
standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
creepage
(see F.3);
solid insulation (see F. 4).
The result of the investigation for frequencies above 30 kH z shall be com pared to the
investigation in 4. 4. 7 and the greater value of the two investigations shall be chosen.
F.2
Clearance
F.2.1
General
The withstand voltage capability within the scope of I EC 60664-4 will onl y be influenced by
the frequency for periodic voltages. For transient overvoltages, dimensioning according to
4. 4. 7.4 shall be used .
For frequ encies exceeding 30 kH z within the scope of I EC 60664-4, the withstand voltage
capability of clearances with hom ogenous and approximatel y hom ogenous field d istribu tion
can be red uced by up to 25 %.
The requ irement for clearance will depend on the field distribution of the insulation und er
investigation. F.2. 2 will give the req uirem ent for clearance d istance for inhom ogenous fields
and F. 2. 3 provides d esign criteria for clearance distance for approximatel y homogenous
fields.
For frequencies exceed ing 30 kH z, an approxim atel y hom ogeneous field is considered to exist
when the radius of curvature r of the conductive parts is equal or greater than 20 % of the
clearance. The necessary radius of curvature can onl y be specified at the end of the
dim ensioning procedure.
The resu lt of the investigation of clearance for frequ encies above 30 kH z shall be compared
to the investigation in 4. 4.7.4 and the greater valu e of the two i nvestigations shall be chosen.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 83 –
Fundamental frequency of working
voltage above 30 kHz
Clearance
Clearance determined accordin g to
impulse voltage or temporary
overvoltage in 4.4.7.4
Approximately homogeneous field
conditions according
to IEC 60664-4: 2005
Increase of the clearance determined
from working voltage in 4.4.6.4 with
factor according to table F.2.
Inhomogeneous field condition
according to
IEC 60664-4: 2005
Clearance from table F.1
based on the recurring
peak of the working voltage
Minimum clearance is the
greater of these values
IEC 1243/12
Figure F.1 – Diagram for dimensioning of clearances
F.2.2
Clearance for inhomogenous fields
For freq uencies exceeding 30 kH z, an inhomogeneous field is consid ered to exist when the
rad ius of curvature of the cond uctive parts is less than 20 % of the clearance. For
inhom ogeneous field distribution, the red uction of the withstand voltage capability of
clearances can be much higher.
Dimensioning for inhom ogeneous field distribution is d one for the required withstand voltage
of the clearance according to the values in Table F.1 . N o withstand voltage test other than the
req uirem ent in 4. 4. 7 is required.
– 1 84 –
Tabl e
F.1
– Minimum
val u es
i n h om og en eou s
fi e l d
o f c l e a ra n c e s
con d i ti on s
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
in
a i r a t a t m o s p h e ri c
(Tabl e
1
of I EC
p re s s u re
fo r
6 0 6 6 4 -4: 2 0 0 5)
a
P e a k vo l ta g e
C l e a ra n c e
kV
≤ 0, 6
mm
0, 065
b
0, 8
0, 1 8
1 ,0
0, 5
1 ,2
1 ,4
1 ,4
2, 35
1 ,6
4, 0
1 ,8
6, 7
2, 0
1 1 ,0
a
For voltages between th e val u es stated in this table, i nterpol ation
is perm itted.
b
N o d ata is avail abl e for peak voltag es less than 0, 6 kV.
The dim ensioning for inhomogeneous field and high voltage stress ( > 1 kV condition) leads to
impractical distances. I t is therefore preferable to choose a design im proving the field
distribu tion (approxim ately homogeneous field distribu tion).
F. 2. 3
C l e a ra n c e
fo r a p p ro x i m a t e l y
h om og en ou s
fi e l d s
For clearance
y homogenous
fields Sharing
conditions
the and
clearance
fou nd in table
Get with
moreapproximatel
FREE standards
from Standard
Group
our chats
Table 1 0, where the clearance is determ ined on the
or recurring peak
voltage (column 2 or 3), is increased by a multiplication factor depend ing on the fundamental
frequency. The m ultiplication factors are indicated in Table F. 2.
w o rk i n g
Tabl e
F.2
– M u l ti p l i c ati o n
fa c t o rs
fo r a p p ro x i m a t e l y
F u n d am en tal
kH z
fo r c l e a ra n c e s
h om og en eou s
fr e q u e n c y
in
vol tag e
a i r a t a t m o s p h e ri c
fi e l d
p re s s u re
co n d i ti o n s
M u l ti p l i c a ti o n
30 < ffu n d a men tal < 500
1 , 05
500 < ffu n d amen tal < 1 000
1 ,1 0
1 000 < ffu n d a men tal < 2 000
1 , 20
2 000 < ffu n d amen tal < 3 000
1 , 25
fa c t o r
N OTE 1 The m ulti plicati on factors are d eterm ined based on calculations as per I EC 60664-4: 2005, 4. 3. 3. M ore
precise calcu lation can be d eterm ined usin g the equ ation in I EC 60664-4: 2005, 4. 3. 3.
NOTE 2 Ci rcuits where the cl earance is desi gned based on the im pulse withstand voltag e (Table 1 0, colum n 1 ),
will n orm ally not be affected by these consid erations.
The dimensioned clearance, for approximatel y hom ogenous field conditions, is applicable for
freq uencies above the critical frequency calcu lated by means of following equ ation taking into
accou nt the new distance from Table F. 2:
fcrit ≈
0, 2  MHz 


d  mm 
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
F.3
– 1 85 –
Creepage distance
For frequencies of the voltage greater than 30 kH z, in addition to tracking, therm al effects
need to be taken into account with respect to the withstand capability of creepage d istances.
Dimensioning is performed both for the requ ired r.m .s. withstand voltage of the creepage
distance accord ing to the values in Table 1 1 and for the required peak withstand voltage
accord ing to the values in Table F.3. This peak withstand voltage is the highest value of an y
period ic peak of the voltage across the creepage distance. The greater of the d istances is
applicable. The dim ensioning according to Table F.3 is applicable for all insulating m aterials
which can deteriorate d ue to thermal effects. This includes typical base materials for printed
circuit boards m ad e from epoxy resin. For m aterials which cannot deteriorate d ue to thermal
effects and where no tracking needs to be expected, d im ensioning accord ing to the clearance
requ irements, as described in 4. 4. 7. 5, is sufficient.
Fundamental frequency of
working voltage above 30 kHz
Creepage
distance
Creepage distance according to
Table F.3 based on the recurring
peak of the working voltage
IEC 1244/12
Figure F.2 – Diagram for dimensioning of creepage distances
– 1 86 –
Tabl e
F.3
– Minimum
val u es
ra n g e s
o f c re e p a g e
(Tabl e
2
0, 1
0, 2
0, 3
0, 4
0, 5
0, 6
0, 7
0, 8
0, 9
1
1 ,1
1 ,2
1 ,3
1 ,4
1 ,5
1 ,6
1 ,7
1 ,8
fo r d i ffe re n t
fre q u e n c y
6 0 6 6 4-4: 2 0 0 5)
d i stan ce
a
b
mm
vo l ta g e
kV
d i s tan ce s
of I EC
C re e p a g e
P eak
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
30
kH z
1 00
< f≤
f≤
0, 2
MHz
f≤
0,4 M Hz
f≤
0,7
MHz
f≤
1
MHz
f≤
2 MHz
f≤
3 MHz
kH z
0, 01 67
0, 042
0, 083
0, 1 25
0, 1 83
0, 267
0, 358
0, 45
0, 525
0, 6
0, 683
0, 85
1 ,2
1 , 65
2, 3
3, 1 5
4, 4
6, 1
0, 09
0, 1 3
0, 1 9
0, 27
0, 38
0, 55
0, 82
1 ,1 5
1 ,7
2, 4
3, 5
5
7, 3
0, 09
0, 1 5
0, 25
0, 4
0, 68
1 ,1
1 ,9
3
5
8, 2
0, 09
0, 1 9
0, 4
0, 85
1 ,9
3, 8
8, 7
18
0, 09
0, 35
1 ,5
5
20
0, 1 5
0, 8
4, 5
20
0, 3
2, 8
20
a
Getformore
FREE standards
Standard
Sharing
ourpolchats
The val ues
the creepage
distances in from
the tabl
e appl y for
poll utionGroup
degree and
1 . For
lution degree 2, a
m ultipl ication factor of 1 , 2 and for polluti on d egree 3 a m ultipli cation factor 1 , 4 should be used.
b
I nterpolati on between colum ns is perm itted.
F. 4
Sol i d
F. 4. 1
i n s u l ati o n
G e n e ra l
Due to increased heating effects and accelerated deterioration in solid insulation further
consideration is needed, when using solid insulation across insulation affected by frequencies
above 30 KH z.
F. 4. 2
Ap p ro x i m a t e l y
u n i fo rm
fi e l d
d i s t ri b u t i o n
wi th o u t a i r g a p s
o r vo i d s
For solid insulation where uniform field distribution is present and no air gaps or voids are
present in the solid insulation , the maxim um field distribution shall be calcu lated as following:
–
–
–
For thick layers of solid insulation of d1 ≥ 0, 75 m m the peak valu e of the field strength E
needs to be equal or less than 2 kV/mm.
For thin layers of solid insulation of d2 ≤ 30 µ m the peak value of the field strength needs
to be equal or less than 1 0 kV/mm.
For d1 > d > d2 Equation (1 ) is used for interpolation for a certain thickness d (see also
Figure F. 3):
 0, 25
  kV 
E=
+ 1, 667  

 d
  mm 
(1 )
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 87 –
Electric field (kV/mm)
1 00
10
1
0,01
0,1
Distance (mm)
1
10
IEC 1245/12
Figure F.3 – Permissible field strength for dimensioning of solid insulation
according to Equation (1 )
F.4.3
Other cases
For solid insulation where:
–
–
–
uniform field distribution is not present; or
air gaps or voids are to be expected; or
the field strength is above the calculation in F. 4. 2.
I n the solid insulation , the evaluation accord ing to 4. 4.7. 8 for solid insulation shall be
perform ed.
I f possible the partial d ischarge test described in 5. 2. 3. 5 shou ld be performed with the
frequency, which is present over the insulation und er evalu ation when evaluation is mad e
according to this annex. At the time of writing such test eq uipment is not comm onl y available,
and the standard allows test to be conducted at 50H z. Product com mitees using this stand ard
as reference d ocument should take this into consideration.
– 1 88 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
An n e x G
(informative)
C ro s s -s e c ti o n s
o f ro u n d
c o n d u c to rs
Stand ard values of cross-section of round copper conductors are shown in Table G. 1 , which
also gives the approxim ate relationship between I SO m etric and AWG/MCM sizes.
Tabl e
G.1
– S t a n d a rd
c ro s s - s e c t i o n s
o f ro u n d
c o n d u c t o rs
AW G / k c m i l
ISO
c ro s s - s e c t i o n
mm
S i ze
2
E q u i va l e n t
c ro s s - s e c t i o n
mm 2
0, 2
24
0, 205
–
22
0, 324
0, 5
20
0, 51 9
0, 75
18
0, 82
1 ,0
–
–
1 ,5
16
1 ,3
2, 5
14
2, 1
4, 0
12
3, 3
6, 0
10
5, 3
1 0 more FREE standards from Standard
8
8, 4
Get
Sharing Group and our chats
16
6
1 3, 3
25
4
21 , 2
35
2
33, 6
50
0
53, 5
70
00
67, 4
95
000
85, 0
0000
1 07, 2
–
1 20
250 kcm il
1 27
1 50
300 kcm il
1 52
1 85
350 kcm il
1 77
240
500 kcm il
253
300
600 kcm il
304
–
700 kcm il
355
–
750 kcm il
380
800 kcm il
405
900 kcm il
456
500
1 000 kcm il
506
630
1 250 kcm il
633
1 500 kcm il
760
400
–
–
800
–
1 000
–
–
1 750 kcm il
887
2 000kcm il
1 01 3
N OTE The d ash, wh en it appears, cou nts as a size when considerin g conn ecting capacity (see 4. 1 1 . 8. 2).
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 89 –
Annex H
(informative)
Guidelines for RCD compatibility
H.1
Selection of RCD type
Depend ing on the nature of the power suppl y, its installation and the type of RCD (type A, AC
or B, – see I EC 61 008 series, I EC 61 009 series, I EC 62423, I EC 60364-4-44 and
I EC 60364-5-53), U PS and RCD can be com patible or incompatible (see 4.4. 8). I f circu its
which can cause current with a d. c. com ponent to flow in the PE conductor during norm al
operation or during failure are not separated from the environm ent by double or reinforced
insulation , it is considered that the U PS itself can cause smooth d.c. current and is therefore
incom patible with RCDs of type A and AC.
The flow chart in Figure H. 1 will help with the selection of the RCD type when using a U PS
downstream of the RCD.
Compatibility of
UPS and RCD
Connection of
the UPS to
the mains
Plug-connected
No
Single-phase >1 6A
or three-phase?
Fixed connection
Yes
No
Can UPS cause
d.c. current?
Yes
Caution necessary
Yes
UPS shall be compatible with
RCD type A
Use RCD type A or
AC
Use RCD/type B
RCD Type B
applicable?
No
Apply another
protective measure
IEC 1246/12
Figu re H.1 – Flow chart leading to selection of the RCD type upstream of a UPS
RCDs suitable to be triggered by different waveforms of residual cu rrent are m arked with the
following sym bols, as defined in I EC 60755.
– 1 90 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Type AC: – a.c. current sensitive (su itable for circu its 8 and 9 of
Figure H . 2)
Type A: – a.c. current sensitive and pulse current sensitive
(su itable for circuits 1 , 4, 5, 8, 9 of Figure H . 2)
or
H.2
Type B: – u niversal current sensitive (suitable for all circuits of
Figure H .2)
Fau l t cu rrent waveforms
Figure H. 2 shows typical fault current waveform s for different U PS circu it configurations, used
to d etermine RCD com patibility.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
1
– 1 91 –
Connection
Normal suppl y current
Fault earth current
Single-phase
IF
IL
IL
L
IF
t
t
N
PE
2
Single-phase with sm oothing
ΙL
IL
L
IF
IF
t
t
N
PE
3
Three-ph ase star
IL
IF
IL
L1
L2
L3
IF
t
t
N
PE
4
Two-pulse bri dg e
IL
IL
L
N
IF
IF
t
t
PE
5
Two-pulse bri dg e, half-controll ed
L
N
IF
IL
IL
IF
t
t
PE
IEC 1 247/1 2
Figure H.2 – Fault current waveforms in connections
with power electronic converter devices
– 1 92 –
Connection
6
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Normal suppl y current
Fault earth current
Two-pulse bri dg e between phases
IL
IL
L1
L2
N
IF
IF
t
t
PE
7
Si x-pulse bri dge
IL
IL
L1
L2
L3
IF
IF
t
t
PE
8
Phase control
IL
IL
L
IF
IF
t
t
N
PE
9
Burst control
IF
IL
IL
L
IF
t
N
PE
N OTE
I
F
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
sym boli zes a fault current, n ot a short circuit current.
Figure H.2 – Fault current waveforms in connections
with power electronic converter devices (continued)
t
IEC 1248/12
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 93 –
An n e x I
( i n fo rm a ti ve )
E xa m p l e s
I.1
o f o ve rvo l ta g e
c a te g o ry re d u c ti o n
G e n e ra l
Figures I . 1 to I . 1 5 are intend ed as illustrations of the req uirem ents in Table 6, 4.4. 7. 2 and
4. 4. 7. 3. They are not intend ed as indications of good design practice.
Basi c
p ro t e c t i o n
Conductive accessible parts
P ro t e c t i v e
SPD
Surge protection device (exam ple of m easure to reduce transient overvoltages)
Overvoltage category
OVC
Insulation
I.2
I.2.1
s e p a ra t i o n
C i rc u i t s
t o t h e s u rro u n d i n g s
co n n ected
to
main s
(s e e 4. 4. 7 . 2 )
su ppl y (s ee
4. 4. 7 . 2 . 2 )
Origin of the
installation
HV
OVC IV
Basic insulation
OVC IV
IEC 1249/12
F i g u re
I.1
– B as i c i n s u l a ti o n
o f th e
e va l u ati o n
i n s ta l l ati o n
fo r c i rc u i t s
m ai n s
con n e cted
su ppl y
t o t h e o ri g i n
– 1 94 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Permanent connection
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC III
IEC 1250/12
F i g u re
I.2
– B as i c i n s u l ati o n
e va l u ati o n
m ai n s
fo r c i rc u i t s
con n e cted
to th e
su ppl y
1 / 3 phase
Plug connection
OVC II
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Basic insulation
OVC II
IEC 1251/12
F i g u re
I.3
– B as i c i n s u l ati o n
eva l u ati o n
n o t p e rm a n e n t l y
fo r s i n g l e
c o n n e cte d
an d
t h re e
t o th e m a i n s
ph as e
eq u i pm en t
su ppl y
Origin of the
installation
SPD
HV
OVC IV
Basic insulation
OVC III
IEC 1252/12
F i g u re
I . 4 – B a s i c i n s u l ati o n
o f th e i n s ta l l a ti o n
e va l u ati o n
m ai n s
fo r c i rc u i t s
s u p p l y w h e re
con n e cted
i n t e rn a l
SPD
to th e
s a re
u sed
o ri g i n
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 95 –
Permanent connection
SPD
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC II
IEC 1253/12
F i g u re
I . 5 – B as i c i n s u l ati o n
e va l u ati o n
w h e re
fo r c i rc u i t s
i n t e rn a l
SPDs
con n e cted
t o th e m ai n s
s u ppl y
a re u s e d
Protective separation
OVC III
Permanent connection
Circuit of
DVC A
SPD
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC II
IEC 1254/12
F i g u re
I . 6 – E xam p l e
to th e
o f p ro t e c t i v e
m ai n s
s e p a ra t i o n
s u p p l y w h e re
e val u ati o n
i n t e rn a l
SPDs
fo r c i rc u i t s
a re
u sed
co n n e cted
– 1 96 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Protective separation
OVC III
Permanent connection
SPD
Z
Z
Z
Z
Circuit of
DVC A
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC II
IEC 1255/12
F i g u re
I.7
– E xam p l e
o f p ro t e c t i v e
to th e m a i n s
s e p a ra t i o n
s u p p l y w h e re
e val u a ti o n
i n t e rn a l
SPDs
fo r c i rc u i t s
a re
co n n e cted
u sed
Protective separation
OVC III
Permanent connection
Z1
Z1
Z2
Circuit of
DVC A
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
Z2
SPD
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC II
IEC 1256/12
F i g u re
I.8
–E xa m p l e
o f p ro t e c t i v e
to th e m a i n s
NOTE The requi rem ents for
SPD (see 4. 4. 7. 2. 2 and 4. 4. 7. 2. 3).
p ro t e c t i v e
s e p a ra t i o n
s u p p l y w h e re
s e p a ra t i o n
e val u a ti o n
i n t e rn a l
SPDs
fo r c i rc u i t s
co n n e cted
a re u s e d
i n Fi gu re I . 6 to Fi gu re I . 8 are not red uced by the use of th e
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 97 –
I. 2. 2
to t h e
C i rc u i t s
n o t co n n ected
d i re c t l y
m ai n s
su ppl y (s ee
4. 4. 7 . 2 . 3 )
Permanent connection
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC II
IEC 1257/12
F i g u re
I . 9 – B as i c i n s u l ati o n
e va l u a ti o n
to th e
fo r c i rc u i t s
m ai n s
n o t con n e cted
d i re c t l y
su ppl y
Origin of the
installation
HV
OVC IV
Basic insulation
OVC III
IEC 1258/12
F i g u re
I.1 0
– Basi c
i n su l ati on
eval u ati on
to th e
I. 2. 3
Insulation
b e twe e n
c i rc u i t s
(see
su ppl y
fo r c i rc u i t s
n o t c o n n e c te d
d i re c t l y
m ai n s
4. 4. 7 . 2 . 4)
Insulation between two circuits shall be designed accord ing to the circuit having the more
severe requ irem ent (see also Figure I . 1 2).
– 1 98 –
I.3
F u n cti o n a l
i n s u l a ti o n
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
(s ee 4. 4. 7 . 3 )
Functional insulation
Permanent connection
OVC II
OVC II
SPD
OVC I
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC III
IEC 1259/12
NOTE 1
The SPD i s n ot conn ected to earth, and so has no effect on the overvoltage catg ory to earth.
NOTE 2 The requi rem ents for
(see 4. 4. 7. 3).
F i g u re
I.1 1
fu n c t i o n a l
– F u n cti o n a l
i n s u l a ti o n
i n su l ati on
b y e x t e rn a l
I.4
m ay be fu rth er red uced by th e circuit characteristics
eval u ati o n
wi th i n
c i rc u i t s
a ffe c t e d
t ra n s i e n t s
F u rt h e r e xa m p l e s
Basic insulation
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing
OVC IIIGroup and our chats
Circuit of
Permanent connection
DVC C
Basic insulation
OVC II
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC III
IEC 1260/12
F i g u re
I.1 2
– Basi c
an d
i n su l ati on
n o t co n n ected
eval u ati on
d i re c t l y
fo r c i rc u i t s
to th e m ai n s
b o th
su ppl y
co n n e cte d
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 1 99 –
Protective separation
OVC III
Permanent connection
Circuit of
DVC A
OVC III
Basic insulation
OVC III
IEC 1261/12
F i g u re
I.5
C i rc u i t s
I.1 3
w i th
–
Insulation
m u l ti p l e
e va l u a ti o n
fo r a c c e s s i b l e
c i rc u i t
of
DVC A
s u ppl y (s ee 4. 4. 7 . 2 . 1 )
Permanent
connection
Non-mains
supply
Permanent
connection
Functional insulation
O.V.C II (Non-mains)
and
O.V.C II (Mains)
Functional insulation
O.V.C II (Non-mains)
and
O.V.C II (Mains)
AC-mains
Basic insulation* O.V.C III (Mains)
and O.V.C II (Non-mains)
Basic insulation *:
O.V.C III based on the mains system voltage and O.V.C II from Non-mains. The most severe of these requirement applies.
No reduction of the impulse voltage or Over Voltage Category for mains or non-mains supply.
Functional insulation: O.V.C II based on the mains system voltage and O.V.C II from the non-mains supply. The most severe of these requirement applies.
IEC 1262/12
F i g u re
I . 1 4 – U PS
wi th
m ai n s
an d
n on -m ai n s
s u p p l y wi th o u t
g al van i c
s e p a ra t i o n
– 200 –
Permanent
connection
Non-mains
supply
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Basic
insulation
Functional
insulation
O.V.C I
(non-mains)
Permanent
connection
Functional
insulation
Max. impulse
voltage
SPD
Basic insulation **: O.V.C II (mains)
and O.V.C II (non-mains)
SPD
AC-mains
Basic insulation * O.V.C III (Mains)
and O.V.C I (non-mains)
Func. Insulation:
Functional insulation is based on max. impulse voltage limited by circuit characteristic incl. SPD.
Basic insulation *:
O.V.C III based on the mains system voltage and O.V.C II from Non-mains. The most severe of these requirement applies taking into
account the reduction of the impulse voltage crossing the transformer.
The SPD does not give any reduction for basic insulation because it is located between phases.
IEC 1263/12
F i g u re
I . 1 5 – T ra n s fo rm e r
t o re d u c e
(b a s i c)
i m pu l se
i s ol ated
vo l ta g e
U PS
i n v e rt e r w i t h
fo r fu n c t i o n a l
an d
b as i c
SPD
an d
t ra n s fo rm e r
i n s u l ati o n .
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 201 –
An nex J
(i n formati ve)
Burn thresh ol ds for tou chable su rfaces
J.1
G eneral
This annex contains inform ation about burn thresholds for touchable surfaces for d ifferent
materials. Figures J .1 to J. 5 presented in this annex are copies of figures in I EC Gu ide
1 1 7: 201 0.
Bu rn thresh ol ds
Material temperature before contact (°C)
J.2
75
70
65
3
60
2
55
50
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Contact period (s)
7
8
9
Ke y
1
2
3
No burn
Burn th resh old
Burn
Fi g u re J . 1 – Bu rn th resh ol d spread wh en th e ski n i s i n con tact
wi th a h ot sm ooth su rface m ad e of bare (u n coated ) m etal
10
IEC 1264/12
– 202 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Material temperature before contact (°C)
35
30
25
20
3
15
2
10
1
5
0
2
1
3
4
6
5
Contact period (s)
8
7
9
10
IEC 1265/12
Ke y
1
2
3
50 µ m
1 00 µ m
1 50 µ m
Fi gGet
u re more
J . 2 – FREE
Ri se i nstandards
th e bu rn from
th resh
ol d spread
fromGroup
Fi g u re
J . 1our
forchats
m etal s
Standard
Sharing
and
wh i ch are coated by sh el l ac varn i sh of a th i ckn ess of 50 µ m , 1 00 µ m an d 1 50 µ m
Material temperature before contact (°C)
40
35
30
25
3
20
15
10
2
5
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Contact period (s)
7
8
9
Ke y
1
2
3
Porcelain enam el (1 60 µ m ) / powder (60 µ m )
Powd er (90 µ m )
Polyam ide 1 1 or 1 2 (thickness 400 µ m )
Fi g u re J . 3 – Ri se i n th e bu rn th resh ol d spread from F i g u re J . 1
for m etal s coated wi th th e speci fi c m ateri al s
10
IEC 1266/12
Material temperature before contact (°C)
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 203 –
95
90
85
80
3
75
2
70
1
65
60
1
2
3
6
5
Contact period (s)
4
7
8
9
10
IEC 1267/12
Ke y
1
2
3
No burn
Burn th resh old
Burn
Fig u re J . 4 – Bu rn th resh old spread wh en th e skin i s i n con tact
wi th a h ot sm ooth su rface m ad e of ceram i cs, gl ass an d ston e m ateri al s
Material temperature before contact (°C)
1 05
1 00
95
90
85
3
80
2
75
1
70
65
60
1
2
3
4
5
6
Contact period (s)
7
8
9
Ke y
1
2
3
No burn
Burn th resh old
Burn
Fig u re J . 5 – Bu rn th resh old spread wh en th e skin i s i n con tact
wi th a h ot smooth su rface m ad e of pl asti cs
10
IEC 1268/12
– 204 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Annex K
(informative)
Carbon
1 , 25 Zi n c, zi n c al l o ys
1 ,1 5
1 , 2 80 ti n /20 Zn on steel , ZN on
i ron or steel
0, 9
0, 95
1 ,0
1 , 05 Al um i n i u m
0, 65
0, 8
0, 85
0, 9
0, 95 Cd on steel
0, 6
0, 75
0, 8
0, 85
0, 9 AI /Mg al l oy
0, 5
0, 55
0, 7
0, 75
0, 8
0, 85 Mi l d steel
0, 4
0, 45
0, 6
0, 65
0, 7
0, 75 Du ral u m i n
0, 35
0, 4
0, 55
0, 6
0, 66
0, 7 Lead
0, 85
0, 4
0, 45 0, 55 0, 65
0, 25
0, 3
0, 2
0, 2
0, 1
0, 1 5
0
0, 05
0
0, 3
0, 35
0, 2
0, 05 0, 1 5
0, 1
0, 1 5
0, 2
0
0, 05
0, 1
Si l ver
0, 5
0, 35 0, 45
Copper, copper al l oys
0, 5
0, 4
0, 3
H i gh Cr stai n l ess steel
0, 6
0, 5
0, 35
1 , 45
1 ,6
0, 95
1 ,1
0, 9
1 , 05
0, 7
0, 75
0, 35 0, 45 0, 55
0, 6
0, 3
0, 5
0, 55
0, 2
0, 2 5 0, 35 0, 45
0, 1
0, 1 5 0, 25 0, 35
0, 5
0, 1
0, 7
0, 4
0, 2
0, 3
Gol d, pl ati n u m
Rh on Ag on Cu, si l ver/g ol d
al l oy
CR on N i on steel , ti n on
steel 1 2 % Cr stai n l ess steel
1 ,2
1 ,1
0, 8
0, 55
1 ,0
0
1 ,1 5
0, 9
0, 6
1 , 1 5 1 , 25 1 , 35
0, 9
0
1 , 75 M ag n esi u m , m ag n esi um al l oys
0, 65 0, 75 0, 85
1 ,1
0, 85
N i on steel
0
1 ,7
Si l ver sol d er, Au steni ti c
stai nl ess steel
0
Cr on steel , sol ft sol d er
0, 05
Lead
0, 3
0
1 , 65
1 ,4
1 , 05
Du ral u mi n
0, 2
0, 1 5 0, 25
0, 5
Mi l d steel
Cd on steel
0, 8
0
AI /M g al l oy
Al u m i n i u m
0, 7
Zi n c, zi n c al l oys
0, 55
M ag n esi u m, mag n esi u m
al l oys
80 ti n /2 0 Zn on steel , ZN on
i ron or steel
Table of electrochemical potentials
0, 05Standard
0, 1 5 0, 25 Sharing
0, 3 0, 35Group
0, 5 0,and
55 our
0, 6 chats
0, 65 Cr on
Get more FREE standards0 from
0
Ag
Al
Cd
Cr
Cu
Mg
Ni
Rh
Zn
Silver
Alum inium
Cadm ium
Chrom ium
Copper
Magn esium
N ickel
Rhodium
Zinc
steel , sol ft sol d er
0, 1
0, 2
0, 2 5
0, 3
0, 45
0, 5
0, 55
0, 6 CR on N i on steel , ti n on steel
1 2 % Cr stai n l ess steel
0
0, 1
0, 1 5
0, 2
0, 35
0, 4
0, 45
0, 5 H i gh Cr stai n l ess steel
0
0, 05
0, 1
0, 25
0, 3
0, 35
0, 4 Copper, copper al l oys
0
0, 1 5
0, 2
0, 2 5
0, 3
0, 35 Si l ver sol d er, Au steni ti c
stai nl ess steel
0
0, 1 5
0, 2
0, 2 5
0, 3 N i on steel
0
0, 5
0, 1
0, 1 5 Si l ver
0
0, 05
0, 1
0
Rh on Ag on Cu, si l ver/g ol d
al l o y
0, 5 Carbon
0
Gol d, pl ati n um
IEC 1269/12
Corrosion due to electrochem ical action between d issimilar m etals that are in contact is
minim ized if the com bined electrochem ical potential is below about 0, 6 V. I n the table the
com bined electrochem ical potentials are listed for a num ber of pairs of metals in comm on use;
com binations above the dividing line shou ld be avoided.
Figure K.1 – Electrochemical potentials (V)
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 205 –
An n ex L
(i n form ati ve )
M eas u ri n g i n s tru m en t for tou ch cu rre n t m eas u rem en ts
L. 1
M eas u ri n g i n s tru m en t
The measuring test circuit of Figure L. 1 is from Figure 4 of I EC 60990: 1 999.
A
RS
Weighted touch current
(let-go)
U3
CS
R2
Test terminals
B
RB
U1
500
R3
C2
(peak value)
U3
C3
IEC 1270/12
Ke y
RS
RB
R1
CS
C1
1 500 Ω
500 Ω
1 0 kΩ
0, 22 µ F
0, 022 µ F
Voltm eter or oscill oscope (r. m . s. or peak readin g) i nput resistance: > 1 M Ω
I nput capacitance:
< 200pF
Freq uency ran ge:
1 5 H z u p to 1 MH z (appropri ate for th e hig hest frequ ency of i nterest)
F i g u re L . 1 – M ea s u ri n g i n s tru m en t
Electrical m easuring instrum ents shall have adequate bandwid th to provide accurate read ings,
taking into account all components (d.c., ac m a i n s s u pp l y frequency, high frequency and
harm onic content) of the parameter being measured . I f the r.m .s. value is measured, care
shall be taken that measuring instruments give true r.m .s. readings of non-sinusoidal
waveform s as well as sinusoid al waveforms.
– 206 –
An n e x
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
M
(informative)
T e s t p ro b e s
fo r d e t e rm i n i n g
acces s
The following diagrams are reprod uced from I EC 60529 for convenience only.
Dimensions in millimetres
∅ 50
Sphere
∅1 0
+0,05
0
4
∅ 45
Approx. 1 00
Rigid test
sphere (metal)
Handle
Guard
(insulating material)
IEC 1271/12
F i g u re
M.1
– S p h e re
50
mm
p ro b e
( I P X X A)
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 207 –
Handle
5 ± 0,5
∅ 75
Guard
1 80
Insulating
material
Stop face
1 4°
B
R2 ± 0,05
Cylindri cal
30
37°
20
B
A
(1 0)
A
Chamfer
all edges
80
∅1 2
60
Joints
R4 ± 0,05
Spherical
∅ 50
20 ± 0,2
Section A-A
Section B-B
IEC 1272/12
F i g u re
M . 2 – J o i n ted
t e s t fi n g e r ( I P X XB )
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
1 00 ± 0,2
Rigid test rod
(metal)
Edges free
from burrs
∅1 0
Approx. 1 00
∅ 2,5 +0,05
0
– 208 –
Handle
(insulating material)
Sphere
∅ 35 ± 0,2
F i g u re
Stop face
(insulating material)
M . 3 – T e s t ro d
2, 5 mm
IEC 1273/12
( I P 3 X)
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 209 –
ø50
ø75
Section A-A
20 ± 0, 2
Section B-B
5 ± 0, 5
H andle
Guard
I nsulatin g
m aterial
1 80
J oints
Stop face
ø1 2
60
80
Cham fer
all ed ges
(20)
30
1 4°
A
B
B
37°
(1 0)
SR4 ± 0, 05
A
R2 ± 0, 05
Cyli nd rical
IEC
F i g u re
M . 1 01
– J oi n ted
t e s t fi n g e r ( I P 2 X)
– 21 0 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Annex AA
( informative )
Minimum and maximum cross-section of copper conductors
suitable for connection to terminals for external conductor
Table AA. 1 provid es gu idance on minimum range of cable section that term inals should be
designed to support when one copper cable is connected per term inal .
Table AA.1 – Conductor cross-sections
(extract from I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 )
Rated current
Solid or stranded condu ctors
Cross-sections
M inimum
Maximum
Flexible conductors
Cross-sections
Minimum
M aximum
A
mm 2
mm 2
6
0, 75
1 ,5
0, 5
1 ,5
8
1
2, 5
0, 75
2, 5
10
1
2, 5
0, 75
2, 5
12
1
2, 5
0, 75
2, 5
16
1 ,5
4
1
4
20
1 ,5
6
1
4
25
2, 5
6
1 ,5
4
2, 5
10
1 ,5
6
4
16
2, 5
10
63
6
25
6
16
32
40
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
80
10
35
10
25
1 00
16
50
16
35
1 25
25
70
25
50
1 60
35
95
35
70
200
50
1 20
50
95
250
70
1 50
70
1 20
31 5
95
240
95
1 85
I f the extern al con ductors are conn ected di rectl y to bui lt-in apparatus, the cross-sections indicated i n the
rel evant specificati ons are vali d.
I n cases wh ere it is n ecessary to provid e for con ductors other than th ose specifi ed i n the table, special
agreem ent shall be reach ed between the assem bly m anufactu rer an d the purchaser.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 21 1 –
Annex BB
(normative)
Reference loads
BB. 1
General
The U PS shall be loaded according to the manufacturer's rated l oad specification given in the
instruction manual.
NOTE Li n ear and n on -l i n ear l oad s are d escribed in this an nex.
The most comm on types of l i n ear l oad s are:
–
–
–
resistive;
ind uctive-resistive;
capacitive-resistive.
A n on -l i n ear l oad could be:
–
–
rectified capacitive load;
th yristor or transductor controlled load (phase control).
I n the low power range < 3 kVA, the rectifier in brid ge connection with capacitive load is the
m ost comm on. The load is characterized by the following symbols:
S is the
P is the
λ is the
U is the
f is the
BB. 2
output apparen t power in VA;
output acti ve power in W;
power factor = P /S;
output voltage in V;
frequency in H z.
Reference resi sti ve l oad
U
For resistive loads, the U PS is loaded with a resistor up to nominal power, see Figure BB. 1 .
R
R=
IEC
U2
P
Fi g u re BB. 1 – Referen ce resisti ve l oad
BB. 3
Reference i nd u cti ve-resi sti ve l oads
For inductive-resistive loads, an ind uctance is connected in series or in parallel with a
resistor. The resistor ( R ) and inductance ( L ) are given by the following form ulae:
– 21 2 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
d) Series connection (See Figure BB.2)
L
R=
U
R
IEC
L=
U2
λ
S
(Ω)
U2 1 − λ 2
(H)
2π f S
Fi g u re BB. 2 – Referen ce i n d u cti ve-resi sti ve l oad (seri es)
U
e) Parallel connection (See Figure BB. 3)
L
R
R=
U2
Sλ
IEC
L=
(Ω)
U2
2π f S 1
− λ2
(H)
Fi g u re BB. 3 – Referen ce i n d u cti ve-resi sti ve l oad (paral l el )
BB. 4
Reference capaci ti ve-resi sti ve l oad s
For capacitive-resistive
loads,
a capacitance
and a resistor
connected
Get more FREE
standards
from Standard
Sharingare
Group
and oureither
chatsin series or
in parallel. The resistor (R ) and capacitance (C) are given by the following formulae:
f) Series connection (See Figure BB. 4)
C
R=
U
R
IEC
C=
U2 λ
S
(Ω)
S
2π f U 2 1 − λ 2
(F)
Fi g u re BB. 4 – Referen ce capaci ti ve-resi sti ve l oad (seri es)
U
g) Parallel connection (See Figure BB. 5)
C
R
R=
IEC
C=
U2
Sλ
(Ω)
S 1 − λ2
2π f U 2
(F)
Fi g u re BB. 5 – Referen ce capaci ti ve-resi sti ve l oad (paral l el )
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
BB. 5
BB.5.1
– 21 3 –
Reference n on -l i near l oad
G en eral
To sim ulate a single-phase stead y-state rectifier/capacitor load , the U PS is loaded with a
diode-rectifier bridge which has a capacitor and a resistor in parallel on its output, see
Figu re BB. 6.
The total single-phase load m ay be form ed by a single load or formed by multiple eq uivalent
loads in parallel.
UC
U
Rs
R1
IEC
Fig u re BB.6 – Referen ce n on -l i n ear l oad
where
UC is the rectified voltage in V;
R 1 is the load resistor, representing 66 % of active power of the total apparen t power S;
R S is the series line resistor; representing 4 % acti ve power of the total apparen t power S
(simulating a 4 % voltage drop in the power lines – see I EC 60364-5-52)
NOTE 1 The followin g is rel ated to th e frequ ency of 50 H z, to an output voltage distortion of m axim um 8 %
accordi ng to I EC 61 000-2-2 and to power factor λ = 0, 7 (i. e. 70 % of th e apparen t power S wil l be dissipated as
acti ve power in th e two resistors R 1 and R S ) .
A ripple voltage, 5 % peak to peak of the capacitor voltage UC corresponds to a time constant
of R 1 × C = 0, 1 5 s.
Observing peak voltage, d istortion of line voltage, voltage drop in line cables and ripple
voltage of rectified voltage, the average of the rectified voltage UC will be:
UC =
2 × (0, 92 × 0, 96 × 0, 975) × U = 1 , 22 × U
where the values of resistors R S , R 1 and capacitor C are calculated by the following:
R S = 0, 04 × U2 /S
R 1 = ( UC ) 2 /(0, 66 × S)
C = 0, 1 5 s / R 1
NOTE 2 Resistor R S is pl aced in eith er th e AC or DC si d e of the rectifi er brid ge.
N OTE 3 The actual valu e of the com pon ents used in the test is in the rang e with respect to the calcul ated valu es
of:
RS
±1 0 %
R1
is adj usted du rin g test to obtai n rated output apparen t power .
C
–0 % / +25 %
N OTE 4 The val ue of capacitor C is val id for 50 Hz and m i xed 50 H z an d 60 Hz desig ns.
– 21 4 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
NOTE 5 This docum ent does not cover DC suppli ed el ectron ic ballasts (I EC 61 347 (all parts) and I EC 60925).
BB.5.2 Test method
The following test proced ure applies.
a) The reference non-linear load circuit shall initially be connected to an AC input suppl y at
the rated output voltage specified for the UPS under test.
b) The AC inpu t su ppl y impedance shall not cause a distortion of the AC input waveform
greater than 8 % when suppl ying this reference load (see I EC 61 000-2-2).
c) The resistor R 1 shall be adj usted to obtain the rated output apparent power ( S) specified
for the UPS under test.
d) After adjustm ent of resistor R 1 , the reference non-linear load shall be applied to the
ou tpu t of the UPS under test withou t further adj ustment.
e) The reference load shall be used, without further adj ustm ent, whilst performing all tests to
obtain parameters required under non-linear loading, as d efined in the proper clauses.
BB.5.3 Connection of the reference non-linear load
The reference non-linear load is connected as follows.
a) For single-phase UPS , the reference non-linear load is used with apparent power S
eq ual to the UPS rated apparent power up to 33 kVA.
b) For single-phase UPS rated above 33 kVA, the non-linear load is used with apparent
power S of 33 kVA, plus linear load u p to the apparent and active power ratings of the
UPS .
c) For three-phase UPS d esigned for single-phase loads, equal single-phase non-linear
loads shall
be connected
either line-neutral
or line-to-line,
d epending
Get more
FREE standards
from Standard
Sharing Group
and ourupon
chatsthe national
power system configuration the UPS is designed for, up to 1 00 kVA UPS apparent and
active power rating .
d) For three-phase UPS rated above 1 00 kVA, the loads accord ing to Clause 3 shall be used,
plus linear load u p to the apparent and active power rating s of the UPS .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 21 5 –
Annex CC
(normative)
Ventilation of lead-acid battery compartments
CC.1 General
The enclosure or compartm ent housing a battery where gassing is possible during heavy
discharge, overcharging, or similar type of usage shall be vented. The means of venting shall
provid e airflow throughout the enclosure or com partment in ord er to red uce the risk of
build-up of pressure or accumulation of a gas mixture, such as h yd rogen -air, involving a risk
of inj ury to persons.
The requ irements in this annex assume the gas m ixture to be h ydrogen-air, which is lighter
than air. Conseq uentl y, for com pliance, in add ition to air intake openings in the bottom
portions of the battery enclosure or compartment, ventilation openings are required in the
uppermost portions where such a gas m ixture m ay accumulate.
CC.2 Normal conditions
The lower explosion level (LEL) of h ydrogen in a (h ydrogen-air) m ixture, und er normal
conditions of pressure and temperature, is 4 % by volum e. With reference to Clause CC. 1 , the
venting m eans shall prevent h ydrogen concen tration, und er normal operating and charging
conditions, in excess of 0, 8 % by volume which, as a provision for abnorm al situations,
includes a safety factor of 5.
A lead-acid battery at full charge, when m ost of the charging energ y goes into gas, will
generate approxim atel y 0, 0283 m 3 of hydrogen gas per cell for each 63 Ah of input
(=0, 45 × 1 0 –3 m 3 /Ah). I f the adeq uacy of the ventilation required is not obvious, a
determ ination shall be m ade by measurem ent of gas concentration under normal and
abnormal conditions as specified in this annex.
Subj ect to the UPS being provided with a regulating circu it preventing an increase in battery
charging current and voltage when the AC input voltage is increased within the limits specified
for UPS operation, the form ula listed below may be used to calculate the necessary air flow
for a lead-acid battery compartm ent that com plies with the ventilation requ irem ents of this
annex.
Q
=
v q s n IC
where
Q is the ventilation air flow, in m 3 /h;
v
is the necessary d ilution of h ydrogen (1 00 – 4)/4 = 24;
q = 0, 45 × 1 0 –3 m 3 /Ah generated h yd rogen;
s
is the factor of safety;
n
is the number of battery cells;
I
= 2 A/1 00 Ah – conventional flood ed cell batteries;
I
= 1 A/1 00 Ah – flooded battery cells with low antimony alloy;
I
= 0, 5 A/1 00 Ah – flooded battery cells with recombination plugs;
I
= 0, 2 A/1 00 Ah – valve regulated lead-acid batteries;
C is the battery nominal capacity in Ah at the 1 0 h discharge rate.
– 21 6 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
NOTE 1 To allow for eq uali zation (boost charg ing ), in the case of valve-reg ulated batteries operati ng over a wid er
ran ge of am bient tem peratures, the factors of I correspond to typical 2, 4 V/cell figu res at 25 ºC.
NOTE 2 For batteries oth er than l ead-acid tech nol og y, other valu es of
obtai ned from the battery m anufacturer.
By adopting safety factor s = 5, the form ula for
value of
v q s
Q
Q
Q
I
appl y, an d th e appropriate valu e is
can be sim plified by introducing the resultant
= 0, 054 m 3 /Ah
= 0, 054 n I C
is the air flow, m 3 /h
This amount of ventilation air flow shall preferabl y be ensured by natural air flow, otherwise by
forced ventilation.
I nlet and outlet apertures shall allow for a free access of air flow. The m ean speed of air
through the apertures shall at least be in the region of 0, 1 m/s (= 360 m /h).
With this amount of natural air flow, the battery compartm ent shall contain air inlet and outlet
apertures with a free area of at least
A
≥
Q/360
[
m 2]
NOTE 3 N atu ral ventilati on is applicabl e where the electrical power for h yd rogen g enerati on keeps bel ow certain
lim its. Otherwise, the ventil ati on air outlets woul d exceed acceptabl e dim ensions. Th e l im its for natu ral venti lation
depend on the battery capacity and th e num ber of cells, an d also on the battery techn ology (vented cells, valvereg ulated cells), and the battery chargi ng voltage appli ed.
The above Get
calculation
m ethod
will result
a sufficient
degree
of safety
against
more FREE
standards
frominStandard
Sharing
Group
and our
chats explosion,
assuming hot (> 300°C) or sparking components are kept at adequate d istance from battery
vent plu gs or gas pressu re outlets. I n battery room s, a d istance of 500 mm m ay be regarded
as ensuring sufficient safety. I n battery compartm ents or cabinets or batteries built-in with
UPS , it is perm itted to reduce this d istance depending on the level of ventilation
(see 4. 1 02. 6).
The most severe charging rate referred to above is the maximum charging rate that does not
cause a therm al or overcurrent protective d evice to open.
CC.3 Blocked conditions
The ventilating m eans for an enclosure or a com partment housing a battery shall com pl y with
the requ irem ents in Clause CC. 1 u nder test conditions as d escribed 4.2. During, and at the
conclusion of the test, the maximum hydrogen gas concentration shall not be m ore than 2 %
by volum e.
CC.4 Overcharge conditions
I f a m easurement is needed to determ ine if a battery com partment com plies with
Clause CC. 2, the battery charger shall be connected to a supply circu it adjusted to 1 06 % of
nominal voltage and then subj ected to 7 h of overcharging using a full y charged battery. An y
controls associated with the charger or charging circuit that can be adjusted by an operator
that may be an ordinary person shall be adj usted for the most severe charging rate.
Exception 1 : This requ irement does not appl y to a UPS to be used with a battery charger that
is not investigated with the UPS .
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 21 7 –
Exception 2: This requ irement does not appl y to a U PS provided with a regulating circu it
preventing an increase in battery charging current and voltage when the AC input voltage is
increased from rated value to 1 06 % of rated value .
During, and at the conclusion of the test, the m axim um hyd rogen gas concentration shall not
be more than 2 % by volume. Measurements are to be m ade by sam pling the atm osphere
insid e the battery com partment at the periods of 2 h, 4 h, 6 h and 7 h during the test. Samples
of the atmosphere within the battery compartment shall be taken at the location where the
greatest concentration of hydrogen gas is likel y, using an aspirator bu lb provided with the
concentration m easurem ent equipm ent, or other equivalent m eans.
– 21 8 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
An n e x D D
(informative)
G u i d an ce
DD. 1
Ap p l i c a b l e
fo r d i s c o n n e c t i o n
o f b a tte ri e s
d u ri n g
s h i pm en t
p ro d u c t s
This informative annex applies to
and battery cabinets containing internal batteries.
Currentl y, the following provisions are for use as a guide onl y. The TC might d ecid e to change
this annex in a normative annex in the fu ture.
U PS
DD. 2
B a t t e ry d i s c o n n e c t i o n
Manufacturers should provide a means to d isconnect the battery for the purposes of shipm ent.
The means shall be located as close to the battery as possible and before the battery circuit
connects to an y other electrical devices or circuits, including printed wiring assemblies.
DD. 3
P a cka g e
l a b e l l i n g /m a rki n g
A precau tionary label should be affixed to the shipping carton to alert individu als as to
whether the batteries within the package have been disconnected or not.
Manufacturers shou ld u se the label shown in Figure DD. 1 for products that have had the
battery d isconnected prior to shipment.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
CAUTION IF DAMAGED
!
B ATTE RI E S ,
N ON
-
S PI LL AB L E
Packages, crushed, punctured, or torn such that
contents are revealed, should be set aside in an
isolated area and be inspected by a qualified
person. If the package is deemed to be not
shippable, contents shall be promptly collected,
segregated, and either the consignor or consignee
contacted.
_ +
Pb
Battery is NOT connected
IEC
F i g u re
DD.1
sh i pped
– P re c a u t i o n a ry
wi th
t h e b a t t e ry
l ab el
fo r p ro d u c t s
d i s con n ected
Manufacturers shall use the label shown in Figure DD. 2 for products that have not had the
battery disconnected prior to shipment.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 21 9 –
CAUTION IF DAMAGED
!
B ATTE RI E S ,
N O N -S PI LLAB LE
Packages, crushed, punctured, or torn such that
contents are revealed, should be set aside in an
isolated area and be inspected by a qualified
person. If the package is deemed to be not
shippable, contents shall be promptly collected,
segregated, and either the consignor or consignee
contacted.
_ +
Pb
Battery IS connected
IEC
F i g u re
DD.2
– P re c a u t i o n a ry
sh i pp ed
wi th
l ab el
t h e b a t t e ry
fo r p ro d u c t s
con n e cted
The "Pb" in the battery sym bol for Figure DD. 1 and Figure DD. 2 pertains to lead-acid
batteries. The appropriate chemical sym bol shall be substituted for other battery chem istries.
DD. 4
D am ag e
i n s p e cti o n
Cartons that have been crushed, punctured, or torn in such a way that contents are revealed
shall be set aside in an isolated area and inspected by a
. I f the package is
deem ed to be not shippable, the contents shall be promptl y collected , segregated, and either
the consignor or consignee contacted. Manufacturers shou ld com municate these guid elines to
shippers and hand lers of the applicable products.
s ki l l e d
DD. 5
T h e i m p o rt a n c e
o f s a fe h a n d l i n g
p e rs o n
p ro c e d u re s
m anufacturers have cond ucted com prehensive tests to ensure the equipm ent they
distribute around the world is safe for air transport. N onetheless, it is important to understand
that
and battery cabinets containing internal batteries can cause fire, smoke or other
similar safety hazards if dam aged . These products shall be hand led with care and
imm ediatel y inspected if visibl y dam aged.
UPS
U PS
– 220 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Annex EE
(informative)
Short-time withstand current test procedure –
Guidance and typical values
EE.1
General
This annex presents circuits and methods that are typical for the implem entation of the shorttim e withstand current test prescribed in 5. 2. 3. 1 03. The test circuit in Figure EE. 1 , EE.2 or
EE. 3 as applicable can be used to carry out the test.
NOTE 1
Further gu idance is foun d in I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 1 0. 1 1 . 5. 2.
The enclosure fuse m ay either consist of a copper wire of 0, 8 m m diam eter and of at least
50 mm length, or of an equ ivalent or faster acting fusible elem ent (e. g. a 30 A type gL or CC
non tim e delay fuse) for the detection of a fault cu rrent.
Alternativel y, it is perm itted to connect the enclosure fuse to the ungrounded center point of
the AC source if available. See Figure EE. 2
For single phase U PS , see Figure EE. 3.
AC source
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
F1
R
X
AC input terminals
F
UPS
Load terminals
SW
Key
AC source
F1
R
X
UPS
F
SW
IEC
rated vol tage , u ng round ed 3-wire
conditional withstan d protecti on devi ce, for exam ple fuses or circuit breaker if specified by th e
m anufacturer
adjustable resistor
source reactance im plem ented with lin ear reactors th at m ay be adj ustabl e an d of ai r-core technol og y
equi pm ent und er test
encl osu re fuse (for positi ve verification of arcing to ch assis, as applicabl e)
closing switch – m ay be located as shown or ahead of lim iting im pedance
NOTE Since the transi ent recovery voltage characteri stics of test circuits, includi ng larg e air-core reactors, are
not representati ve of usual service con ditions, any air-core reactor in each ph ase is typical l y shunted by a resistor
(not shown i n the diagram ) taking approxim ately 0, 6 % of the current throu gh th e reactor.
Figure EE.1 – 3-wire test circuit for U PS
short-time withstand current
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 221 –
AC source
F1
R
X
AC input terminals
UPS
F
Load terminals
SW
Key
AC source
F1
R
X
UPS
F
SW
IEC
rated vol tage , u ng round ed 4-wire
conditional withstan d protecti on devi ce, for exam ple fuses or circuit breaker if specified by th e
m anufacturer
adjustable resistor
source reactance im plem ented with lin ear reactors th at m ay be adj ustabl e an d of ai r-core technol og y
equi pm ent und er test
encl osu re fuse (for positi ve verification of arcing to ch assis, as applicabl e)
closing switch – m ay be located as shown or ahead of lim iting im pedance
NOTE Since the transi ent recovery voltage characteri stics of test circuits, includi ng larg e air-core reactors, are
not representati ve of usual service con ditions, any air-core reactor in each ph ase is typical l y shunted by a resistor
(not sh own i n the diagram ) taking approxim ately 0, 6 % of the current throu gh th e reactor.
Figure EE.2 – 4-wire test circu it for U PS
short-time withstand current
– 222 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
AC source
F1
R
X
AC input terminals
UPS
F
Load terminals
SW
Key
AC source
F1
R
X
UPS
F
SW
IEC
rated vol tage , u ng round ed 2-wire
conditional withstan d protecti on devi ce, for exam ple fuses or ci rcuit breaker if specified by th e
m anufacturer
adjustable resistor
source reactance im plem ented with lin ear reactors th at m ay be adj ustabl e an d of ai r-core technol og y
Get
more
FREE
equi pm
ent und
er teststandards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
enclosu re fuse (for positi ve verification of arcing to ch assis, as applicabl e)
closing switch – m ay be located as shown or ahead of lim iting im pedance
NOTE Since the transi ent recovery voltag e characteristics of test circuits, includi ng larg e air-core reactors, are
not representati ve of usual service con ditions, any air-core reactor in each ph ase is typical l y shunted by a resistor
(not sh own i n the diagram ) taking approxim ately 0, 6 % of the current throu gh th e reactor
Figu re EE.3 – 2-wire test circuit for single ph ase
UPS short-time with stand current
EE.2 Test set up
The U PS ou tpu t should be set up as prescribed in 5. 2. 3. 1 03. 1 .
EE.3 Calibration of the test circuit
The resistance and reactance of the test circuit, if applied to the rated AC input source,
should provide the current listed in Table 1 04 and satisfy the test conditions specified in
Table 1 04. The source reactance is represented by X and should be im plemented with linear
reactors that m ay be ad justable and of air-core technolog y. They should be connected in
series with the resistors R. The parallel connecting of reactors is acceptable when these
reactors have practicall y the same tim e constant. The leads to the u nit under test should be
included in the calibration.
EE.4 Test procedure
I n sum mary, the test steps are as follows.
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 223 –
a) Adjust the impedance of the test facility for the purpose of providing the req uired
prospective short-circuit test current ( Icp ) without the U PS in accordance wi th table 1 02.
b) I nsert the U PS or circuit to be tested and enable the corresponding current path.
c) Appl y the short-circuit current.
d) Verify com pliance.
The test should be perform ed as prescribed in 5. 2. 3. 1 03.
The phase current(s) should be recorded d uring the test for the purpose of verifying that
calibration test conditions were not exceeded .
The U PS m anufacturer may declare a rated conditional short-circuit current ( Icc ) and
specify a protective device F1 to be used in conj unction with the unit under test, that should
be placed between the U PS input terminals and the AC input source. The closing switch SW
shou ld be fitted at the load terminals of the UPS . When the switch SW is closed, the test
current should be maintained until it is interrupted by F1 or until the prescribed duration of the
test current has elapsed.
EE.5 Test verification criteria
Refer to 5. 2. 3. 1 03.
– 224 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
An n e x F F
(informative)
M a xi m u m
h e a ti n g
e ffe c t i n
tra n s fo rm e r
t e s ts
Subclause 5. 2.3. 1 04 requ ires transform ers to be load ed in such a way as to give the
maxim um heating effect. I n this annex, examples are given of various methods of producing
this condition. Other methods are possible, and com pliance with 5. 2.3. 1 04 is not restricted to
these examples.
FF. 1
D e t e rm i n a t i o n
o f m a xi m u m
i n p u t c u rre n t
The value of the input current at
is established ( Ir, see step A of Table FF. 1 ). The
valu e may be established by test or from m anufacturer's data.
ra t e d
l o ad
A load is applied to the ou tpu t winding or to the ou tpu t of the switch m ode power suppl y u nit
while m easuring the inpu t current. The load is adj usted as q uickl y as possible to provide the
maximum value of input current ( Im , see step B of Table FF. 1 ) that can be sustained for
approximatel y 1 0 s of operation. The test is then repeated according to step C and, if
necessary, steps D to J of Table FF. 1 . The input current at each step is then noted and
maintained until either:
a) the temperature of the transformer stabilizes without the operation of an y component or
protective device (inherent protection), in which case no further testing is conducted; or
b) com ponent or protective device operates, in which case the winding temperature is noted
imm ed iatel y, and the test of Clause FF. 2 is then conducted depending on the type of
protection.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I n case an y component or protective d evice operates within 1 0 s after the application of the
prim ary voltage then the value of Im is that recorded just before the component or protective
device operates. I n conducting the tests described in steps C to J of Table FF. 1 , the variable
load is adj usted to the req uired value as quickly as possible and readjusted, if necessary,
1 m in after application of the prim ary voltage. The sequ ence of steps C to J m ay be reversed .
Tabl e
FF.1
– Te st s tep s
I n p u t c u rr e n t
o f th e
t r a n s fo r m e r
or
S te p s
s wi tch
A
I nput current at
ra t e d
m od e
l oad
p o wer s u p p l y u n i t
( Ir )
B
Maxim um value of i nput current after 1 0 s
of operati on ( Im )
C
Ir
+ 0, 75
(Im
‒ Ir )
D
Ir
+ 0, 50
(Im
–
Ir )
E
Ir
+ 0, 25
(Im
–
Ir )
F
Ir
+ 0, 20
(Im
–
Ir )
G
Ir
+ 0, 1 5
(Im
–
Ir )
H
Ir
+ 0, 1 0
(Im
–
Ir )
j
Ir
+ 0, 05
(Im
–
Ir )
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
FF. 2
– 225 –
Overl oad test proced u re
I f the test of Clause FF. 1 results in condition FF. 1 b), the following applies depend ing on type
of protection.
Electronic protection:
Thermal protection:
Overcurrent protection:
The current is either red uced in steps of 5 % from the cu rrent of
condition FF.1 b) or increased in steps of 5 % from the rated l oad
to find the maxim um overload at which the tem perature stabilizes
without the operation of an y electronic protection.
An overload is applied such that the operating tem perature
rem ains a few d egrees below the rated opening tem perature of
the thermal protection.
An overload is applied such that a current flows in accordance
with the current versu s time trip curves of the overcurrent
protective device.
– 226 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Annex GG
(normative)
Requi remen ts for th e mou nti ng means
of rack-m ou n ted eq ui pment
GG. 1
General
These requirements apply to the mounting means of eq uipment having a m ass exceeding 7 kg
and installed in a rack that can be extended away from the rack for installation, service and
the like.
These req uirem ents d o not appl y to equipment fixed in place and provid ed with equ ipment
subassem blies or racks having a top installation position less than 1 m in height from the
floor .
For the purpose of these req uirements, the m echanical m ounting m eans for such equipm ent
will be referred to as slid e rails. These requ irements are intended to redu ce the likelihood of
injury by retaining the eq uipment in a safe position and not allowing the slide rails to buckle,
the m eans of attachm ent to break, or the equ ipment to slide past the end of the slide rails.
NOTE 1
Slide rails i nclud e beari ng slid es, friction slid es or other equi valent m ounting m ean s.
NOTE 2 Slid e rail constructions of integ rated parts/un its of the end product (for exam ple, pull out paper trays in
copiers/pri nters) are n ot consid ered to be rack-m ounted equi pm ent.
Slide rails shall have end stops that prevent the equipment from unintentionall y sliding off the
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
mounting means.
GG. 2
M echani cal strength test, vari abl e force
The slid e rails shall be installed in a rack with the equipm ent, or eq uivalent setup, in
accord ance with the manufacturer’s instructions. With the equ ipm ent in its extended position,
a force in add ition to the weight of the equ ipment is to be applied down wards through the
centre of gravity for 1 min by m eans of a suitable test apparatus providing contact over a
circular plane surface of 30 mm in diam eter. I f appl ying this force cou ld dam age the
equipm ent, a m etal plate or other m eans to distribute the force m ay be placed under the test
apparatus. The total force shall be calculated based on the mass of the equipm ent plus an
additional m ass as d eterm ined below.
NOTE This add ition al force is intend to take into account other item s or devices that can be stacked on top of the
installed rack-m ounted equi pm ent wh ile i n the extend ed position d uri ng instal lation of other equipm ent.
For slide-rail mounted eq uipment, where the slide rails are mou nted horizontall y on each sid e
of the eq uipment, the total force applied to the slide rails shall be equal to the greater of the
following two values:
–
–
1 50 % of the eq uipment mass plus 330 N ; or
1 50 % of the equ ipm ent m ass, plus an additional mass, where the ad ditional mass is
equal to the equipm ent mass, or 530 N, whichever is less.
For slide rail m ounted equipm ent where the slide rails are mounted verticall y on the top and
bottom of the equipm ent in the rack, the total force applied to the slide rails shall be 1 50 % of
the equ ipment m ass, with a m inim um force of 250 N and a m aximum force of 530 N.
I f the supporting su rface is intended to be a shelf, then the distribu tion of force over a m etal
plate u nder the test apparatus d oes not apply. The manufacturer shall specify the m aximum
load intend ed to be placed on the shelf in order to determ ine the force that needs to be
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 227 –
applied to the shelf. A m arking shall be provided on the shelf to ind icate the maxim um weight
that can be added to the shelf. The force test shall be conducted at 1 25 % of the m axim um
weight stated by the manufacturer. The force is to be applied directl y by m eans of the test
apparatus providing contact over a circu lar plane surface of 30 mm in diameter.
GG.3 Mechanical strength test, 250 N force, including end stops
The slid e rail mounted equipm ent is installed in a rack in accordance with the man ufacturer’s
instructions. A 250 N static force is applied to the slide rail mounted equ ipment, in every
direction except upward, to inclu de the most unfavorable position of the slide rail mounted
equ ipment, for a period of 1 min. The force is applied to the slide rail m ounted eq uipment in
its fu ll y extended (service) position as well as its normall y recessed (operatin g) position by
means of a suitable test instrum ent provid ing contact over a circular plane surface of 30 mm
in diameter. The force is applied with the com plete flat surface of the test instrument in
contact with the eq uipment. The test instrument need not be in fu ll contact with uneven
surfaces (for example corru gated or cu rved surfaces).
NOTE Additional requi rem ents for a d ynam ic force test on th e end stops are un der consid eration.
GG.4 Compliance
Compliance is checked by inspection and available manufacturer’s data. If data is not
available, then the tests according to Clauses GG.2 and GG.3 are conducted.
The eq uipment and its associated slide rails shall rem ain secure during the tests. One
com plete cycle of travel of the equipm ent on the slid e rails shall be performed after
com pletion of each test. I f the m ounting m eans is not able to perform one complete cycle
without bind ing, a force of 1 00 N shall be applied horizontall y to the front centre point of the
equipm ent with the intent to completel y retract th e equ ipm ent into the rack. Shou ld the
equipm ent fail to full y retract, the mounting means shall not bend or buckle to an y extent that
cou ld introduce an injury. End stops shall retain the equipment in a safe position and shall not
allow the equipment to slide past the end of the slide rails.
– 228 –
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
Bibliography
I EC 60073: 2002 , Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
identification – Coding principles for indicators and actuators
I EC 60085,
Electrical insulation – Thermal evaluation and designation
IEC 6021 6 (all parts),
IEC 60309-1 ,
requirements
Electrical insulating materials – Thermal endurance properties
Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes – Part 1: General
Electrical installations of buildings – Part 5-53: Selection and erection
of electrical equipment – Isolation, switching and control
IEC 60364-5-53: 2001 ,
IEC 60449,
Voltage bands for electrical installations of buildings
Effects of current on human beings and livestock – Part 5: Touch
voltage threshold values for physiological effects
IEC/TR 60479-5: 2007,
IEC 60664-5: 2007, Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems – Part 5:
Comprehensive method for determining clearances and creepage distances equal to or less
than 2 mm
Fire hazard testing – Part 11-5: Test flames – Needle-flame test method –
Apparatus, confirmatory test arrangement and guidance
IEC 60695-1 1 -5,
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
I EC 60721 (all parts),
Classification of environmental conditions
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 7-1: Ancillary equipment –
Terminal blocks for copper conductors
I EC 60947-7-1 ,
IEC 60947-7-2, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 7-2: Ancillary equipment –
Protective conductor terminal blocks for copper conductors
IEC 60950-1 ,
Information technology equipment – Safety – Part 1: General requirements
IEC 61 008 (all parts) ,
Residual current operated circuit-breakers without integral overcurrent
protection for household and similar uses (RCCBs)
IEC 61 009 (all parts), Residual current operated circuit-breakers with integral overcurrent
protection for household and similar uses (RCBOs)
I EC 61 082-1 ,
Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules
I EC 61 1 40: 2001 ,
equipment
IEC/TS 61 201 ,
Protection against electric shock – Common aspects for installation and
Use of conventional touch voltage limits – Application guide
IEC 61 508 (all parts),
safety-related systems
Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products –
Part 1: General requirements and tests
IEC 61 558-1 ,
I EC 62040-1 : 201 7 EXV © I EC 201 7
– 229 –
I EC 61 558-2-1 6, Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for
supply voltages up to 1 100 V – Part 2-16: Particular requirements and tests for switch mode
power supply units and transformers for switch mode power supply units
IEC 61 643-1 2, Low-voltage surge protective devices – Part 12: Surge protective devices
connected to low-voltage power distribution systems – Selection and application principles
IEC 62079: 2001 , Preparation of instructions – Structuring, content and presentation
I EC 62423: 2009, Type F and type B residual current operated circuit-breakers with and
without integral overcurrent protection for household and similar uses
IEC 60076-1 1 : 2004, Power transformers – Part 11: Dry-type transformers
I EC 60287-1 -1 : 2006, Electric cables – Calculation of the current rating – Part 1-1: Current
rating equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of losses – General
IEC 60364-5-52, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 5-52: Selection and erection of
electrical equipment – Wiring systems
IEC 60925, D.C. supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps – Performance
requirements 3
I EC 60947-1 : 2007, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules
I EC 60947-3: 2008, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 3: Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units
I EC 60947-6-1 : 2005, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 6-1: Multiple function
equipment – Transfer switching equipment
I EC 60947-6-1 : 2005/AMD1 : 201 3
I EC 61 347 (all parts), Lamp controlgear
I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 1: General
rules
I EC 61 508 (all parts), Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
safety-related systems
I EC 62040-3: 201 1 , Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) – Part 3: Method of specifying the
performance and test requirements
I EC 621 03, Electronic equipment for use in power installations
I EC 6231 0-1 , Static transfer systems (STS) – Part 1: General and safety requirements
I EC 62368-1 : 201 4, Audio/Video, Information and communication technology equipment –
Part 1: Safety requirements
___________
___________
3
This docum ent has been with drawn, but for th e purposes of thi s docum ent it is given as a reference.
Get more FREE standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats
INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSI ON
Get
FREE
3, rue
de more
Varembé
PO Box 1 31
CH-1 21 1 Geneva 20
Switzerland
Tel: + 41 22 91 9 02 1 1
Fax: + 41 22 91 9 03 00
info@iec.ch
www.iec.ch
standards from Standard Sharing Group and our chats